EMPIRES IN ARMS

MODIFIED RULES FOR OUR GAME

Latest Revision 29 Dec 2013

1.0 INTRODUCTION / COMPONENTS

EMPIRES IN ARMS is a strategic and diplomatic game for up to 7

players that covers the Napoleonic wars from 1805 until 1815. The
military counters in the game generally represent corps andfleets, with
each army factor being equivalent to roughly 1000 to2000 men and each
"ship" equivalent to 1 ship of the line or a number of smaller ships of
approximately equal force.

[ 1.1] THE MAP: The game is played on two maps which, when placed
together, show Europe and parts of Asia and North Africa. It is divided
into "areas" by colored lines for the purpose of regulating movement.
Some of these lines have additionalfunctions-as national or provincial
borders and/or as rivers. These lines and all other mapboard terrain
features are identified on the TERRAIN EFFECTS CHART printed in the
northwest corner of the combined mapboard.
1.1.1 WEST PRUSSIA: Add "(P)" after "West Prussia", i.e. West
Prussia is a possiblePolish province. DB& JJ
1.1.2 OFEN: For purposes of the 4.4 Victory Conditions Chart
only, Ofen is an Austrian national capital city (i.e. a victorious
power may not select Hungary for cession unless all other
Austrian provinces are already ceded). For purposes of
8.2.1.1 (Money Collection by Taxation) and all other rules,
Ofen remains a provincial capital.MLB

[ 1.2 ] THE COUNTERS: There are eight sets of counters-one for each
of the major powers and one for the minor neutrals. Allcounters have a
distinctive background color-white for Austria, green for Russia, light
green for Turkey, blue for Prussia, light blue for France, red for Great
Britain, yellow for Spain and gray for the neutrals. The motifs on the
counters are decorative and functional, distinguishing infantry and
cavalry corps, fleets, and depotsand also provide information necessary
for the play of the game.There are two sizes of counters provided in the
game-the large counters for corps, fleets and depots, and the small
counters for garrisons and off-map counters, guerrillas, cossacks and
freikorps, control flags, leaders and assorted markers. The
informationprovided on each counter is shown as follows:
1.2.1 LEADER COUNTER CHANGES:
1.2.1.1 WELLINGTON: The British leader Wellington has a
strategic rating of 4, not 5 as printed on the counter. MLB
[ 1.3 ] THE RULES: The rules are written in sequence of playorder.
As rules sections are read, it is helpful to pull out and examinethe
component or chart being discussed while reading the rule. Somerules
relate only to the campaign games and are not required forplay of the
scenarios. Rules used only for the campaign games aredenoted by an
asterisk (*) in the rule heading. An asterisk with anyrule heading
indicates that all of that rule and all of its subsidiaryrules are ignored
for play of the scenarios. Players should play atleast a scenario or two
to familiarize themselves with the game'scombat and supply mechanics
before trying a campaign game. Atable of contents is provided to help
find and reference rules duringthe play of a game.

[ 1.4 ] THE GAME CARD: The Game Card contains the

mostcommonly used charts and tables for easy reference during a
game.Two copies are included.
1.4.1 Missing Minors: The Minor Countries Chart omitted a
line for Finland and Norway. If separated from their major
districts, treat use the National Modifiers on the MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART of Sweden for Finland and Denmark for
Norway. JJ

[ 1.5 ] THE NATIONAL CARDS: The seven National Cards for the
major powers have two sides, and players may use either side in a
game, as desired. Side one is used with small garrison/strength counters
to record the strengths of corps and fleets and with economic
manipulation markers for economic manipulation (see option 12.5) and
is recommended for use with the scenarios. Side two must be copied,
with pencils and erasers used to record and modify necessary
information and is recommended for use with the campaign games. The
card for the minor countries also has two sides. Side one is used to

1
record the strengths of corps and fleets the same as the major power cards'
side one, while side two has forms for use with option 12.6 and must be
copied (numerous copies needed) and cut up for use. If side two of the
major power's national cards are used side one of the Minor Country
National Card is not needed as strengths can be recorded on the major
powers' copies of side two.
[ 1.6 ] THE STATUS CARD: This card is used with small counters to
record political status, victory points and the game date. The back
2.0 GAME SETUP
After players decide which scenario or campaign game to play, the
following must be done to prepare for play.
[ 2.1 ] SELECTION OF MAJOR POWERS: For the scenarios, players
may utilize any preferred method to select sides. For the campaign games
we recommend the procedure covered in 14.2.
[ 2.2 ] SCENARIO SETUP: The setup for each scenario is described in
the scenario rules (see 13.0), and the setup for each campaign game is
found in the campaign game rules (see 14.0). These contain needed
specific setup information not found here.
[ 2.3 ] MAPBOARD AND GAMING AREA SETUP: The two maps
should be counter folded to lay flat and placed together so that they match
up. EMPIRES RV ARMS is a large game that requires a large area in
which to play, and any table selected should be large enough not only to
hold the maps but also to provide room for the various cards to be placed
near and around the maps.
[ 2.4 ] COUNTER SETUP: This is covered in more detail in 13.0 and
14.0.
2.4.1 MAPBOARD COUNTERS: The forces on the map are
represented by various counters. The strengths of garrisons (use
garrison/strength counters), Cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas are directly
shown by the factor on the actual counter. These factors are totally
interchangeable within their type (e.g., a 5 factor militia garrison counter
may be exchanged for a 2 factor plus a 3 factor militia counter, etc.). Each
cossack or freikorps counter is worth exactly one factor. The strengths of
corps and fleet counters are recorded off the map.
2.4.2 USING THE NATIONAL CARDS: The maximum strengths of
corps and fleets are shown on the appropriate National Cards (one card
per major power, and one for all of the minor countries). The corps and
fleet counters when face-up on the map only show their general type and
movement allowance. Which corps each counter represents is shown on
the back of the counter and may be examined by only the owning player,
except when its identity must be revealed to other players (e.g., during a
combat-see 7.5.2.6.3). The designation of each fleet (and its movement
allowance) is shown on the front of the counter and so its designation and
exact strength should always be known to all players.
2.4.2.1 USING SIDE ONE OF THE NATIONAL CARDS: Side one of
each National Card contains spaces for indicating the strength of every
corps and fleet of that major power or of the minor countries.
2.4.2.1.1 Showing Strengths: The number in each box indicates the
maximum number of ships or army factors of that type that that corps or
fleet may contain. The current strength of a corps is shown by the
placement of garrison/strength counters in the appropriate boxes. For this
purpose, use any national or neutral infantry or militia garrison/strength
counter or counters. The counters used can be of any type or nationality,
as it is their strength and the box they occupy that determine their effect
and what they represent. For example, a French militia counter of 3
factors in a Russian cavalry box acts as 3 cavalry factors, not as militia.
3.0 SEQUENCE OF PLAY OF THE GAME
A "Turn" in EMPIRES IN ARMS represents one month of real time.
Each Turn consists of a number of "phases" which may be further broken
down into "steps." Each phase or step is completed by all players before going
to the next. Any phases or steps that do not apply during a Turn can be
skipped. The sequence of a Turn (also given on the Game Card) is as
follows:
2
contains additional forms to be copied and cut up for use with option
12.6.
[ 1.7 ] THE DICE: Two 6-sided dice are included.
[ 1.8 ] OTHER: Pencils and scratch paper (not included) are useful.
These factors are also interchangeable (e.g., a 2 and a 1 factor counters
can be exchanged for a 3 factor counter, etc.), as with the garrison
strengths (see 2.4. 1). Note that most corps for most major powers allow
for a maximum number of regular infantry and/or militia factors plus an
additional number of cavalry factors (plus an additional number of guard
factors in some cases).
2.4.2.1.2 Altering Strengths: The current strength of a corps or fleet is
altered as strengths vary (e.g., because of swapping factors between
corps, combat losses, foraging losses, garrison detachments, etc.) by
changing the number of factors in the appropriate boxes of that corps or
fleet.
2.4.2.1.3 Economic Manipulation (Optional): If option 12.5 is used, the
major power's economic manipulation markers should be initially placed
in the 0 boxes of their ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAYS.
2.4.2.2 USING SIDE TWO OF THE NATIONAL CARDS: Side two
of the major power National Cards is recommended for campaign games
because most garrison/strength counters will be required to show
garrisons and also because other sections are handy for maintaining
economic and reinforcement records for both the major powers and their
controlled minor Free States. This side of the cards should be
photocopied and used simply by penciling in information and erasing as
changes are made.
2.4.2.2.1: Corps and fleet strengths for both the major power and its
controlled minor Free States can be penciled in and erased and adjusted
as necessary.
2.4.2.2.2: Money expenditures between Economic Phases, prisoners, etc.
can be recorded on any free space on the copies.
2.4.2.2.3: Economic manipulation (see option 12.5) is recorded as part of
the ECONOMIC AND MANPOWER WORKSHEET on side two plus
using the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAYS on side one.
2.4.3 STATUS CARD SETUP: The displays on this card record game
information.
2.4.3.1 TIME: Place the Turn markers (month and year) in the
appropriate boxes of the TIME DISPLAY to match the starting date of
the scenario or campaign.
2.4.3.2 * VICTORY POINTS:Place the victory point markers (three per
major power) on the VICTORY POINTS DISPLAY to record each major
power's starting victory points as given in the campaign. Use the negative
sides to show negative points (possible in campaign games starting in
1805 if 14.2 and/or 14.3 are used) and the positive sides to show positive
points.
2.4.3.3 * POLITICAL STATUS: Place the political status markers (one
per major power) on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY to record each
major power's starting political status as given in the campaign. The
starting boxes for each campaign are identified by letters for the major
power (i.e., "Tu" =Turkey) and Roman numerals referenced to the
campaign games on the "Campaign Setup" line of the boxes. The
POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the back of this rulebook is for
reference when using the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY.
[ 3.1 ] * THE POLITICAL PHASE: See 4.0. Players interact to
achieve the game's political goals. This phase is performed in steps, as
follows:
A. The Diplomacy Step.
B. The Declarations of War Step.
C. The Call to Allies Step. The order of calling is determined by
competitive die rolls.
D. The Peace Step. Peace term selection order is determined by the order
the major powers went to war.
E. The Creating Alliances Step.
F. The Minor Country Control Step. Setup in the order: France,
Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
G. The Breaking Alliances Step.
H. The Free State Declaration Step.
I. The Declaration of Combined Movement Step.
[3.2 ] THE REINFORCEMENT PHASE: See Section 5.0.
Reinforcements are introduced into the game and strength factors are
transferred or eliminated. This phase is performed in steps, as follows:
A *.The Naval Reinforcement Step.The major powers performthis step
in the order; Spain, France, Prussia, Austria, Turkey,Russia, Great
Britain.
B. The Army Reinforcement Step. The major powers perform this step
in the order; Spain, Great Britain, Prussia, Austria, Turkey, Russia,
France.
[ 3.3 ] * THE NAVAL PHASE: See 6.0. All naval operations are
handled. The major powers perform this phase in the sequence; Great
Britain (any announced position in the sequence), Russia, Turkey,
Austria, Prussia, France, Spain. As each major power performs this phase,
the following steps are performed in order:
A. The Naval Movement Step.
B. The Naval Combat Step.
[ 3.4 ] THE LAND PHASE: See 7.0. All land operations are handled.
The major powers in campaign games perform this phase in the sequence;
France (any announced position in the sequence), Russia, Turkey,
Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain. In scenarios the French always go
first, followed by all of the other major powers on the other side. As each
major power performs this phase, the following steps are performed in
order. (Perform Steps A-E in each Major Power’s Sequence. Perform
Step F at the end of the last player’s Land Phase.)
4.0 * THE POLITICAL PHASE
The actions of the Political Phase occur in the following order of steps
and during this phase only. The exception to this is declaration of war,
which can also occur at other specified times (see 4.3, 4.6.4.2, 4.6.5,
6.3.1.2.2 and 7.3.8.3).
[ 4.1 ] THE DIPLOMACY STEP: During this step, an agreed-upon
period of time is set aside for discussion among the players. We
recommend no more than 5-10 minutes to keep the game moving.
Generally, players will wish to separate into pairs or small groups and
move out of earshot of others for "secret” negotiations. This is the time to
talk to other players about getting together for declarations of war,
checking to see if allies will respond if called, preliminary discussions
about peace terms, asking if others wish to ally, deciding on combined
movements and their announcement, expressing pleasure or displeasure,
making promises and threats, etc.
Diplomacy can be conducted at any phase during the gameFIN; however,
we will NOTregularly stop the game for players to conduct diplomacy.JJ
[ 4.2 ] THE DECLARATIONS OF WAR STEP: Next, each player
secretly writes down every major power or neutral minor country upon
which he has chosen to declare war (if any). Players not declaring war
may wish to write "no declarations" just to keep everybody guessing. All
declarations are revealed simultaneously. In order for a major power and
its controlled minor countries to attack another major power or neutral
minor country or their forces, a declaration of war must have been made
between them during this step (EXCEPTIONS: see 4.3, 4.6.4.2, 4.6.5,
6.3.1.2.2 and 7.3.8.3). A major power that declares war is called an
"aggressor", and a major power or neutral minor country upon which war
is declared is called a "defender."
4.2.1 POLITICAL POINT LOSSES FOR WAR DECLARATIONS:
Major Powers lose political points for each of their declarations and these
changes must be recorded (see the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on
the Status Card).
4.2.1.1: A major power loses three political points whenever it declares
war on another major power. Additionally, if a major power declares war
on an ally, there is an additional loss of two political points for breaking
the alliance by the declaration of war.
4.2.1.2: A major power loses one political point for each district (see
10.4) in a neutral minor country when it declares war on that minor
3
A. The Depot Creation/Removal Step'
B. The Land Movement Step.
C. The Supply Step.
D. The Land Combat Step.
(1) Resolve field, limited field and trivial combats.
(2) Resolve siege combats.
E. The Guerrilla Step.
F. * The Conquest Step.
[ 3.5 ] * THE ECONOMIC PHASE: See 8.0. This phase occursonly
every three months-at the end of the March, June, Septemberand
December Turns. This phase is performed in steps as follows:
A. The Victory Points Step.
B. The Money and Manpower Collection Step.
C. The Lending Money Step.
D. The Manipulation Step.
E. The Money and Manpower Expenditure Step.
F. The Political Status Adjustment Step.
G. The Civil Disorder Step.
H. The Ceding Step.
I. The New Political Combinations Step (see options 11. I- 11. 6 and
11.8).
J. The Levy Step.
K. The UMP Control Step.
[ 3.6 ] THE TIME RECORD PHASE: See 9.0. The passage ofa Turn
is recorded.
HR 3.1 Se adoptan los siguientes automatismos :
1. Guarniciones de un factor se rinden automáticamente
en caso de brecha.
2. Guarniciones de depot de un factor destruyen el depot
siempre que son atacadas y se retiran a la ciudad.
3. Cuerpos de infanteria sin lider y de un factor se refugian
siempre en la ciudad si son atacados.
country, unless no major power can be found to run that minor country
(see 4.6).
4.2.2 LIMITATIONS OF DECLARATIONS: A major power may
declare war within the following limitations:
4.2.2.1: A major power may not declare war on another major power or
neutral minor country if the declaring major power has corps, freikorps,
cossacks, garrisons or guerrillas within the second major power's
territory or within that neutral minor country.
4.2.2.2: A major power already at war with another major power may
not declare war on other major powers if unbesieged enemy infantry
corps are already inside of its home nation.Gen 23/4
An area that cannot be reached by land movement from Paris or
London does not count as being inside one’s home nation for the
purpose of this rule only (ie. Turkish or Spanish islands).
4.2.2.3: War may not be declared on a neutral minor country if it is
physically impossible for the declaring major power to enter the minor
country's territory during the Turn.
HR 4.2.2.3 Expl.: Físicamente imposible quiere decir que no
se puede entrar con tropas de tierra de ninguna forma
posible, pero se puede declarar guerra si se llega dentro
del territorio aunque sea con marchas forzadas y a traves
de territorio de otra nacion. Si hay cuerpos enemigos o no
que puedan bloquear ese movimiento no se tendra en
cuenta. En el caso de tener que ir por mar para llegar, la
única condicion sera que haya flotas con tropas en un
puerto y que haya movimiento suficiente de la flota para
llegar a desembarcar en un area cualquiera de esa
nacion. Por lo tanto se debe tener en cuenta las
limitaciones de movimiento de las flotas combinadas y
que transportan tropas, pero no si esa flota esta bloqueada
o no.
4.2.2.4: A major power may not declare war against another major
power if restricted by an enforced peace (see 4.4.6.3). EXCEPTIONS:
See 6.3.1.2.2 and provisions of peace term B.6 (see VICTORY
CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card.
4.2.3 EXTENT OF DECLARATIONS: A declaration of war on a
major power is also (at no further cost in political points) a declaration
of war on all of its controlled minor countries. Controlled minor countries
may not have war declared upon them separately.
[ 4.3 ] THE CALL TO ALLIES STEP: Any major power who has in
this Political Phase declared war on another major power or has had war
declared upon it, may demand that an ally immediately declare war on the
new enemy, if not already at war with that enemy. If there is more than
one declaration of war during a Declaration of War Step, the order in
which defending and then ally to more than one major power
simultaneously, the same or aggressor players may "call to allies" is
determined by competitive die rolls.
4.3.1 ALLY CALLING PROCEDURE: A player may call on some
allies and not on others, at the calling player's discretion.
4.3.1.1: The defender calls his allies first, and then an aggressor may call
his allies only if the defender has attempted to do so. If there were
multiple declarations of war, all defenders call on their allies followed by
(if allowed) all aggressors.
4.3.1.2: If two major powers declare war on each other simultaneously,
they are both considered aggressors and thus neither may call allies.
4.3.1.3: Should a called ally of a defender refuse a call, that refusing ally
is considered to have broken the alliance and loses the requisite political
points (-2. See the POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the back of these
rules). If any allies of an aggressor refuse his call to allies, both the ally
and the aggressor are considered to have broken the alliance, with both
losing the requisite political points (-2) for breaking an alliance.
4.3.1.4: If any ally cannot declare war because of peace-time restrictions
(an enforced peace-see 4.4.6.3), that ally may not be called upon. If an
ally cannot declare war for other reasons (see 4.2.2. 1 and 4.2.2.2), the
ally can still be called and, since the call cannot be answered, will be
forced to break its alliance.
HR 4.3.1.4 Expl.: Es decir, si tienes cuerpos enemigos en tu
territorio natal (no asediadas) y te llaman como aliado
debes romper la alianza al no poder acudir.
4.3.2 ANSWERING A CALL: Allies called upon may only declare war
upon the original aggressor or defender-further declarations of war
resulting from a call to allies do not permit a further call to allies.
[ 4.4 ] THE PEACE STEP: Peace may be made only at this time. A
lapse of war with a minor country may also occur during this step (see
4.6.6). Peace must be in one of the following forms.
4.4.1 INFORMAL PEACE: Two major powers may informally agree to
a peace between themselves on whatever general terms they decide, none
of which are enforceable, and no political points are involved. An
informal peace may never involve removing forces, the immediate ceding
of territory, corps on loan, royal marriages, removal of leaders or
dissolving or re-establishing the Holy Roman Empire. In this case there is
no 18 month enforced peace and no enforceable reparations, trade
restrictions, etc. can be imposed but forces are repatriated (see 4.4.6.2).If
major powers simultaneously sue each other for peace (some players
prefer to have this written and revealed simultaneously), they MUST both
accept an informal peace. Gen 27/2
4.4.2 SUING FOR PEACE: A major power wishing to "surrender" may
"sue" for peace. Minor countries may not sue for peace, although peace
can come through a "lapse" in a war (see 4.6.6).
4.4.2.1: A major power may not sue for peace to another major power
that does not have forces within the suing home nation’s borders unless,
at the same time, it sues for peace to all major powers with which it is at
war.
4.4.2.2: When a major power sues for peace, the opponent must then
offer a "formal peace," either a "conditional peace," which must be
accepted, or an "unconditional peace," which may be accepted only if the
suing player desires.If desired, and several major powers are being sued
for peace, have each player write down 'conditional' or 'unconditional'
before revealing all the peace proposals simultaneously.Gen 27/2
4.4.2.3: Political points change as follows (also see the POLITICAL
POINTS CHART on the back of these rules):
4.4.2.3.1 Conditional Surrender: A major power accepting the conditional
surrender of another major power gains + 3 political points. A major
power that surrenders conditionally to any number of other major powers
at the same time (but does not surrender unconditionally to any other
major power at that same time) loses-5 political points.
4.4.2.3.2 Unconditional Surrender: A major power accepting the
unconditional surrender of another major power gains +5 political points.
A major power that surrenders unconditionally to any number of other
major powers at the same time (some simultaneous surrenders may be
conditional, but at least one must be unconditional) loses -8 political
points.
4
4.4.3 CONDITIONAL PEACE: If the peace is conditional, the loser
surrenders and chooses one "peace condition" (also called a "peace
term")that will apply to him with that victor from list "A" of the
VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card and the victor
chooses up to two peace conditions from list "B" not conflicting with
the list "A" choice. If surrendering condition ally to more than one
major power simultaneously, the same or a different peace condition
from list "A" may be selected for each victor.
4.4.4 UNCONDITIONAL PEACE: If the peace is unconditional,
each victor chooses up to three conditions from lists "B" and/or "C"
and the surrendering loser does not get a choice from list "A". Certain
choices in list "B" preclude choices from "C" and vice-versa, as shown
on the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card.
FAQ 4.4.4b: If condition C.6 is chosen by all victors, they must all name the same
specific leader to remove.
FAQ 4.4.4c: If condition C.6 is chosen, a leader not yet available (ex. Blucher in 1805)
can´t be chosen for removal.
Interpretación 4.4.4 Elba: Un CI en préstamo por condición
B4 NO puede recibir refuerzos ni absorber guarniciones. SI
puede destacar guarniciones, a voluntad del vencedor
(no del propietario). En este caso, los factores destacados
cuentan como bajas del cuerpo. Los factores destacados
pasan a ser controlados autom´ticamente por el
propietario.
El modificador de forage (+1) por territorio amigo se refiere
en este caso al del pais controlador, no al del propietario.
El CI en préstamo no permite ni la creación de CIs de
refuerzo, ni de depots, ni el uso de líderes del propietario.
ER: Victory Conditions: On the Game Card, under B.4, does
the corps on loan revert upon losing half (rounded down)
of its army factors? A: Yes -- round fractions down for
determining half of the corps' army factors.
ER: Victory Condition B.6: Add: "Although 4.2.2.4 can be
ignored in this case, the other restrictions of 4.2.2 still apply.
ER: Victory Conditions C.7: Change the word "American" to
"colonial".
4.4.5 SIMULTANEOUS PEACEWITH MULTIPLE ENEMIES: If
a major power makes peace by "surrendering" to two or more enemies
at once, it loses only one (the larger, if there is a difference) set of
political points.
4.4.5.1: The victors choose their peace terms on an alternating basis
until each has gained the maximum number of peace terms possible
and/or desired or all peace terms available for that type of surrender
have been taken.
4.4.5.2: Victors choose their alternating peace terms in the order that
they went to war with the surrendering power-if the victors went to war
at the same time (a major power that went to war as a result of a call
from an ally is considered to have gone to war after the caller), resolve
the order of choice by competitive die rolls.
4.4.5.3: Regardless of the number of victors, no peace term may be
chosen more than once (EXCEPTION: peace term C.6, which all
victors must choose as one of their selections to go into effect). For
example, if one victor chose peace term B.4 (which also precludes
choices B.1 and Cl ), no other victor could choose B.1, B.4 or C.].
4.4.6 EFFECTS OF PEACE: When two major powers make any type
of peace, the following are always done:
4.4.6.1 PRISONER EXCHANGE: All surrendered factors and
captured leaders are mutually exchanged. The exchanged factors are
placed the same as reinforcements (see 5.2 and 5.3) during the next
Reinforcement Phase. This is the only time prisoners are exchanged,
although captured leaders may be returned at other timesat the captor's
option (see 10.6.3).
HR 4.4.6.1: Esta HR aclara el FAQ 4.4.6.1. Los factores
capturados de caballeria se devuelven como factores de I
(ya que se considera que los caballos son confiscados), la
guardia retorna como G (siguen siendo soldados
veteranos y entrenados), y la artilleria vuelve como 1/2 I
(redondeado hacia abajo, son soldados entrenados pero
sin cañones. Los factores Ck, Fk y Gr, no se devuelven. Los
factores feudales vuelven como factores de infantería
feudal (hasta el límite de los cuerpos de infantería
feudales, el exceso se pierden). El jugador turco puede
volver a reclutar feudales al año siguiente (no se captura
el "cuerpo"), y todos los feudales capturados se eliminan a
la vez que se hacen nuevas levas.
Addendum: Los factores de Guardias retornan como
refuerzos en la siguiente fase económica.
4.4.6.2 FORCE REPATRIATION: All corps in the other major power's
territory are picked up and moved to the nearest area or areas in a now
(after the control of ceded territories has been marked) friendly-controlled
province or minor country. Similarly, garrisons are picked up and moved
to the nearest friendly area or areas where depots and/or cities are
available to hold the factors. If two or more areas are equidistant, the
owning player chooses the area, or may choose to place some forces in
some of or each of the equidistant areas. All depots in the other major
power's territory are just picked up. All fleets (unless given permission to
stay) must leave during the next Naval Phase. EXCEPTION: If the victor
chooses peace term C.5, none of the victor's forces may be repatriated,
but garrison factors in capital cities must (except with permission to stay)
be moved to the nearest possible area(s) that can hold them that is not a
capital city.
[12.4] PEACE TREATY LIMITED ACCESS: This option supersedes
the force repatriation rules in 4.4.6.2 and forces are not
repatriated when peace is made. Instead, when peace is
made, the former enemies have a period of automatic
"limited access" to get their forces out of the former enemy
power's territory.
12.4.1 GARRISONS: By the end of three Land Phases after
peace is made, all garrison factors must be out of the other
major power's cities. In the case of a victor that chose peace
condition C.5, the requirement is reduced to getting garrisons
out of the capital cities during this period.
12.4.2 CORPS, FLEETS AND DEPOTS: By the end of six Land
Phases after peace is made, all corps, fleets, depots and
depot garrison factors must be out of the other major power's
territory. This requirement can be ignored by a victor that
chose peace condition C.5.
12.4.3 FAILURE TO LEAVE: Any forces that have not met the
requirements in 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 in the required times must
be demobilised and/or scuttled during the next
Reinforcement Phase (NOTE: rule 5.1.4.2 limitations on
scuttling may be ignored to meet this requirement) unless the
major power controlling the territory grants voluntary access
(see 10.3).
4.4.6.3 MANDATORY ENFORCED PEACE LENGTH: Except for
an informal peace, neither Major Power may declare war on the other for
18 months (EXCEPTIONS: see 6.3.1.2.2 and provisions of peace term
B.6). Certain peace terms may extend this time period for the loser (see
peace terms B.2 and C.2 on the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on
the Game Card). Keep written records of when peaces are made and when
major powers may again go to war.
4.4.6.4 STATUS OF CEDED MINOR FREE STATES: Any major
power that acquires minor Free States as a result of peace conditions B.7
or C.4 may accept them as they are with their forces or immediately
change them to conquered minor countries and remove their forces as in
8.8.5.
4.4.7 SEPARATE PEACE AND ALLIES: If a major power surrenders
to some but remains at war with other major powers, a major power with
which war continues may demand that an ally or allies that was a victor in
the formal peace immediately break their alliance(s) with the major
power still at war (and lose -2 political points for breaking the alliance).
For example, Russia and Austria are allies and are both at war with
Prussia. Prussia surrenders to Austria, but not to Russia. The Russian
player may demand that Austria break its alliance with Russia. An ally
may also demand that an ally that concludes an informal peace with a
common enemy break their alliance.
4.4.8 A FINAL PEACE: If, as a result of a formal peace, a major
power's province containing its home nation's capital is ceded (which can
only be done if no alternate province is available for ceding), that major
power is permanently out of the game and all of its home nation forces
are permanently eliminated from the map.
[ 4.5 ] THE CREATING ALLIANCES STEP: New formal alliances
are now announced and each of the two major powers that ally gain
political points (see the POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the back of
these rules).
5
4.5.1: Major Powers who are already allied may not re-ally with each
other.
4.5.2: Major Powers at war with one another may not ally.
4.5.3: Major Powers that broke an earlier alliance may not re-ally until
at least twelve months after the date of breaking the earlier alliance
(keep written records of when alliances are broken).
[4.6] THE MINOR COUNTRY CONTROL STEP: A major power
must, if possible, be chosen to run each neutral minor country upon
which war has been declared. The major power chosen must not be at
war with that neutral minor country and may only be an ally of a major
power at war with it if there are no non-allies willing or eligible to run
it. If there is no major power willing or eligible to run the minor
country, no attacker loses political points for declaring war on it and its
forces are not set up. (See 10. 2. 1 for conquering min or neutral
countries.)
FAQ 4.6: If a minor country is controlled by a power which
has declared combined movement with the power with
which that minor is at war, the minor moves with its
controlling power.
4.6.1 CONTROL CHANGE DUE TO INSTABILITY/FIASCO
POLITICAL STATUS: If a controlling major power's political status
marker is located in' the Instability or Fiasco Zones on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card during a Minor Country
Control Step, its controlled minor countries may change control or
revert to neutral status at the start of this step (see 10.5.2 for details).
4.6.2 SELECTING CONTROLLING MAJOR POWERS: The
major power who will run the minor country is that with the highest
modified die roll, with any ties being decided by additional competitive
unmodified die rolls. Each eligible major power that wishes do so may
roll a die, modifying the result by:
4.6.2.1 NATIONAL MODIFIERS: Find the national modifiers on the
MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card Next to the name of
each minor country in the "National Modifiers" column, is the national
modifier located under an abbreviation of each major power.
4.6.2.2 STATUS MODIFIERS: See the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card. The "Status Modifier" is given to the
right of each line or "zone." For example, if a major power's political
status marker is in a box of the Dominant Zone, the modifier is + 1.
4.6.2.3 ALREADY AT WAR: If already at war with any of the major
powers who have declared war on that minor neutral, a +2 modifier
applies.
4.6.3 ASSUMING CONTROL PROCEDURE:
4.6.3.1 MARKING CONTROL: The major power selected to run the
minor country gains a political point per district (see 10.4) in the minor
country (record on the POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the Status
Card), and, to show control, places one of its control flags in the minor
country. If the minor country has no forces, a conquered control flag is
placed there. If the minor count has forces, that player places a Free
State control flag in that country and immediately sets them up. Once a
player has been selected to run a minor country, that minor country
may no longer incur separate declarations of war, until it returns to
neutrality.
4.6.3.2 ORDER OF SETUP: If the forces of a number of different
minor countries all need to be set up, they should be set up by the
controlling major powers in the order: France, Russia, Turkey, Austria,
Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
4.6.3.3 INITIAL STRENGTH FACTORS: The MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card shows the starting minor
country strengths in infantry ("If"), cavalry ("Cv") and ships ("Sh") for
campaign games starting in the given years. This chart also shows the
state of each minor country at the start of these campaign games-
whether it is neutral, conquered, a Free State, what major power
controls it, etc.
4.6.3.4 LAND SETUP: Any, all or none of the minor country corps are
set up in any area(s) of that minor country and its initial army strength
factors distributed among those corps and/or as garrisons.
4.6.3.4.1 CAPITAL GARRISON: Every neutral minor (even those
which have no corps marker) when declared war upon gains one
infantry PER CAPITAL to place as a garrison. This is in addition to
any forces listed on the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART. At a minimum
this one factor must remain as a garrison until the minor is conquered,
the war lapses or the controlling major is no longer at war. When the
war ends, if the minor is a Free State, it retains the garrison(s),
otherwise remove them. JJ
4.6.3.5 FLEET SETUP: If the minor country has a fleet, it is set up in
any port in that minor country or in any sea area adjacent to such a
port, at its current strength.
4.6.3.6 POLITICAL POINTS FROM CONTROL: The major power
controlling the minor Free State gains and loses political points for any
combats involving the minor country's forces.
4.6.4 MORE THAN ONE DECLARATION OF WAR UPON
A MINOR COUNTRY: If more than one major power has declared war
on the same neutral minor country in the same Turn, any of the major
powers may back down from the war declaration (but still lose the
political points for the declaration)-if necessary, the involved players
should secretly write down their intentions and reveal them
simultaneously. If any two major powers who are both in a period of
enforced peace (see 4.4.6.3) with each other and hence are not able to
declare war upon one another, both declare war upon the same minor
country then they must both back down, still paying the political point
cost for the war declaration. If a major power is unable to declare war on
any other major power that also declared war on the minor country for
anyother reasons (see 4.2.2.1 and 4.2.2.2 or for portions of a loser's
enforced peace that exceed a winner's enforced peace), that major power
must back down, still paying the political point cost for the war
declaration. Major Powers are not considered to have broken an alliance
by these actions.
4.6.4.1 RETAINING CONTROL: If, after this, no major powers remain
at war (including a lapse of war-see 4.6.6) with the minor country it
remains in the control of the major power who gained control through
4.6.2.
4.6.4.2 FORCED WAR DECLARATIONS: If two or more major
powers do not back down and remain at war with the minor country, each
must declare war on all the other major powers also attacking the minor
country (if not already at war with them all). All those remaining major
powers are eligible to attack the minor country and each other, but not
minor country's the controlling major power (unless at war with it).
4.6.4.2.1: This costs the same in total as a declaration of war on
one major power.
4.6.4.2.2:If there are any allies and/or royal marriages involved, then the
alliances and/or royal marriages are broken and the requisite points lost
for EACH. Gen 23/4
4.6.4.2.3: There are no calls to allies for these declarations of war.
4.6.5 MAJOR POWER SUPPORT OF CONTROLLEDMINOR
COUNTRIES: The minor power's controlling major power now has the
option (if eligible and not restricted-see 4.2.2) of declaring war on none,
any, or all of the aggressors.
4.6.5.1: This costs (in political points) the same in total, regardless of the
number of declarations of war, as for a declaration of war on one major
power (-3 political points) plus the political points lost for each broken
alliance (-2 political points). No allies can be called for these declarations
of war.
4.6.5.2: If the controlling power desires to help the minor country against
the major power(s) attacking it, it has to declare war on or already be at
war with the other major power(s) before its forces can take part in any
combat with that other major power. If it is not at war with at least one of
the attacking major powers, the con-trolling major power may not
garrison or control any cities of the minor country other than with that
minor country's factors-the minor country must be run using only the
minor country's own forces, although the controlling major power may
pay for depots and/or supply costs for the minor country.
4.6.5.3: The controlling major power's corps are ignored in any combat
involving that minor country's forces unless against a force which
consists of factors of one or more countries with which it is at war (see
6.3.1 and 7.3.8)
5.0 THE REINFORCEMENT PHASE
Reinforcements are those counters and strength factors including leaders
due to enter the game in the current month. All operations discussed in
this section may be performed only during this phase, unless stated
otherwise.
[ 5.1 ] * THE NAVAL REINFORCEMENT STEP: In this step, all
players may place on the board those naval reinforcements due this Turn.
This step is performed in the order; Spain, France, Prussia, Austria,
Turkey, Russia, Great Britain.
5.1.1 PLACING EMPTY FLEET COUNTERS: Purchased (see 8.5.4)
empty fleet counters (called "fleets") may be placed in any friendly-
controlled home nation port or with any existing fleet counter but must
6
FAQ 4.6.5.2: If a major power gains control of a minor via a
declaration of war, but does not declare war on the
invader, the controlling power's leaders can't be sent to
lead minor troops.
HR 4.6.5.2: Las tropas de un menor no pueden ser utilizadas
contra una potencia que no haya declarado la Guerra a
ese menor pero que esté en guerra contra su controlador
(control parcial) hasta que haya pasado el lapso de
guerra referente al control de ese menor y su control no
esté en entredicho, o hasta que su potencia controladora
declare la guerra a la potencia agresora del menor. A
partir de ese momento, el control del menor pasa a ser
total por parte del Major Power controlador.
4.6.6 LAPSE OF WAR WITH MINOR COUNTRIES: If, during
any Peace Step prior to the conquest of a minor country, any invading
major power has no corps within that minor country, then that major
power is considered to be no longer at war with the minor country and
must be at war with the major power controlling it before he can attack
it again. Any garrisons, cossacks and/or freikorps are repatriated as per
4.4.6.2. NOTE: For multi-districtminor countries (see 10.4), this
applies if a secondary district has been conquered and there are no
invading major power corps within the rest of that minor country.
[ 4.7 ] THE BREAKING ALLIANCES STEP: A major power may
break any standing alliances, even if made this Turn, paying the
political points cost of -2 for breaking an alliance. This is not a
declaration of war.
[ 4.8 ] THE FREE STATE DECLARATION STEP: Major powers
can declare that any of their conquered minor countries that can have
corps are now minor Free States. Replace the conquered control flag
with a Free State control flag in that country. Its fleet if any, is set up at
its current strength and its corps, fleets, land, and naval factors may be
purchased beginning in the next Economic Phase (see 8.2 and 8.5).
Once a major power has declared a minor country to be a Free State, it
may not be later "undeclared" (ie., switched back to being a conquered
minor country by that major power).
[4.9] THE DECLARATION OF COMBINED MOVEMENT
STEP: Allies may declare that their Naval and Land Phases will be
combined for the remainder of the Turn, with movement of all their
forces being conducted in the order of the ally moving last in each
phase. This enables allies to move and attack together (see 6.1.2 and
7.1.2).If desired, write down combined movement declarations and
reveal them simultaneously.Gen 23/4
FAQ 4.9.2: OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: Two powers
who are not allied both can't declare combined
movement with a common ally, thereby gaining combined
movement with each other.
HR 4.9.2 Expl: El mov. combinado sólo puede ser entre
aliados. Todos han de estar aliados con todos. Además,
para que una nacion haga movimiento combinado con
varias otras naciones, todas estas otras naciones deben
hacer movimiento combinado entre ellas, y por supuesto,
para poder hacerlo deben estar ya aliados entre sí.
have at least one ship strength factor (called "ships") immediately
placed in (see 5.1.2) or transferred (see 5.1.3) to them.
5.1.2 PLACING SHIPS: All ships due this Turn (see 8.5.3) may be
placed in any of their fleets (including fleets just placed by 5.1.1) in a
friendly controlled home nation port or conquered minor country port,
whether blockaded or not, but not so as to exceed the ship capacity of
any fleet. Ships due this Turn can be postponed until any later Turn or
Turns (keep a written record of all postponed ships). Minor Free State
ships are added similarly but only in ports of that minor Free State.
5.1.3 TRANSFER OF SHIPS: During a Naval Reinforcement Step, a
major power may also transfer ships between fleets occupying the same
sea area, blockade box or port. Fleets of different nationalities
(including different minor countries or of a major power and any minor
country) may not transfer ships. If all ships are transferred from a fleet,
the fleet counter is removed from the map at no cost in political points
(see 5.1.4. 1).
5.1.4 REMOVING FLEETS AND SHIPS ("SCUTTLING")
A player may remove any of his fleet counters (permanently eliminating
all untransferred ships, if any, that they contain). Scuttling can also occur
under conditions covered in 6.2.6.
5.1.4.1: Each fleet "scuttled" that contains one or more ships causes the
loss of -1 political point (record on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY
on the Status Card). Removing a fleet that contains no ships costs no
political points.
5.1.4.2: Minor country fleets and major power UMP (see 14.3) fleets may
never be scuttled during this step.
5.1.4.3: A fleet counter must be repurchased during the Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase (see 8.5.4) to be
placed back on the map.
12.1.2 SHIP BUILDING LOCATIONS: When ships are purchased,
the exact port or ports where these ships will become
available when completed (ie., where they are being "built")
must be noted and announced (their building is common
knowledge). These ports are the only ones where these ships
can become available as reinforcements.
12.1.2.1: If a port city containing building and/or completed
but unassigned ships is occupied by an enemy, all of these
major power ships are considered to be destroyed.
12.1.2.2: If a minor free state port city containing building
and/or completed but unassigned ships is occupied by an
enemy, these minor power ships are not necessarily
considered to be destroyed and, if building, construction can
continue normally, as the major power that took the port
desires (competitive die rolls determine the ships' fate if a
mixed force occupies the port and agreement cannot be
reached). Control of these ships will eventually go to the
major power that controls both the minor country fleet
counter and the port, so that the ships can be transferred to
the fleet.
[ 5.2 ] THE ARMY REINFORCEMENT STEP: In this step, all
players may place on the board those army reinforcements due this Turn.
Army factors of artillery, regular cavalry, guard infantry (called "guard"),
regular infantry and militia infantry (called "militia") factors (feudal
infantry, feudal cavalry, insurrection corps militia, insurrection corps
cavalry, cossack, freikorps and guerrilla factors are also army factors but
they are not placed on the map-board during this step unless part of a
prisoner exchange-see 4.4.6. 1) due this Turn must be added as
reinforcements. Their placement may not be delayed. Army factors that
cannot be placed are lost. This step is performed in the order; Spain,
Great Britain, Prussia, Austria, Turkey, Russia, France.
5.2.1 CORPS COUNTER REINFORCEMENTS:
5.2.1.1 SCENARIO CORPS PLACEMENT: The scenarios specifically
provide for the placement of new corps counters. If placement is not
possible, due to enemy control of or the presence of enemy corps in the
placement area, the corps counters (and all army factors they hold) are
lost.
5.2.1.2 * CAMPAIGN CORPS PLACEMENT: Purchased empty corps
counters may be placed in an unbesieged home nation city (or minor Free
State city for corps of that minor Free State) or with any existing,
unbesieged friendly corps. A factor must be immediately placed in (see
5.2.2.2) or transferred (see 5.2.3) to such a corps.
5.2.2 PLACING ARMY FACTORS: If placement of any army factor
reinforcements is not possible, due to corps limits or garrison capacities
or enemy siege and/or control of cities, these reinforcements are lost.
5.2.2.1 SCENARIO ARMY FACTOR PLACEMENT: The scenarios
specifically provide for the placement of all reinforcement forces. Army
factors specified to be placed in an area may be added to corps or as
garrisons in that area. For the scenarios, eligible corps are those that are
unbesieged and which have the capacity to hold the factors.
5.2.2.2 CAMPAIGN ARMY FACTOR PLACEMENT:
5.2.2.2.1 Adding to Corps Inside Home Nations: Factors may be added to
any unbesieged corps of the same nationality which has the capacity and
is inside its home nation (this excludes ceded provinces). Minor Free
State factors can be added in this way, but inside that minor Free State's
borders. NOTE: Feudal corps must be in their home province which
currently contains no unbesieged enemy corps (see 10. 1. 3) or off-map
and insurrection corps must be in an Austrian-controlled border province
which currently contains no unbesieged enemy corps (see 10. 1.4) or off-
map-during an Army Reinforcement Step feudal and insurrection corps
will only get reinforcements from prisoner exchanges (normally they get
7
new factors during December Levy Steps-see 8.10, 10.1.3.1 and
10.1.4.3).
5.2.2.2.2 Adding Factors to Garrisons: Regular infantry (guard or
regular cavalry factors may be 'Converted to infantry factors in order to
be placed in garrison-see 7.3.3.2) or militia factors may be added as
garrisons in unbesieged friendly-controlled cities in the home nation.
Minor Free State infantry factors can be added in this way but only
inside that minor Free State's borders.
5.2.2.2.3 Adding Factors to Corps in Supply: Any army factor can be
added to an unbesieged corps of the same nationally which is not up to
full strength (for the type of factor) and which is on or adjacent to a
friendly depot that is a supply source or part of a valid supply chain
(see 7.2.3). Another major power's depot or supply chain may not be
used for this purpose.
FAQ 5.2.2.2.3: According the the definition of "valid supply
chains" given in 7.2.3.2, intervening uncontrolled territory
does not affect the supply chain, therefore the
reinforcements can be placed. Adding factors to corps in
supply may reinforcements "cross" uncontrolled territory.
For example, if a corps is on a depot that is in a valid
supply chain, but the area between that depot and the
next depot is an uncontrolled minor, reinforcements can be
placed.
5.2.2.2.3.1: For regular infantry, regular cavalry, artillery or
guard infantry factors, this depot must be part of a valid supply
chain of six or less depots to that point, which starts at a supply
source in the home nation.
5.2.2.2.3.2: For militia factors, the valid supply chain can only
be at most three depots long to that point.
5.2.2.2.3.3: Minor Free States may receive their factors in the
same way, but must trace a supply line (of their controlling
major power) back to a supply source in their minor country.
5.2.2.2.3.4: Supply lines for reinforcements may be also be
traced in whole or in part via sea supply (see 7.4.3) but not via
invasion supply (see 7.4.4)
HR 5.2.2.2.3: Aclaración : el límite de depots en la línea de
suministro para recibir refuerzos incluye el depot
inicial de la cadena.
5.2.3 TRANSFER OF ARMY FACTORS: During an Army
Reinforcement Step unbesieged corps in the same area may exchange
factors as desired, capacity permitting. Corps of different nationalities
(including different minors or a major power and a minor country) may
not exchange factors. This is the only time during a Turn that army
factors may be exchanged except to detach and absorb garrison factors
(see 7.3.3). Army factors may also be exchanged with garrisons in the
same area during this step, the same as in 7.3.3 and, if all factors are
detached from a corps, the corps counter is removed (see 5.2.4).
EXCEPTIONS: Feudal, insurrection and artillery factors may not be
exchanged.
5.2.4 REMOVING CORPS AND ARMY FACTORS ("DEMO-
BILIZING"): At this time army factors forming all or any part of a
garrison of a city or depot and/or corps counters (and any army factors
they may hold) may be removed from the board. These factors are lost,
but there is no political point penalty.
5.2.4.1: In scenarios a corps counter may be brought back on the map
when a corps counter is designated as a reinforcement.
5.2.4.2 *: In campaign games, a corps counter that has been removed
from the map must be purchased during a later Money and Manpower
Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase (see 8.5.4) to be returned to
the map.
12.1.1 MILITIA CONVERSION: During a Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step, while at war with no other
major power, a major power's player may remove any
militia factors located in controlled home nation territory
from the map and pay three money points per militia factor
to "convert" them to regular infantry factors. These new
regular infantry factors are returned to the map as
reinforcements three months later (ie., the same as newly-
purchased regular infantry factors).
5.2.5 SCENARIO MONEY: Money received in scenarios arrives
during the Army Reinforcement Step (money arrives during the
Economic Phase of campaign games). Money is in the form of "money
points," denoted by a "$" for convenience.
[ 5.3 ] LEADER RETIREMENT AND REINFORCEMENT:
Leaders may be retired from the map during their appropriate
Reinforcement Step or if all their corps are eliminated by foraging (see
7.4.1.3.3) or by failure to disembark (see 6.2.5.2). Leaders may not be
retired if in a besieged city (a besieged port city must also be blockaded
to prevent a leader's retirement). Retired leaders are returned (along with
newly introduced leaders) as reinforcements on any later Army
Reinforcement Step (Naval Reinforcement Step for the NELSON leader).
Leader reinforcements may be placed with any corps (fleets for
NELSON) controlled by their major power.
5.3.1 LEADER MINIMUMS:If a major power loses leaders
(wounded or killed, captured leaders do not count) and has
fewer leaders than listed for their country below, then they
may receive a “generic” replacement leader counter to his
force pools. This represents a random general that would be
available if other leaders were killed or wounded
“generic”replacement leader. There can only be one extra
leader per country. On the Reinforcement Phase [5.0] where
a major power again has this minimum (due to wounded
leaders returning or gaining new leaders as listed
reinforcements), then instantly remove the “generic” leader,
even if he is besieged. JJ
Austria: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 123D
France: fewer than 4 leaders, gains a 223D
GreatBritain: fewer than 1(non-naval) leader, gains
a Kingdom factors count for this limit.) At the end of any
222D - Yes,this give GB a leader at the start of the
1805 campaign.
Prussia: fewer than 2 leaders, gains a 122D
Russia: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 114D
Spain: fewer than 2 leaders, gains a 112D
Turkey: fewer than 3 leaders, gains a 213D
5.3.1.1 When a Replacement Leader Can be Used: When a
replacement leader becomes available, during the next
6.0 THE NAVAL PHASE
[ 6.1 ] THE NAVAL PHASE SEQUENCE: At the beginning of this
phase, Great Britain announces when in the following sequence he will
be moving. The other major powers move in this order:Russia, Turkey,
Austria, Prussia, France, Spain.
6.1.1 MINOR FREE STATE SEQUENCE: All naval forces of minor
Free States move with their controlling major power.
6.1.2 COMBINED MOVE SEQUENCE: In order for a major power to
move in the sequence of another major power, those major powers must
be allies and must have announced combined movement during the
Declaration of Combined Movement Step of the Political Phase.
Combined major power movement is conducted in the sequence of the
ally who would have moved last in the phase.
6.1.3 NAVAL PHASE STEPS: Each major power sequence of the
Naval Phase is divided into Naval Movement and Naval Combat Steps.
Each player completes both steps during his major power sequence before
the next player commences his major power sequence. The player taking
his sequence and his counters are described as "phasing" during that time
and all other players and their counters are called "non-phasing."
[ 6.2 ] THE NAVAL MOVEMENT STEPS: Major power players may
move any or all of their fleets up to the limit of their movement
allowances during their sequence of a Naval Phase.
6.2.1 GENERAL NAVAL MOVEMENT RULES: Each fleet has a
maximum movement allowance of 7 movement points. Phasing fleets
may expend from 0 to 7 movement points each during their sequence.
Movement points may not be accumulated from Turn to Turn nor may
they be transferred among fleets.
6.2.1.1 SEA MOVEMENT COSTS: Each sea area entered costs one
movement point.
6.2.1.2 PORT/BLOCKADE BOX MOVEMENT: It costs one point to
move into a port from any of the sea areas touching its blockade box and
vice-versa. It costs one movement point to enter a blockade box from an
adjacent sea area or vice-versa. It costs no movement points to move
between a port and its blockade box or vice-versa and all fleets entering
or exiting ports are considered to do so by passing through the port's
blockade box. To signify that a fleet is in port, it is placed on the coastline
of the associated land area. A fleet(s) may enter a port controlled by
another major power or neutral minor country only to attack a fleet(s)
there or with the controlling major power's permission, even if the port
city has no garrison. In no other cases may a fleet be located in a land
area.
8
Reinforcement Phase [5.0] add the country specific leader
to that country’s force pool. (Example: Spain is down to one
leader and so gains his 112D.) There can only be one extra
leader per country in use. This leader may be added as a
normal leader from this point onwards. On the
Reinforcement Phase [5.0] where a major power again has
this minimum (due to wounded leaders returning or gaining
new leaders as listed reinforcements), then instantly
remove the “generic” leader, even if he is besieged. JJ
5.3.1.2 Replacement Leader Capture: A replacement
leader is never captured. If the stack with a replacement
leader is completely destroyed, the replacement leader is
returned to the controlling player.These represent generic
leaders of no real importance. If one is “captured” or killed,
they would just replace him with some other general. JJ
5.3.1.3Replacement Leader Usage Restrictions:
Areplacement leader may only be stacked with a force
where at least 50% of the army factors are of the same
nationality. (Neither controlled minor Free States nor
phase where there arefewer than 50% of the leader’s
national forces in the same stack as the replacement
leader, remove that leader from the board (unless
besieged). He can be brought in again normally on the
next Reinforcement Phase [5.0] normally as long as the
requirements in 5.3.1.1 are still met. JJ
FAQ 6.2.1.2: If a fleet enters a blockaded port using its last
MP, declines to be intercepted (per 6.2.3.1.2.1), and joins
with the fleet already there, the combined fleet may then
move to the blockade box and attack, because rule
6.2.1.2 states that it costs no MPs to move from the port to
the blockade box.
HR 6.2.1.2: Las casillas de bloqueo son áreas navales
especiales, pero con las características del resto de áreas
navales, y se pueden construir depósitos en las casillas de
bloqueo.
6.2.1.3 DARDANELLES MOVEMENT: A fleet may not enterthe
Dardanelles sea area unless that major power controls an unbesieged
Constantinople, besieges Constantinople (see 10.7) or has access (see
10.3) from the major power controlling Constantinople.
HR 6.2.1.3 Expl: El que controla Constantinopla decide
quien pasa, excepto por C.5. Una flota dentro de
Constanipla o el Mar de marmara siempre puede salir de
alli, pero solo puede entrar si el que controla el estrecho lo
quiere.
6.2.1.4 ICE LINE RESTRICTIONS: A fleet may not exit or enter a
sea area north of the ice line during any winter month (see 9. 1). If
already in a sea area north of the ice line, it must remain these until
winter ends and no naval combats can be fought.
12.2.1 OPTIONAL SEA CROSSING ARROWS:
12.2.1.1 CHANNEL ARROW: Consider that there is a sea
crossing arrow between the Lille area and the area east of
Portsmouth.
12.2.1.2 DANISH/SWEDISH SEA CROSSING ARROWS: These
areas are extremely narrow and could be dominated even
by the guns of the period. A fleet in the sea area cannot
block any of the sea crossing arrows in Denmark or the one
connecting the Copenhagen and Malmo areas if enemy
corps and/or garrisons are located in both land areas
connected by the arrows.
12.2.2 NAVAL RAIDING: For each sea area adjacent to
Great Britain that contains an enemy fleet(s), British colonial
trade is reduced by 5 money points (maximum reduction
to "0"). This is determined during an Economic Phase.
6.2.2 NAVAL MOVEMENT PROCEDURE: A major power's fleets
occupying the same port, blockade box or sea area must always be
combined into one "stack." Major powers that are in the same port,
blockade box or sea area that have announced combined movement are
treated as one stack.
FAQ 6.2.2: If a fleet moves into an area with another fleet of
the same nationality and is intercepted, the intercepting fleet
have to attack both fleets. The rule quoted was 6.2.2, which
states "A major power's fleets occupying the same port,
blockade box, or sea area must always be combined into
one 'stack'."
6.2.2.1: A player may pick up any or all of the fleets in a stack and begin
moving them as one stack.
6.2.2.2: Fleets may be added to this stack by moving it to the port,
blockade box or sea area containing the fleet(s) desired to be added.
6.2.2.3: Fleets may be dropped off in any port, blockade box or sea area
through which the stack passes.
6.2.2.4: Once a stack ends its movement, it may not be moved again this
player sequence (EXCEPTIONS: for interceptions, for retreat or pursuit
following naval combat or to leave an enemy-controlled port-see 6.2.6).
6.2.2.5: So long as no fleet moves twice nor exceeds its movement
allowance, the player may continue to repeat this process until all desired
fleets have been moved.
12.2.3 MOVING LARGE FLEETS/ TRANSPORTS: Larger fleets or
fleets convoying transports are not as mobile as smaller
fleets.
12.2.3.1: These rules apply to fleets in an area that are all
controlled by one major power and/or using combined
movement. They do not apply to fleets in the same area that
are controlled by different major powers that are not using
combined movement.
12.2.3.2: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack where
some or all of the fleets are transporting corps and/or contain
a depot for invasion supply loses "-1" movement point off of
its movement allowance for the Naval Phase.
12.2.3.3: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack loses "-1"
movement point off of its movement allowance for the Naval
Phase per fleet in the stack in excess of one fleet. For
example, the movement allowance in a stack of two fleets
would be reduced to "6" and, in a stack of three fleets, would
be reduced to "5".
12.2.3.4: Rules 12.2.3.2 and 12.2.3.3 are cumulative if both
apply. However, the maximum movement allowance
reduction that ever applies is "-3" movement points - a
movement allowance of "4" movement points is the least to
which a stack can be reduced.
12.2.3.5: These movement allowance reductions apply only
to normal naval movement-they do not apply for naval
retreat and pursuit movements.
6.2.3 NAVAL INTERCEPTIONS: Fleets may move through areas
containing other fleets (even enemy fleets) with no restriction on
movement, except that they may be interrupted by interception. In that
case an interception combat is fought immediately and if, and only if, the
phasing major power's fleets win the interception naval combat may they
continue movement (without any movement penalty). Interceptions may
not be attempted on stacks that are retreating or pursuing (see 6.3.5).
6.2.3.1 INTERCEPTION PROCEDURE: When a phasing stack enters
a sea area occupied by or adjacent to one or more enemy stacks, those
enemy stacks may attempt to intercept the moving stack. An "enemy
stack" is any stack containing fleets at war with any fleet or fleets in the
phasing stack and/or at war with any corps that the phasing stack may be
transporting.
6.2.3.1.1 Sequence of Interception Attempts: If more than one eligible
major power wishes to attempt an interception, they must make their
attempts in the major power sequence decided for movement in 6.1. Once
one major power succeeds, no other major power may attempt an
interception of that same phasing stack in that same area. Stacks that
made or attempted earlier interceptions may be used again for later
interceptions of different phasing stacks in the same area or of the same
phasing stack in a different area. Major Powers who have declared
combined movement count as one major power for the purposes of
interception, making their interception attempts in the sequence position
of the major power going later in the sequence.
6.2.3.1.2 Who May Intercept: Only properly placed fleets in the
appropriate circumstances may attempt to intercept.
6.2.3.1.2.1: A fleet entering a port (which must always be done
through a blockade box-see 6.2.1.2) may not be intercepted unless
the phasing player announces that he wishes to be intercepted. This
9
is an exception to the rule of automatic interception in a
blockade box (see 6.2.3.1.2.3).
6.2.3.1.2.2: A fleet in a port may only intercept enemy fleets
entering the adjacent sea area(s) and then only if not blockaded.
FAQ 6.2.3.1.2.2.1: A fleet in port can intercept an enemy
fleet leaving that port's blockade box if that leaves no
more blockading fleets. See rule 6.2.3.1.2.2.
6.2.3.1.2.3: A fleet entering a blockade box may only be
intercepted by enemy fleets which currently occupy that
blockade box and a fleet in a blockade box may only intercept
enemy fleets which enter that blockade box (and the interception
is automatic if attempted).
6.2.3.1.2.4. A fleet adjacent to the Dardenelles sea area would
not be able to intercept fleets entering that area unless it was
permitted under the restrictions of 6.2.1.3.
6.2.3.1.2.5: If a major power attempting an interception has
several different stacks available for an interception, one stack
only may be selected and announced for that interception
attempt. If that stack fails to intercept, no other stack of the
major power may attempt that same interception.
6.2.3.2 RESOLUTION OF NAVAL INTERCEPTIONS:
6.2.3.2.1 Blockade Box Interceptions: When a phasing stack enters a
blockade box and is automatically intercepted by an enemy fleet(s)
there, it must win the immediate interception naval combat before it
can continue moving.
6.2.3.2.1.1: If more than one enemy major power's fleets occupy
that blockade box, the entering fleet(s) is intercepted by the
major power higher in the sequence specified in 6. 1.
ELBA : Todas las potencias que están en la casilla de
bloqueo pueden interceptar, en el orden dado por
6.1 ; 6.2.3.1.1 se aplica a las intercepciones en Casilla
de Bloqueo.
6.2.3.2.1.2: If all enemy fleets choose not to intercept, the
phasing fleet(s) may continue moving (the same as if the combat
had been won).
6.2.3.2.1.3: Since a phasing stack must enter a port to add fleets
in that port to the stack and fleets entering a port may avoid
blockade box interception (see 6.2.3.1.2. 1), a phasing player
wishing to add a fleet or fleets in a port to a stack has a choice of
how to handle a blockade box interception situation. The
phasing player may announce a wish to be intercepted in the
blockade box and fight an interception combat before entering
the port to add the fleets there or may avoid interception in the
blockade box and then (if movement isn't concluded in the port)
move the combined stack from the port to the blockade box for
an automatic (if interception is desired by the enemy) naval
combat then.
6.2.3.2.2 Sea Area Interceptions: Except for interceptions in a
blockade box, a die must be rolled for each stack attempting to
intercept.
6.2.3.2.2.1: If attempting to intercept a phasing stack in an
adjacent sea area, a 0 or 1 must be rolled on one die.
6.2.3.2.2.2: Attempting to intercept a phasing stack in the same
area requires a 0, 1, 2 or 3.
6.2.3.2.3 Nelson Interception Modifier: If the NELSON leader is with
the intercepting stack, one is subtracted from the die roll.
6.2.3.2.4 Intercepting Fleet Movement: If successful, the intercepting
stack must be moved to the area containing the phasing stack that was
intercepted, if not already there.
6.2.3.3 RESULT OF INTERCEPTIONS: If the interception is
successful, a naval combat is fought immediately, (i.e., during the
Naval Movement Step) using the naval combat rules (see 6.3). No
evasion by the phasing major power is possible from an interception.
6.2.3.4 OUTCOME OF INTERCEPTION COMBAT:
6.2.3.4.1 Intercepting Side Victory: If the intercepting major power's
stack wins the naval combat, the phasing major power must retreat its
stack in accordance with the naval combat rules (see 6.3.5), with that
stack of fleets then ceasing movement after the retreat move. In this
case, the intercepting fleets may continue to remain in the area for
(possibly) intercepting other phasing stacks or some or all of the
victorious fleets may pursue the defeated stack (see 6.3.5).
6.2.3.4.2 Phasing Side Victory: If the phasing stack wins the naval
combat, the intercepting stack must retreat in accordance with the naval
combat rules (see 6.3.5), and may not attempt more interceptions
during this major power's movement sequence. Some or all of the
phasing stack may pursue the defeated stack and/or continue movement
with whatever movement points the stack's fleets retain. Of course,
other fleets can attempt to intercept the phasing fleets in every other sea
area that is entered by repeating the interception procedure.
6.2.4 INITIATION OF NAVAL COMBAT: If a phasing stack end its
movement in a sea area containing an enemy stack, it may initiate an
attack against those enemy fleets in the Naval Combat Step (see 6.3). If a
phasing stack ends movement in a port or blockade box occupied by any
enemy fleet(s), an attack must be initiated on the enemy fleet(s). It a
number of attacks are initiated in different areas, the attacker decides the
order in which the naval combats are to be resolved.
6.2.5 NAVAL TRANSPORTATION OF ARMY CORPS AND
LEADERS: Corps and any accompanying leaders may be transported in
the Naval Phase at the rate of one corps per fleet. Fleets may transport the
corps of other major powers only if the two major powers have declared
combined movement during the Declaration of Combined Movement
Step of the Turn's Political Phase.Guerrillas, cossacks, freikorps,
insurrection corps leaders not accompanying corps, and garrison factors
may not be moved by sea.
6.2.5.1 TRANSPORTATION MOVEMENT PROCEDURE: The
corps and the fleet must both begin in the same friendly-controlled (it
may be besieged) port. Gen 23/4They move together until in the sea area
or blockade box adjacent to the land area in which the corps is to land or
until reaching a port. Fleets and the corps they transport may enter other
ports only if controlled or with access.
6.2.5.2 FAILURE TO DISEMBARK: If a corps does not disembark
during the Land Phase it is destroyed. If all corps are destroyed in this
manner, any leaders with the corps are retired from the map (see 5.3).
6.2.5.3 ELIMINATION OF TRANSPORTING FLEETS: If fleet
counters are eliminated, corps they were transporting in excess of the
number of fleets are lost. The corps so lost may not transfer factors before
being eliminated. If all corps are destroyed in this manner, any leaders
with the corps are captured.
12.2.4 REDUCED NAVAL TRANSPORT CAPACITY: If this option is
used, rule 6.2.5 is modified to redefine carrying capacity.
Fleets may carry no more than 10 army factors each,
regardless of how these are organised into corps (the army
factors must still be in corps). If transporting fleets are
eliminated, all excess army factors that they were
transporting are also eliminated these losses may be taken
from various corps, if desired.
6.2.6 ENEMY CONTROL OF A FLEET'S PORT: If a port in which a
fleet is located becomes enemy-controlled, the fleet must be moved
immediately (this will not happen during a Naval Phase, but during other
phases and steps, including during a Declarations of War Step) into an
adjacent sea area or the port's blockade box. Harbour defences are never
used against fleets leaving a port.
HR 6.2.6: El bando atacante es el que bloquea, tal como
indica la regla 6.2.3.1.2.3, es quien dispara primero, y si
empata pierde. Se rechaza expresamente el FAQ 6.2.6
6.2.6.1: If the port is blockaded by an enemy fleet at the time, the fleet in
the port is scuttled instead and all its fleets and ships are lost. Alternately,
if desired, the blockaded fleet(s) may choose to fight the blockading
fleet(s), with the wind gauge automatically going to the blockading
fleet(s). The blockaded fleet(s) remains in the blockade box if it wins the
combat. The blockaded fleet(s) must be scuttled if it loses the naval
combat.
6.2.6.2: If NELSON is with a scuttled fleet in this situation he is captured
by the major power controlling the port.
6.2.6.3: Unlike rule 5.1.4.2, minor country and UMP major power fleets
can be scuttled under these conditions.
6.2.6.4: Each fleet scuttled causes the loss of 1 political point (record on
the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card).
6.2.6.5: A scuttled fleet counter must be repurchased during an Economic
Phase (see 8.5.4) to be brought back into the game.
6.2.7 BLOCKADE OF PORTS: A stack may only enter a blockade box
if it is at war with the major power controlling the port or if the box or
port contains an enemy fleet or enemy corps with neutral fleets that have
announced combined movement (which makes transporting the corps
possible-see 6.2.5).
HR 6.2.7 Expl: Un jugador no puede colocar una flota en una
casilla de bloqueo propia, sólo puede atravesarlas para
entrar y salir del puerto por ese punto (y en su caso para
combatir). Tampoco puedo entrar si estoy aliado y con
permiso del dueño. La casilla sólo sirve para bloquear flotas
y/o cuerpos enemigos cuando estoy en guerra con ellos.
6.2.7.1: If a major power begins its naval sequence with a stack
occupying a blockade box and it is not at war with the major power
controlling the port, not at war with any fleet(s) occupying that port
and/or not at war with any corps in the port area that can be transported,
then the stack must leave that blockade box during its sequence of the
Naval Phase.
6.2.7.2: If a blockade box is occupied, a stack may enter or leave the port
without interception if not at war with any of the major powers with fleets
10
in the blockade box. However, a fleet not at war with any major
power's fleet in the blockade box may be intercepted if transporting a
corps of a major power that is at war with the blockading stack (or
portion of the stack-see 6.3.1.2).
6.2.7.3: Fleets of a major power that are at war with blockading fleets
may enter or leave that port but may be intercepted by the blockading
enemy major power's stack (see 6.2.3.2. 1). Stacks entering a blockade
box that win any interception combats, may then proceed into the port
or out to sea (see 6.2.3).
[ 6.3 ] THE NAVAL COMBAT STEP: These same rules apply to
naval combats caused by interception (see 6.2.3) or by initiation (see
6.2.4).
6.3.1 WHO MAY FIGHT: If enemy fleets of more than one major
power occupy a sea area, blockade box or port, only one major
powers's stack can be attacked (for this purpose, all major powers who
have declared combined movement and are at war with the attacker are
considered to be one major power). Other major powers in the sea
area, blockade box or port can be ignored (even with combined
movement declared, if not at war with the attacker).
6.3.1.1 NAVAL ATTACKER / DEFENDER DETERMINATION:
If there is more than one enemy major power present, the "attacker"
decides which will be the "defender." The attacker box) attack the is the
phasing side if 6.2.4 applies or the non-phasing intercepting side if the
combat is caused by an interception (see 6.2.3). The defender (at the
attacker's option) comprises any one defender's stack that is present.
6.3.1.2 WHO IS AN ENEMY: A stack may only attack another stack
if at war with the major power owning that stack, if at war with a major
power owning corps being (or that could be) transported by fleets of
that stackor more of the fleets involved in combined movement. In the
latter two cases, the attacker's stack need not be at war with the major
power owning the transporting fleets and if not, the attacker has the
option to either:Gen 27/2
6.3.1.2.1: Attack without a declaration of war (no political point loss
for a declaration of war) although political points are still normally
gained or lost for winning or losing the battle.
6.3.1.2.2: Or, immediately declare war (even if operating under an
enforced peace period, which can be ignored in this casealthough the
other restrictions in 4.2.2 still apply) Gen 25/4and lose the requisite
political points (see 4.2. 1. 1) for each separate declaration of war. No
allies may be called with these declarations of war.Even if an enforced
peace period is ignored, restrictions 4.2.2.1 and 4.2.2.2 still apply.Gen
27/2
HR resumen de FAQ 6.3.1.2: Dos naciones hacen
movimiento combinado y atacan a una nacion. Solo una
de ellas está en guerra con las que atacan. Solo la que
está en guerra puede combatir. Una flota ataca a otra de
dos naciones combinadas y solo está en guerra con una
de las dos naciones. El que ataca puede ignorar a la otra
con quien no está en guerra o atacar a ambas. Una flota
de dos naciones o mas combinadas atacan a otra flota de
dos o más naciones combinadas. Los que atacan deciden
a que naciones ignoran o a que naciones combaten,
siempre dependiendo de si ya estan en guerra con alguno
de los que atacan, en cuyo caso deben de combatir
obligadamente contra esa flota defensora. Si hay alguna
flota defensora que no está en guerra con nadie que
ataca puede ser ignorada o se la puede atacar, a
decisión del atacante.
6.3.1.3 ENEMY IN A PORT: A stack may attack an enemy stack or a
neutral stack that could carry enemy corps (they are in the same land
area and have announced combined movement) in a port city controlled
by a neutral major power.
6.3.1.3.1: If the attacking stack is given access by the port's controlling
major power, the harbordefenses are not used.
6.3.1.3.2: If denied access, the phasing stack can still attack, but the
port's controlling player may use the harbordefenses. No declaration of
war is required in this case, but 6.3.1.2.1 or 6.3.1.2.2 can be applied.
6.3.1.3.3: EXCEPTION: Even if the attacker has unconditional access
(see peace term C.5 and 10.3) and/or an earlier voluntary access
agreement with the neutral major power that garrisons the port to enter
the port, if the fleet(s) being attacked belong to the neutral major power
holding the port, the harbordefenses are used (see 10.3.2 to determine
who holds a city).
HR 6.3.1.3 Expl.: Los barcos en construccion no pueden ser
atacados por mar. Los ya construidos y no colocados en
flotas tampoco. Los barcos construidos y no colocados no
pueden combatir bajo ningún concepto.
6.3.2 POSSIBLE EVASIONS: The major power upon which an attack is
declared may attempt to evade unless the attack is caused by an
interception or is in a port or blockade box. If the evasion is unsuccessful
a combat will be fought. If the evasion is successful, the phasing player
may not then attempt to attack any other stack remaining in the area.
6.3.2.1: Every time the phasing major power intends to attack a stack, the
non-phasing stack may attempt naval evasion. This is done by the non-
phasing stack's controlling player rolling a die. If a 1 or 2 is rolled, the
non-phasing stack evades combat and is retreated according to the naval
retreat after combat rules (see 6.3.5.1-treat the evading side as if it were
the loser of a combat and the attacking side as if it were the winner).
6.3.2.2: There are no political points for a successful evasion.
6.3.3 NAVAL COMBAT PROCEDURE:
6.3.3.1 DETERMINING THE WIND GAUGE: If combat is to take
place, the "wind gauge" must be determined. A stack attacking in a port
combat, and blockading fleets combatting fleets exiting that blockade
box's port automatically have the wind gauge. In all other cases each side
rolls one die, adding one to the result if that side contains a British fleet
and adding a further one if NELSON is present. Notwithstanding these
modifiers, a 6 is the maximum modified result. If the net rolls are equal,
there is no wind gauge and combat is resolved simultaneously. In any
other case, the higher die roll gains the wind gauge and conducts its
attack first, removing losses inflicted on the opponent before the
opponent replies.
6.3.3.2 NAVAL COMBAT RESOLUTION: Each side rolls one die,
adding one if a British fleet is present on that side and subtracting one if
an Egyptian(See 12.12.2), Prussian and/or an Austrian fleet is present on
that side (these modifiers may cancel each other if both are present in the
same stack).The roll is compared to the NAVAL COMBAT TABLE on
the Game Card and the result is the percentage (see the CASUALTY
PERCENTAGE TABLE on the Game Card) of that side's number of
ships, which number of ships the other side must remove as losses.
6.3.3.3 NAVAL COMBAT IN A PORT: If combat occurs in a port, the
"harbor defenses" (see the map for harbordefense values printed in each
port's blockade box) attack the phasing major power's fleet(s) first, using
the NAVAL COMBAT TABLE on the Game Card with an unmodified
die roll. Treat the harbor defense value number the same as if it were that
many ships for the combat. There must be a garrison in the port city that
is at war with or denied access to (see 6.3.1.3 for these situations) an
entering stack in order to use the harbor defenses. If there is a multi-
nation garrison in a port, the player with most controlled garrison factors
decides if the port guns are used. If there’s an equal amount and they
disagree, the port guns don’t fire. If there is no garrison then the port guns
do not fire. FIN& JJThe phasing major power's surviving ships then
attack the enemy fleet(s) in that port. Finally, any surviving defending
ships make their combat die roll.
ELBA6.3.3.3 : El modificador por flota británica, austriaca o
prusiana NO se aplica en combates a puerto. El saber
marinero no afecta igual las batallas en plena mar que a
una acción de mero cañoneo de un objetivo estático en un
puerto.
6.3.3.4 NAVAL COMBAT EXAMPLE: Great Britain and France are
at war. It is Great Britain's Naval Phase. Great Britain moves NELSON
and 3 fleets with 60 ships total into a sea area containing 3 French fleets
with 31 total ships. First, wind gauge is determined: Great Britain rolls a
2, which becomes a 4after adding modifiers for NELSON and British
fleets. France rolls an unmodified 5. France wins the wind gauge and
fights first. France rolls a 5 on the Naval Combat Table. This means 20%
of the number of French ships is inflicted as ship losses on the British.
20% of 31 is 6 ships (on the CASUALIY PERCENTAGE TABLE,
crossgrid the 20% line with 20factors and then with 11 factors and add
together to get 6). Great Britain rolls a 2, which becomes a 3 after adding
the modifier for British fleets. This results in 8 French ship losses (60
British ships minus 6 ships lost = 54 ships or 20 plus 20 plus 14factors on
the 15% line of the CASUALTYPERCENTAGE TABLE= 8) being
suffered by the French.
6.3.4. NAVAL VICTORY AND POLITICAL POINTS:
6.3.4.1 DETERMINING VICTORY: A side that does not lose all of its
ships and also loses less ships than the other side wins a naval combat and
the other side loses it. If both sides have surviving ships and losses were
equal, the side that attacked loses the naval combat and the other side
wins it. If a side loses all of its ships but loses less ships than the other
side a naval combat is a draw (this can happen in port combats).
6.3.4.2 POLITICAL POW CHANGES: The victor(s) of a naval combat
gains political points and the loser loses them (draws have no political
point effects). One political point is gained or lost for each fleet of the
defeated major power(s) used in that combat, up to a maximum of +/-3
political points.
11
6.3.4.2.1: If the victor was commanded by the NELSON leader, they
get +1 extra political point.
6.3.4.2.2: If the loser was commanded by the NELSON leader, they
lose -1 extra political point.
HR 6.3.4.2.2: Si una flota combinada con Nelson al mando
gana una batalla, sólo GB gana el +1 pp, y si pierde, sólo
GB pierde el -1 pp.
6.3.5 NAVAL RETREAT AND PURSUIT: The survivors of one side
in a naval combat must retreat. Retreat moves are always made before
pursuit moves and the retreat and pursuit moves of one naval combat
must be made before the next naval combat is resolved.
6.3.5.1 SEA AREA RETREATS AND PURSUITS: The naval
combat loser retreats all fleets that were in the combat to the one
nearest unblockaded friendly (including an ally's port, with access
permission and if the loser wishes to use it) port within seven
movement points (losing player's choice if more than one possible port
is equally close). Some, none or all of the victorious fleet(s) may
pursue to follow the losing fleets and blockade that port.
HR 6.3.5.1: No se usa expresamente el FAQ 6.3.5.1. Sólo se
advierte que para usar un puerto de un aliado debe haber
sido especificado con anterioridad en algún tratado de
acceso, si no es asi, no puede retirarse a un puerto aliado,
y no hay lugar a negociar nada en este momento.
6.3.5.1.1: If no eligible port is available, or at the loser's option, the
loser retreats to any one adjacent sea area of the victor's choice (a sea
area into which movement is not possible may not be selected).
Retreating or pursuing fleets may not be intercepted. In this case there
is no pursuit and the victor remains in the area where the combat
occurred.
6.3.5.1.2: A fleet may neither retreat nor pursue into or through a sea
area north of the ice line during winter or into or through the
Dardanelles sea area without the permission of the major power
controlling Constantinople (if any).
6.3.5.2 PORT RETREATS: If the naval combat takes place in a port,
the attacking fleets (win or lose) must always retreat to the port's
blockade box, and the defending fleets remain in the port (no pursuit).
6.3.5.3 BLOCKADE BOX RETREATS AND PURSUITS: If the
naval combat takes place in a blockade box the loser must retreat to that
port, if and only if, the combat resulted from the movement of the
loser's stack from that port, and in any other case must retreat in
accordance with sea area retreat rules (see 6.3.5.1). Pursuit is the same
as a sea area pursuit. EXCEPTION: Since movement between a
blockade box and its port is free (see 6.2.1.2), the victor (even if the
phasing side with all movement expended) in a blockade box naval
combat may be, if the port is friendly or with access permission, moved
into the port following the naval combat.
6.3.5.4 NAVAL RETREAT AND PURSUIT EXAMPLE:
Continuing the example from 6.3.3.4; as the French Player lost (8 ships
lost to 6) he must retreat to the nearest unblockaded friendly-controlled
port within seven movement points or be moved by the British to an
adjacent sea area. Great Britain gains 4 political points for the win
(including +1 extra for NELSON), and France loses 3 political points
because the loser had 3 fleets. France decides to retreat to a nearby
home nation port and Great Britain decides to follow up and blockade
that port.
6.3.6 CONSOLIDATION OF LOSSES:After ships lost in combat are
removed, excess fleet counters (those without ships) are removed from
the map. No political points are lost for removing these empty fleets. If
during naval combat or as a result of transfer, a fleet is left without
ships, it is removed from the map and must be repurchased during an
Economic Phase (see 8.5.4) to be brought back into the game. If
NELSON is with a stack in which all ships and fleets are eliminated by
naval combat, NELSON becomes a prisoner of the other side in the
naval combat.
12.2.5 PROPORTIONAL NAVAL LOSSES: When a stack of
fleets of mixed nationalities (including minor country
nationalities) participates in a combat, the losses it takes
should be as nearly proportional to the starting proportions
as possible. Round ".5" and above up. When proportions do
not "round out" precisely, an "odd" loss or losses should be
assigned by mutual agreement or, if agreement cannot be
reached, by competitive die rolls. For example, a stack of
fleets totalling 68 ships contains 36 British (52.9%), 20
Swedish (29.4%) and 12 Portuguese (17.7%) ships and loses
10 ships in a naval combat. The losses should be 5.29 (5)
British, 2.94 (3) Swedish and 1.77 (2) Portuguese ships.
 7.0 THE LAND PHASE
[ 7.1 ] THE LAND PHASE SEQUENCE: At the beginning of this
phase France announces when in the following sequence he will be
moving. The other major powers move in this order: Russia, Turkey,
Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain.
7.1.1 MINOR FREE STATE SEQUENCE: All land forces of minor
Free States move in the sequence of their controlling major power.
7.1.2 COMBINED MOVE SEQUENCE: In order for a major power to
move in the sequence of another major power, those major powers must
be allies and must have announced combined movement during the
Political Phase. Combined movement is conducted in the sequence of the
ally who would have moved last in the phase.
7.1.3 LAND PHASE STEPS: Each major power sequence of the Land
Phase is divided into Depot Creation/Removal, Land Movement, Supply,
Land Combat and Guerrilla Steps. Each player completes all these steps
during his major power sequence before the next player commences his
major power sequence. The player his sequence and his counters are
described as "phasing" during that time and all other players and their
counters are called "non-phasing." After all major powers have completed
their sequences, the Conquest Step is simultaneously resolved.
[ 7.2] THE DEPOT CREATION/REMOVAL STEP: Major powers
may remove any of their depots, destroying any garrisons on a removed
depot unless there is an unbesieged friendly controlled or vacant city in
that same area to which they can be transferred. Major powers may then
purchase and place new depots, up to counter mix limits on the map at
any one time, at the cost of one money point each. The same depots may
be removed, then placed, etc. any number of times during the course of a
game as long as one money point is paid every time one is placed and the
countermix limits are not exceeded-the same depot counter may be
removed and then placed elsewhere (at a one money point cost) during
the same Depot Creation/Removal Step. Free State forces use the depots
of their controlling major power. Depots may not be placed in areas
containing unbesieged enemy corps, guerrillas, freikorps or cossacks
(unless an unbesieged corps of the major power placing the depot is also
in that area) or in an area which already contains a depot (there is a limit
of one depot per area-EXCEPTION: see 7.2.2). Depots may be placed
only in the following areas:
7.2.1 DEPOT IN A FRIENDLY CITY AREA: A new depot may be
placed in an area containing a friendly controlled unbesieged city, in that
major power's territory.
FAQ 7.2.1 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: A depot can be
placed in a controlled city in a ceded home nation province
which is not part of a valid supply chain.
7.2.2 * DEPOT INSIDE A FRIENDLY PORT OR IN A PORT
AREA: Even if not itself a supply source or part of an overland supply
chain, a new depot may be placed in an area containing an unblockaded
friendly controlled port, provided there exists a friendly unblockaded sea
supply source (see 7.4.3) to the port.
ELBA: La restricción 7.2.3 TAMBIÉN SE APLICA ; No se puede
colocar un nuevo depot en un puerto lejano si no existe
previamente (del turno anterior) un depot en una fuente de
supply con puerto. Notese que no se obliga a tener una flota
en el puerto de origen, se extiende la interpretación de la
FAQ 7.4.3.1 y sirve una flota en el puerto de destino.
7.2.2.1: If such a port is besieged, then the depot is placed in the port city
itself. This is the only case where the depot is considered to be in a city
rather than in the surrounding area.
7.2.2.2: Another, enemy depot could also be placed in the port city's area
while a depot is also in the port city itself. This is the only case where two
depots may be located in the same area (actually, one in the city and one
in the area).
7.2.3 DEPOTS IN SUPPLY CHAINS: A new depot may be placed
within two unblocked areas of an already existing (before this Turn)
depot that is a supply source or which is part of a valid supply chain.
7.2.3.1 SUPPLY SOURCE DEFINITION: A "supply source" is any
unbesieged controlled city area in a major power s home nation or
controlled minor country that is unoccupied by enemy forces and that
contains a depot.
7.2.3.2 SUPPLY CHAIN DEFINITION: A "supply chain" is a series of
one major power's depots that are placed no more than two areas apart
and lead back to a supply source of that major power.
FAQ 7.2.3.2: Only one open area may there be between
depots in a supply chain
Elba: No se puede trazar suministro a través de una potencia
mayor sin su permiso.
7.2.3.2.1: A "valid" supply chain is one where the intervening areas
between any of a supply chain's depots are not blocked by the presence of
12
unbesieged enemy corps, garrisons, guerrillas, cossacks and/or
freikorps (EXCEPTION: these enemy forces do not block an area if
that area also contains an unbesieged friendly corps or garrison).
7.2.3.2.2: A valid supply chain may only be traced across sea areas via
sea supply (see 7.4.3). A valid supply chain may be traced across sea
crossing arrows unless the surrounding sea area contains an enemy
fleet(s).
7.2.3.2.3: Any portion of a supply chain that is not valid cannot be used
for regular supply (see 7.4.2), although the invalid depots do not have
to be removed.
7.2.3.3 SUPPLY CHAIN RESTRICTIONS:
7.2.3.3.1: New depots as part of a supply chain may not be placed in a
minor neutral unless the major power is at war with the neutral and
may only be placed in the territory of another major power if given
access permission by, at war with, or having imposed victory condition
C.5 (see 4.5.2) on that major power.
7.2.3.3.1.1: Supply can be traced over a territory owned by
neutral major party but such an action is considered as forcible
access. (See 10.3.4 Forcible Access.)FIN
7.2.3.3.2: For a major power to place a new depot outside of its own
territory, an unbesieged corps of that major power must be in that area.
FAQ 7.2.3.3.2: The corps on loan or controlled minor corps
can be used to satisfy this restriction.
7.2.3.3.3: Depots from different major powers, even if allied, may not
combine to form one supply chain (including sea supply or invasion
supply).
7.2.4 * DEPOTS ON FLEETS: Depots may be placed on fleets,' for
the provision of invasion supply (see 7.4.4).
[ 7.3 ] THE LAND MOVEMENT STEP: Major powers may move
any or all of their corps, cossacks, freikorps or guerrillas during their
sequence. Free State corps are moved at the same time by the
controlling major power and are not limited to movement within their
minor Free State. Movement may be restricted through other major
powers' territory (see 10.3). Movement allowances may not be
transferred from unit to unit nor may they be accumulated from Turn to
Turn.
7.3.1 GENERAL LAND MOVEMENT RULES: Each land counter
has a "movement allowance" consisting of a number of "movement
points" that can be expended to enter new areas on the map.
7.3.1.1 MOVEMENT ALLOWANCES: With corps bearing a cavalry
symbol (including Austrian light infantry), Austrian and Prussian
freikorps and Russian cossacks the movement allowance is 5. For
French corps (including French artillery) and French controlled minor
Free State corps having an infantry symbol and having their 3
movement allowance number in parenthesis the allowance is 4. All
other corps have an allowance of 3. Spanish guerrillas have a
movement allowance of one area (regardless of terrain).
7.3.1.2 FORCE MARCHING: Corps may increase their movement
allowance by one movement point by "force marching." Cossacks,
freikorps, guerrillas, cavalry corps and disembarking corps may not
force march.Gen 23/4
7.3.1.3 LAND MOVEMENT COSTS: Each map area generally
expends one movement point from a counter's movement allowance to
enter, although this varies in some areas, as follows:
7.3.1.3.1 Marsh or Mountain: Areas containing a marsh or a
mountain cost 2 movement points to enter.
7.3.1.3.2 Crossing Rivers: It costs an extra movement point to enter an
area across a river, if that area contains an unbesieged enemy corps.
There is no extra cost to move across a river if there is no unbesieged
enemy corps counter(s) in the area.
7.3.1.3.3 Sea Crossing Arrow Movement: It always costs an extra
movement point to use a crossing arrow. Corps, freikorps and/or
cossacks may not use a crossing arrow if an enemy fleet occupies the
surrounding sea area.
7.3.1.3.4 Cumulative Costs: These costs are all cumulative. For
example, movement across a river into a mountain area containing an
enemy corps costs one movement point to cross the river, plus two
more movement points since it is a mountain area, for a total of three
movement points of the counter's movement allowance expended.
7.3.1.4 FORAGING WHILE MOVING: Although the rules are
covered in the Supply Step, foraging (see 7.4.1) is performed while
corps are being moved.
7.3.2 LAND MOVEMENT PROCEDURES: Each counter is moved
individually.
7.3.2.1: A corps must cease movement when it consumes its movement
allowance or when it enters an area containing an unbesieged enemy
corps (not if the area contains only cossacks, freikorps, guerrillas and/or
garrisons).
7.3.2.2: Cossacks and/or freikorps are not required to cease movement
when they enter an area containing enemy forces.
7.3.2.3: No counter may be moved into an area that would cost more
movement points than the counter has remaining for use.
7.3.2.4: Movement may be ended earlier-there is no requirement to move
any counter nor for any counter to expend its full movement allowance.
7.3.3 MOVING INTO CITIES-DETACHING/ABSORBING
FACTORS-GARRISONS: During a major power's Land Movement
Step, any non-artillery, non-feudal or non-insurrection corps may detach
factors as garrisons at, or absorb army factors from, depots hnd/or
unbesieged friendly or vacant cities by reducing or increasing its strength,
if the capacity is there. There is no movement point cost for doing this.
HR 7.3.3: Se permite durante la fase terrestre el mover
factores de la ciudad al deposito y viceversa, sin que tenga
que haber un cuerpo en el area.
7.3.3.1 DETACHING/ABSORBING FACTORS RESTRICTIONS:
Regular infantry and/or militia factors may not be detached or absorbed in
an area containing enemy corps outside a city.
7.3.3.1.1: Minor Free State forces may only detach and absorb their
infantry factors to and from cities and/or depots within their own country.
7.3.3.1.2: Detachments cannot empty a corps. All corps must always
contain at least one army factor to maintain the corps counter on the map-
corps counters may be removed only due to 5.2.3/5.2.4, 7.3.5, 7.4.1 or
7.5.5 and at those times.
OR 12.3.8 DETACHING/ABSORBING MINOR FREE STATE
FACTORS: If players wish to allow free state factors to be
detached as garrisons outside of the free state's borders, they
may do so, but the players must keep side notes on the
nationalities of garrisons, mark nationalities on grey
garrison/strength counters placed outside of a free state's
borders or make their own garrison/strength counters for the
various possible minor free states.
7.3.3.2 CONVERTING ARMY FACTORS: Regular cavalry and guard
factors detached to serve as garrisons must be converted to regular
infantry factors for the remainder of the game; artillery factors may not be
detached.
FAQ 7.3.3.2: Major Power don´t be able to keep
cavalry/guard in garrisons without converting them to
infantry to prevent players from stockpiling masses of
specialty troops in garrison during peacetime and being
able to completely replace combat losses instantly. It reflects
the lack of quality in peacetime and garrison.
7.3.3.3 GARRISON FACTORS: Garrison factors can be regular
infantry and/or militia factors, represented by the placement of
garrison/strength counters of the appropriate strength and type on the city
or depot concerned. Each major power must use counters of its own color
(see 1.2) for garrison purposes outside the major power's borders. The
gray garrison/strength counters must be used for minor Free States inside
their own borders and may be also be used inside a major power's home
nation territory to represent that major power's garrisons if insufficient
counters of the appropriate color are available. This is why some small
grey counters are militia.
FAQ 7.3.3.3: If a fleet attacks a port in which the only land
forces is a corps outside the city, the port guns can be used.
A corps in the area constitute a garrison for port gun
use/control purposes. A corps in an area with an empty city
controls that city.
HR 7.3.3.3 Expl: Ciudad y área son la misma casilla a efectos
normales de juego. Cuando hay un cuerpo en un área
controla toda el área, incluida la ciudad (ver 7.3.3.3.2). La
única excepción es cuando un cuerpo se refugia en la
ciudad por la presencia de cuerpos enemigos, entonces ese
cuerpo solo controla la ciudad, y el enemigo el área
7.3.3.3.1: Cossack, freikorps and guerrillas factors (guerrillas may not
garrison depots) may also be used to form all or part of a city or depot
garrison.
7.3.3.3.2: Corps may form all or part of a city garrison without detaching
army factors, so that any types of army factors in such corps could also be
a garrison.
7.3.3.4 CITY GARRISON CAPACITIES: A city's maximum garrison
capacity is 5 times its supply value (e.g., a city with a supply value of 4-it
has four spires on its map picture-may contain up to 20 army factors). A
city may also hold any number of leaders (NOTE: leaders may only be
moved into a city with corps counters, although they may remain there-
must remain there if the city is besieged-after the corps counters are
eliminated).
13
7.3.3.5 DEPOT GARRISON CAPACITY: A depot's maximum
garrison capacity is 10 army factors.
7.3.3.5.1: All army factors/corps used to garrison a depot must be of
the same major power as the depot.
7.3.3.5.2: Controlled minor Free State factors may be used to garrison
any of its major power's depots only within the minor Free State's
borders.
HR 7.3.3.5.2 Expl: Anulada por la regla optativa 12.3.8.
7.3.3.5.3: A depot in a besieged port city (see 7.2.2) does not add any
garrison capacity to the city-the port city/depot combination has the
same capacity as just the city alone.
7.3.4 MOVEMENT FROM CITIES: If a phasing major power has
corps, cossacks, freikorps and/or guerrillas inside a city which is not
being besieged, they may be moved directly out of that city into the
area surrounding the city and/or continue normal movement into
adjacent areas (if permissible). Moving from a city into its area (or
vice-versa) expends no movement points.
7.3.5 * LANDING FROM SHIPS-"DISEMIBARKING": Corps
being transported on fleets at sea (see 6.2.5) must be "disembarked"
into any adjacent land area during their Land Movement Step or be
eliminated. Corps being transported on fleets that moved into a port
must disembark in the port's area. When disembarking from fleets
located in a blockade box, corps must land in the area containing that
blockade box's port. Disembarking exhausts a corps, entire movement
allowance for all purposes, and counts the same as having crossed a
river for purposes of any combat in that area during the disembarking
player's sequence (see 7.5.2.7.1).If an area contains a friendly port that
is besieged, counters may be considered to be disembarked directly into
the port (if there is room) or into the port's area, as the controlling
player desires. Gen 23.4
FAQ 7.3.5a: A corps boards a ship to be transported from a
blockaded port, leaving the port ungarrisoned. The
transporting fleet is defeated and must return to port. Since
the corps cannot be disembarked until the major power's
turn in the Land Phase, another major power who moves
earlier in the land phase can enter the port unopposed.
FAQ 7.3.5b: A corps which landed from ships is defeated in
battle, retreat per 7.5.2.10.3. Note that 7.5.2.10.3.4
precludes retreating onto the ships.
7.3.6 MOVING INTO AN ENEMY DEPOT AREA:
7.3.6.1 UNGARRISONED DEPOT AREA: If during movement a
corps, cossack, freikorps or guerrilla moves into an area containing an
ungarrisoned enemy depot, it may elect to destroy the depot. If it does
destroy the depot and ends its movement in that area, then having
destroyed the depot counts as having successfully foraged for supply
(with no loss) for that one corps counter. An alternative to destroying a
depot is to convert (remove the enemy depot and replace it with one of
the entering power's depots-there is no money cost for this conversion)
it to a friendly depot if that would make it a supply source or an
extension of a friendly valid supply chain (see 7.2.3).
FAQ 7.3.6.1: You can capture and use an enemy depot in
the same turn, because depots are captured during the
movement step which is before the supply step. If you
capture a depot, it becomes a part of your supply chain
(assuming you convert it) before supply is determined.
7.3.6.2 GARRISONED DEPOT AREA: If an enemy depot is
garrisoned, the player controlling the garrison factors has the option of
immediately destroying the depot before the moving force chooses
whether to leave the area (if permissible) or to stay and fight. If the
garrison does not elect to destroy the depot and the phasing force
chooses to stop its movement and fight, the depot may be captured after
land combat (see 7.3.6. 1) and destroyed or converted (but not used for
supply this major power's sequence-also see 7.5.2.14). If the garrison
destroys the depot, the garrison surrenders or all or part (if city cannot
hold all-the part not moved to the city will surrender) can be moved to
an unbesieged friendly controlled or vacant city in that same area, at
the owning player's option.
HR 7.3.6.2. Expl: No se puede escoger refugiarse a la
ciudad sin destruir el depósito, las opciones son
permanecer y mantener el depósito o refugiarte habiendo
destuido el depósito.
7.3.7 MOVING INTO COMBAT:
7.3.7.1 ENEMY CORPS OR CITY GARRISON IN AREA: If
during movement a corps moves into an area containing enemy corps
not in a city, the corps must cease movement and declare an attack. If
enemy corps and/or garrison factors are in a city the phasing corps may
continue movement or stop movement and besiege (see 7.5.4) or not, as
the owning player desires. If he decides to besiege the enemy corps and
forages for supply, the foraging die roll is not reduced due to
unconsumed movement points (see 7.3.2). If any friendly forces in an
area besiege enemy forces then all friendly forces in that area (except
depot garrisons) must besiege the enemy forces.
7.3.7.2 ENEMY COSSACK, FREIKORPS OR DEPOT GARRISON
IN AREA: If a corps ends its movement in an area containing an only
enemy cossacks, freikorps and/or depot garrison factors it must declare an
attack. A corps may move through such an area without stopping or
declaring an attack.
7.3.8 * DECLARATION OF COMBAT AND COMBINED
MOVEMENT: To avoid problems when moving into combat the
following step sequence must be followed whenever moving into an area
containing two or more forces or when using combined movement (see
4.9).
7.3.8.1 STEP ONE: All allies who are using combined movement,
although moving in the same major power sequence, must decide in
which order they will move within this sequence. If agreement cannot be
reached, let competitive die rolls decide.
7.3.8.2 STEP TWO: The phasing major power (the first ally in the case
of combined movement) moves all his forces normally and must declare
an attack against all field forces (corps that have not moved into cities or
cossacks, freikorps and/or depot garrisons in the last area entered) with
which he is at war, in each area that also contains his field forces.
7.3.8.3 STEP THREE: Major powers who have field forces in an area in
which a combat has been declared against an ally, may now declare war
(if not already at war and if not restricted-see 4.2.2) on the attacker,
losing the appropriate political points (see 4.2.1.1 -record on the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card) per separate
declaration of war. No allies can be called for these declarations of war.
These major powers are now classed as the "defenders" and fight the
combat as one force.
7.3.8.4 STEP FOUR: All major powers not at war with the attacker
(except the attacker and his allies at war with the defender and factors in
cities or on depots) must now leave the area, moving to any adjacent area
that, if possible, is closer or at least as close to their source of supply as
the area they leave.
7.3.8.5 STEP FIVE: Now the second combined movement ally (if there
is one) follows the procedures outlined in Steps 2-4 but may not enter an
area containing forces of the first ally unless it is an area where no attack
has been declared or the second ally is at war with all the defending major
powers in that area. This ally now becomes an attacker (joining the first
ally in the attack).
7.3.8.6 STEP SIX: Repeat Step 5 until all the combined movement allies
have moved. Now every ally of the phasing major power(s) who is in an
area where an attack has been declared and is at war with all the
defending major powers may stay and participate as an attacker.
Otherwise they must leave the area, moving to an adjacent area closer to
their sources of supply.
7.3.8.7 STEP SEVEN: This will now leave just two forces in every area
where an attack has been declared, the attacking force (the original
attacker and his allies) and the defending force (as found in Step 3).
Garrison army factors (including those on depots) of a major power that
is not involved in the combat may remain in the area but are ignored for
combat purposes.
[ 7.4 ] THE SUPPLY STEP: Only corps and besieged forces must be
supplied. Leaders and unbesieged cossacks, freikorps, guerrillas and
garrisons do not need supply.
FAQ 7.4: If a country has a corps in a city area which retires
into the city when an enemy corps enters the area, but the
enemy corps does not besiege, if the city is unbesieged and
within 2 unblocked areas of a friendly depot, normal depot
supply may be used. A depot cannot be placed in the city
area, because rule 7.2 states that depots may not be placed
in an area containing unbesieged enemy corps. If the corps
forages, it uses the AREA's forage value, as stated in rule
7.4.5.2
HR 7.4 Expl: Si un cuerpo no está asediado entonces está en
el área. Para abastecimiento (que es el punto a tratar) se
aplicarían las reglas conforme se está en el área (tanto para
pillaje como para abastecimiento desde depósito).
7.4.1 FORAGING: "Foraging" represents living off the country. When a
corps ceases movement it may elect (or be forced) to "forage" rather than
use depot supply. If it has force marched, or is four or more areas from
the nearest depot in a friendly valid supply chain, not adjacent to an
invasion supply depot and/or supply source or no money is available for
depot supply then it must forage for supply.
7.4.1.1 FORAGING PROCEDURE: A die is rolled for each foraging
corps as it completes movement (but after resolving any 7.3.8 procedures
that may be caused by its movement). This die roll is modified as in
7.4.1.2, if any modifiers apply. The modified die result is than compared
with the forage value of the area with the lowest forage value of all the
14
areas passed through or stopped in, not counting the area in which the
corps started (unless the corps did not move and remained in one area),
during its Land Movement Step. If the modified die result is equal to or
less than this forage value, there is no effect. For each modified die
point above the forage value, the corps must lose one army factor.
7.4.1.2 FORAGING MODIFIERS: When the die is rolled for a
foraging corps, the following cumulative modifiers may apply:
7.4.1.2.1 Other Corps In The Area: For each other unbesieged corps
in the area it currently occupies, whether that major power's or not
(including friendly and enemy corps and corps which have, and corps
which have not, already moved during this step), +1 is added to the
result of the die, up to a maximum of +2. NOTE: This does not include
corps that leave the area as a result of the 7.3.8 procedures.
7.4.1.2.2 Unused Movement Points: For each movement point the
corps did not use, one is subtracted from the die. EXCEPTION: The die
is not modified due to unused movement points if the corps is besieging
or plans to besiege enemy forces in the area.
FAQ 7.4.1.2.2 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: If a corps
moves to a city area and forages using unused movement
point to modify the roll, then wins a field combat, it can't
besiege the city. If unused movement points were used to
modify the forage roll, that corps is ineligible to besiege.
7.4.1.2.3 Force Marching: If the corps force marched, +1 is added to
the die roll.
7.4.1.2.4 Winter: If it is winter +2 is added to the die roll unless the
corps is not in the "winter zone" (see 9.0).
7.4.1.2.5 In Own Territory: If the corps did not move into an area
outside the major power's territory this Turn and is not now in such an
area, -1 is subtracted from the die roll.Gen 25/4
FAQ 7.4.1.2.5: In the glossary, page 46 of the rule book,
major power is defined as home nation plus controlled
minor countries plus provinces ceded to that home nation.
This is the "major power's territory" for this rule.
7.4.1.3 FORAGING LOSSES: The factor or factors removed for
foraging losses may be any in the corps of the controlling player's
choice, with these restrictions:
7.4.1.3.1: Any factors that were part of the corps during its movement
are eligible to be used for forage losses. If possible, forage losses must
come out of the factors actually in the corps when movement is
completed.
7.4.1.3.2: Corps counters may be removed as a result of forage losses
only if all factors that were part of the corps during its movement are
lost to foraging. If only one factor remains after foraging losses are
removed, that factor must be in the corps and the corps counter must be
left on the map. For example, a corps with three regular infantry factors
detaches two of these factors into a city in an area passed through and
then rolls a loss of two factors while foraging. Since the corps can only
be removed if all factors are lost, the two detached factors would have
to be the ones lost. If the corps had started with five factors, the two
forage losses would come out of the corps (leaving one factor in the
corps) and the two detached factors would remain in their city. If the
corps had started with four factors, one of the forage losses would have
to come out Of the corps (leaving one factor in the corps) and the other
loss would have to be one of the detached factors.
FAQ 7.4.1.3.2 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: If a
besieging corps is eliminated by forage losses, any depot
that may be in the city area remains until removed by the
owning player or captured by an enemy corps.
7.4.1.3.3: If all corps counters in an area are removed due to foraging
losses, any leaders with the removed corps are immediately removed
from the map. They may be returned to the map during any later Army
Reinforcement Step (see 5.3).
7.4.2 REGULAR (DEPOT) SUPPLY: After the movement and
foraging of corps is complete, any corps which did not forage must
now pay for supply. Depot supply, while costing money prevents army
factors being lost. Paying for depot supply is as follows:
12.3.1 SUPPLY LIMITS PER DEPOT: Each individual depot that
is a supply source or part of a valid supply chain may only
be used to supply a maximum of four corps and/or
besieged garrisons.
7.4.2.1 PAYING FOR DEPOT SUPPLY: Any corps in a depot area
or which can trace an unblocked route to a depot may use depot supply.
Besieged port city garrisons (regardless of size) may also use depot
supply (see 7.4.3 and 7.4.4). The costs for all corps and separate
garrisons are summed and any fraction rounded up, that amount then
being deducted from that major power's current monetary total. A
major power may not use depot supply for a corps if it doesn't have
enough money to pay the cost and such corps must instead forage for
supply.
FAQ 7.4.2.1: The supply costs are rounded up after summing
all total costs
7.4.2.1.1 Corps Depot Supply: A corps in the same area as a depot being
part of a valid supply chain costs half a money point to supply. Other
corps up to 3 unblocked areas away from a depot pay the number of areas
they are away from a depot in a valid supply chain in money points. For
example, a corps 3 areas away pays 3 money points to get supply. The
route through intervening areas traced from a corps to a depot may not be
blocked by forces (same rules as for blocking a supply chain (see
7.2.3.2.1).
7.4.2.1.2 Besieged Port Garrison Depot Supply: Besieged port city
garrisons using sea supply through a depot in the port city cost half a
money point per garrison to supply. Besieged port city garrisons using
invasion supply cost one money point per garrison to supply as they are in
an adjacent area.
7.4.2.1.3 Winter Depot Supply Cost Increases: All costs are doubled in
winter for corps or garrisons within the winter zone (see 9.0).
7.4.2.2 ALLIED DEPOT SUPPLY: Major powers may have their
forces live off the depots and/or supply chains of their allies, but those
allies must pay the costs involved. Naturally, permission is required for
this.
7.4.3 * SEA SUPPLY: All or a portion of supply chain can be validly
traced across sea areas.
7.4.3.1 TRACING SEA SUPPLY: In order trace supply across sea areas
there must be one of a major power's depots in each of the two friendly
controlled ports or port areas between which supply is to be traced. At
least one of these ports must contain a fleet(s) of the major power and/or
an ally and that port must be a supply source or be able to trace a valid
supply chain via depots to a supply source. Neither port may be
blockaded. If these conditions are fulfilled, the ports are valid links in a
supply chain. The effect of this is as if the depots were in adjacent areas
(regardless of the number of sea areas actually between them) for all
purposes including placement of reinforcements.
FAQ 7.4.3.1: This rule requires you to have a fleet in the port
that is the supply source, but the definitions on the back of
the rule book indicate you can have a fleet in either port. The
correct is a fleet in either port.
7.4.3.2 BLOCKING SEA SUPPLY: Apart from fleets in the blockade
boxes of ports used for sea supply, enemy fleets do not interrupt such a
sea supply chain.
7.4.3.3 DARDANELLES/ICE LINE SUPPLY EFFECTS: Sea supply
may not be traced into or through the Dardanelles sea area without the
permission of the major power controlling Constantinople (if any) nor
into or out of an area north of the ice line during winter months.
7.4.3.4 PORT CITY SUPPLY: Depots may be constructed in an
unblockaded friendly controlled port even if besieged provided there
exists a friendly unblockaded sea supply source (see 7.2.2).
7.4.3.4.1: This allows forces in that port to live off sea supply (rather than
besieged supply).
7.4.3.4.2: This is the only case where depots are considered to be inside
the city, rather than in the surrounding area.
7.4.3.4.3: At the end of a player's Movement Step a depot in a port city is
moved into the surrounding area if the city is no longer besieged. If there
is already an enemy depot in the surrounding area, the enemy depot is
destroyed.
7.4.3.4.4: A depot in a port city is immediately removed when there is no
longer an unblockaded sea supply source.
7.4.3.4.5: A depot in a port city may be immediately destroyed or
converted to a friendly supply depot (if it would then be part of a valid
supply chain) and moved into the surrounding area when the forces in the
city accept honors of war, surrender, and/or are eliminated.
7.4.4 INVASION SUPPLY: A depot may be constructed on a fleet of
the same power as the depotGen 25/4in a sea area and used to provide
supply for all corps and/or besieged port city garrisons into all adjacent
land areas (but not beyond) at the normal depot supply money point costs.
Although this is normally used to supply disembarking corps, it can be
used without the need for an actual "invasion" (disembarking corps).
FAQ 7.4.4.a: You can build a depot on a fleet which just
transported a corps.
FAQ 7.4.4b: You can you build a depot on a fleet in a
blockade box, but it can only supply the port area
7.4.4.1: Invasion supply can only be used if an unblockaded friendly
controlled port that is a supply source or contains a depot that is part of a
valid supply chain exists from which supply can be traced to the fleet.
FAQ 7.4.4.1 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: Depots can be
built both on the fleet and in the port supporting the invasion
supply during the same turn. Es correcto porque cada uno
está en una zona.
7.4.4.2: If the fleet containing the depot should move for any reason, the
depot is lost.
15
7.4.4.3: Invasion supply does not allow reinforcements to be placed,
nor can it be a link in a chain of supply-it only directly supplies corps
in adjacent land areas.
7.4.4.4: No more than one depot for invasion supply may be placed in
any one sea area.
7.4.4.5: Invasion supply is not possible in a sea area north of theice line
during winter months.
7.4.4.6: If the route from the port to the fleet must go into or through
the Dardanelles sea area, the permission of the major power controlling
the area (if any-see 10.7) is required.
7.4.5 BESIEGED SUPPLY: Unless eligible for sea or invasion
supply, besieged garrisons and corps must check for supply by the
foraging method, using the city supply value (which equals the number
of spires in the city picture) rather than the forage value of the area
containing the city.
FAQ 7.4.5a: If a city is besieged, and a relieving force
arrives the same turn the garrison starves and declares an
attack, the besieging force can retire into the city.
FAQ 7.4.5b: If a garrison is made up of corps and garrison
factors, one foraging die roll are made for the entire
garrison.
FAQ 7.4.5c: If a corps is used as a garrison, it need to be
supplied.
7.4.5.1 BESIEGED SUPPLY DIE MODIFIER: The foraging die roll
modifiers are not used for besieged supply. Instead, for every full 5
army factors in the besieged city (regardless of whether the factors are
part of a corps or merely a garrison) +1 is added to the die, to a
maximum of +2. For example, a city with 5-9 army factors would have
+1 added to the die roll. No other modifiers apply.
7.4.5.2 BESIEGED FORAGING LOSSES: For each point of the die
roll over the city supply value, one army factor of the besieged garrison
and/or corps is lost. If all the besieged army factors are lost, any
besieged leaders become the prisoners of the besiegers and the
besieging forces may immediately detach factors to control the city.
NOTE: Unbesieged corps in a city use the forage value of the area in
which they are in, not the city supply value.
7.4.5.3 BESIEGING FORCES: Besieging forces may live off regular
supply or forage. If they forage they are considered to have spent their
full movement allowance before dicing for supply and use the area
supply value and normal modifiers. This occurs even if it is the first
Turn of the siege.
[ 7.5 ] THE LAND COMBAT STEP: At the end of all movement and
supply in a player's sequence the land combat procedure commences.
7.5.1 GENERAL RULES OF LAND COMBAT: If at the end of all
movement of the phasing major power, enemy forces (excluding
guerrillas-see 10.1.1.3) occupy the same area as its corps, freikorps or
cossacks, the phasing major power must attack in those areas (also see
7.3.7 and 7.3.8). The phasing side is the "attacker" and the non-phasing
side is the "defender."
7.5.1.1 DEFENDER RETIREMENT INTO CITY: Any forces or
portion of forces upon whom an attack is declared may immediately
retire into any friendly controlled or vacant, and unbesieged city in that
area but not so as to exceed that city's garrison capacity
7.5.1.1.1: If there are several defending major powers wishing to retire
into the city than agreement must be reached on who shall retire into
the city. If no agreement can be reached, then none may retire.
7.5.1.1.2: If they all do so retire, the attackers may, if desired, be placed
on top of the forces and a siege occurs.
7.5.1.1.3: If any portion of a defending force does not retire into a city,
the attack continues against that portion.
7.5.1.1.4: A city must be able to hold all of the factors of entire corps
that move in (plus any other factors that may be in or moved into the
city).
7.5.1.2 WHO MAY PARTICIPATE IN LAND COMBATS: All
corps, cossacks, freikorps, depot garrisons, and attacking guerrillas in
an area participate in field or trivial combat in the area. Forces inside
cities are not included in field or trivial combat (they may only attack
or be attacked via siege combat, see 7.5.4).
7.5.1.3 GENERAL SEQUENCE OF LAND COMBATS: All field,
limited field and/or trivial combats may be resolved in any order at the
phasing player's option. After a combat is completed, the phasing
player's forces may immediately occupy and/or detach factors to
occupy any friendly-controlled or vacant city in the area subject to
usual restrictions (see 7.3.3). The phasing player's forces then conduct
all siege combats (this can include forces which just took part in a field
or trivial combat-see 7.5.4) in any desired order.
7.5.2 FIELD COMBAT PROCEDURE: Field combats simulate
open-field battles. Individual field combats may be resolved in any
order determined by the phasing player, and may be intermixed with
any limited field and/or trivial combats. A combat in one area must be
completed before commencing another combat. A complete example of a
field combat is found in 7.5.2.15. Each individual field combat occurs in
the following order:
7.5.2.1 STEP ONE-SELECTION OF CHITS: Both players select an
Operational Possibilities chit. There are different chits for the attacker
(gray) and the defender (white). An outflank chit may be chosen only if a
force consists of at least two non-artillery corps and has a leader.
ER: Operational Possibilities Chart: The attacker's first combat
table when crossgriding an Escalated Assault with a Cordon
river crossing should be "5-1" instead of "5-2".
7.5.2.2 STEP TWO-OUTFLANK ANNOUNCEMENT: Each player
declares whether or not he has picked the outflank chit. If both players or
neither player picked the outflank chit, or if the attacking player picked
the outflank chit and the defending player picked the cordon chit skip
Step 3 and go directly to Step 4.
7.5.2.3 STEP THREE-DIVIDING AN OUTFLANKING FORCE:
The player who picked the outflank chit must divide his forces into a
"pinning" and an "outflanking" force.
7.5.2.3.1 Pinning Force Composition: The player designates part of his
force (at least one non-artillery corps plus all leaders, all garrison factors
on depots, artillery factors and attacking guerrillas) as the "pinning force"
before the other side reveals its tactical chit-only these will fight until the
arrival of the outflanking force.
7.5.2.3.2 Outflanking Force Composition: The rest, comprising at
least one corps plus all cossacks and/or freikorps, are considered to be
"moving around the flank" and are not included for combat purposes
(which includes cavalry superiority-see option 12.3.3.1) until they
"arrive." EXCEPTION: They are included for determination of the base
morale levels (see 7.5.2.6).
7.5.2.4 STEP FOUR-REVEAL CHITS: Both players now reveal their
chosen chits, and cross-index their operational possibilities chits on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART on the Game Card. If the
defender did not choose "Withdraw", skip Step 5 and go directly to Step
6.
7.5.2.5 STEP FIVE-RESOLVE WITHDRAWALS: Any player who
chose "Withdraw" now dices to see if his force does withdraw.
7.5.2.5.1 Withdrawal Avoids Battle: If the entire force does withdraw,
skip Steps 6-13 and go directly to Step 14.
7.5.2.5.2 Withdrawal Procedure: If a player has picked the "Withdraw"
chit, he dices to determine if he successfully withdraws. To be successful
the die roll must be less than or equal to the appropriate strategic rating.
7.5.2.5.2.1: If the opposing side has chosen "Probe", the
withdrawal is automatically successful and no die roll is necessary.
7.5.2.5.2.2: If some other chit has been chosen by the attacker then
the defending player rolls a die, comparing the result to his
commander's strategic rating (see 10.6.1.1 for determining a
commander)..If he has no commander, each corps must be diced
for separately, comparing the roll to its intrinsic strategic rating.
These strategic ratings may be modified by notes on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART on the Game Card.
Cossacks and freikorps that are with corps attempting to withdraw
may attempt to withdraw with them using the rules in 10.1.2.2.3
for their withdrawal. Guerrillas do not need to withdraw. Also see
7.5.2.12.2 for withdrawing from an outflanking force.
7.5.2.5.2.3: Each corps which withdraws is retreated by the method
given in Retreat after Combat (see 7.5.2.10.3), except that the
retreat is conducted by the controlling player. There is no pursuit.
If any corps, depot garrison and/or cossack and/or freikorps
remains, the combat is fought on the combat tables found on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART.
OR 12.3.3.2 CAVALRY WITHDRAWALS: A defending cavalry
corps stacked alone or only with other cavalry corps
and/or cossacks/freikorps has its strategic rating (or
that of its commanding leader) increased by "+1" for
withdrawal purposes only (see 7.5.2.5.2.2). This rule
does not apply if the attacker is also an all-cavalry
force and/or if the commanding leader has a strategic
rating of 5. The Austrian Light Infantry Corps is
considered to be a cavalry corps for this purpose.
7.5.2.6 STEP SIX-REVEAL FORCES/MORALE LEVELS: Both
players reveal their forces and determine their final morale levels.
7.5.2.6.1 Determining Morale Levels: Morale levels represent a force's
"morale", and the higher the number the better. "Base morale levels" can
be calculated by one of two methods. Players should decide before the
game begins which method to use for their game. Also see the
NATIONAL MORALE VALUES CHART on the Game Card.
7.5.2.6.1.1 Method One: The base morale level is calculated by
adding up the products of the number of army factors having the
same morale value, and dividing this total by the total number of
army factors and rounding up to the next tenth of a point.
16
Guerrillas, freikorps and cossacks may be included in combat
with a morale value of 1.0. Militia are included with a morale
value of 2.0. Artillery are included with the morale of the major
power's regular infantry. Guard infantry have a morale value of
5.0. Other infantry and cavalry have their morale values
indicated on the back of their corps counters. For example, if a
force of 51 total army factors has 21 factors at morale 3.0,
20factors at morale 4.0 and 10 factors at morale 5.0 this is: 21
times 3 plus 20 times 4 plus 10 times 5=193 divided by 51
factors=3.784 which rounds to a base morale level of 3.8.
7.5.2.6.1.2 Method Two: Method One for the determination of
the base morale level of a force can be involved and almost
certainly involves the use of a pocket calculator. Therefore, we
offer this simpler (and faster) alternative; first, determine the
"primary component" of the force. This will be that major power
with the most corps present, including controlled minor Free
State corps (with equal numbers of corps present, the primary
component is that major power with the lowest basic morale).
The "basic morale" of this primary component provides the base
number for determining the base morale level of the whole force.
The basic morales are: Great Britain-4.5; France-4.0; Russia,
Austria and Prussia-3.5; Spain and Turkey-3.0 (also see the
NATIONAL MORALE VALUES CHART on the Game Card).
The basic morale is increased by + 0.1 for every guard factor and
reduced by 0.1 for every militia, cossack, freikorps, guerrilla,
feudal or minor Free State infantry or cavalry factor with a
morale value of 2.0 or less (see the backs of the minor country
corps counters) in the force, even if not in the primary
component. The basic morale may not be increased by more than
a net +0.5 nor decreased by more than a net 1.0. This is the base
morale level of the force. For example, Austria has an army
composed of 3 Guard, 28 regular infantry and 6 militia. Its basic
morale is 3.5 plus 0.3 (3 Guard factors) minus 0.6 (6 militia
factors 3.2 base morale level.
For our game we will use Method One only.
7.5.2.6.2 Final Morale Levels: The final morale level for each day is
the base morale level minus 0.5 for each succeeding day of the combat
after the first and any modifiers indicated on the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART on the Game Card. The final morale level is
the point at which the force will break. For example, a force with a base
morale level of 3.2 will also use that figure for its final morale level on
the first day of a combat. On the second day of a combat, the final
morale level will be 3.2minus 0.5 equals 2.7
12.3.2 BRITISH TRAINING: Great Britain proved quite adept at
turning certain minor country troops into first-class soldiers,
notably the Portuguese and Hanoverian (the "King's
German Legion" or "KGL") troops that they trained. Under
this option, after 24 continuous months as a British-
controlled minor free state, the morale of the army factors
in the Hanover or Portugal corps is considered to be "4.0"
for both infantry and cavalry in those corps. Garrison
infantry factors of these nationalities retain their usual ("2.0")
morale.
7.5.2.6.3 Reveal Forces: Both sides simultaneously reveal corps
identities, the exact size and composition of their forces and their final
morale levels.
ER 12.3.10: OVERWHELMING NUMBERS: Field or limited field
combats where one side has a 5:1 or better ratio in strength
factors must be resolved using trivial combat. EXCEPTION:
An outnumbered defender may attempt to withdraw
before the trivial combat by rolling the commander's
strategic rating or less.
7.5.2.7 STEP SEVEN-FIND COMBAT TABLES: The
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART refers each player to a
series of three sets of combat tables on the COMBAT RESOLUTION
CHART (both on the Game Card). One combat table is used per player
per round for the three rounds for which a combat day lasts. The
attacker uses those tables designated by A in the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART. The defender uses those tables designated
by D. For example, if the attacker selected the echelon chit and the
defender selected the counterattack chit, the attacker's combat tables
would be 1-2 (first round), 3-4 (second round) and 2-4 (third round)
and the defender's combat tables would be 3-1, 4-1 and 2-1. Each
combat table is identified by two numbers (ie., 3-1 ). The first number
represents the casualty level and the second number represents the
morale level of the combat table and these levels are cross-indexed on
the COMBAT RESOLUTION CHART to find the combat table used
for a round of combat. For example, the 1-5 combat table is the one
located in the lower left-hand corner of the COMBAT RESOLUTION
CHART.
FAQ 7.5.2.7a: In note G on the Operational Possibilities Chart,
it says that the "final morale level" of a force is increased by 1
if commanded by a Russian leader. This mean that the
force's morale is increased, not the morale level of the
Combat Results Table.
FAQ 7.5.2.7b OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: The benefits for
certain tactical matchups on the Operational Possibilities
Chart only apply to forces with a named leader.
7.5.2.7.1 River Crossing Combat Tables: If any of the attacking forces
have crossed a river, a crossing arrow and/or disembarked from at sea to
enter the combat area then the river sections (found only in the assault,
escalated assault, echelon and probe columns on the cordon line) of the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART are used where appropriate
for the first day's combat. If combat continues into a second day, then the
normal sections are used.
7.5.2.7.2 Outflanking Tables To Use: Until the outflanking force
arrives, the first set (labelled 1st) of combat resolution tables on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART are used, with the percentage
losses caused by the outflanking side being based on the pinning force
army factors only. Once the outflanking force has arrived the second set
labelled 2nd) of combat resolution tables are used with each army factor
in the outflanking army factors of the force counting as two army factors
for the purpose of determining percentage losses. For example, an
outflanking attacker has a pinning force of 20 factors with a 10 factor
outflanking force and faces a defender who chose the counterattack
operational possibilities chit. In the first combat round, the attacker
would have 20 factors on the 2-1 combat table and the defender would
use all defending factors on the 2-3 combat table. Assume that the
attacker loses 4 factors in the first combat round and that the outflanking
forces arrive (see 7 5.2.12) for the second combat round. For the second
combat round, the attacker would have 16factors (left from the pinning
force) plus two times 10 factors in the outflanking force equals 20 factors
for a total attacking force treated as 36factors on the 4-4 combat table and
the defender would use all surviving defending factors on the 3-1 combat
table.
7.5.2.7.3 Combat Table Modifiers: Thesecombat table may be
cumulatively modified by terrain effects in the area where numbers a field
combat occurs, although the casualty and morale level numbers may
never be modified above 5 nor below 1 regardless of the modifiers that
apply. These modifiers are:
7.5.2.7.3.1 Forest Modifiers: In forest areas the casualty level is
decreased by 1 for both sides (eg., combat table 2-2 becomes 1-2).
7.5.2.7.3.2 Mountain Modifiers: In mountain areas the attacker's
casualty level is reduced by 1.
7.5.2.7.3.3 Desert Modifiers: In desert areas the morale level is
increased by +1 for both sides (eg., combat table 2-2 becomes 2-
3).
7.5.2.7.3.4 Marsh Modifiers: In marsh areas the casualty level is
decreased by 1 and the morale level is increased by +1 for both
sides (eg., combat table 2-2 becomes 1-3).
OR 12.3.3.1 CAVALRY SUPERIORITY: If a side has at least twice
as many cavalry factors (including cossacks and
freikorps) as the other side at the beginning of any
round of a field, limited field or trivial combat (if
necessary, recalculate the number of cavalry factors
present for every combat round), the superior side gets
"+1" added to its combat die roll. NOTES: The net
maximum modifier to a combat die roll for all modifiers
is "+1". Cavalry factors in an outflanking force are not
counted for cavalry superiority until the outflanking
force "arrives" (see 7.5.2.12). Cavalry factors in an
outflanking force that has arrived are not counted as
double factors for purposes of determining cavalry
superiority. This rule does not apply if all factors on both
sides are cavalry.
7.5.2.8 STEP EIGHT-GUARD AND ARTILLERY USE
(OPTIONAL): Guard commitment and artillery bombardments (see
options 12.3.4 and 12.3.5), now take place in the order guard commitment
followed by artillery bombardment, if relevant.
FAQ 7.5.2.8 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: Leaders don´t
modify artillery die rolls.
OR 12.3.4 GUARD COMMITMENT: Before the resolution of a
combat round commences (see 7.5.2.8 for sequencing), a
player with a guard or grenadier corps involved may choose
to "commit the guard" and announces that this is being done.
If a force includes guard or grenadier corps of two or more
nationalities, only one corps may be used for this purpose. A
player may do this only once per day of combat.
17
HR 12.3.4: [no usada en Elba!!] Para evitar un
aprovechamiento incorrecto de la regla, se prohibe la
utilización de la Guardia si no existe al menos una
posibilidad (1/6) de romper al enemigo.
OR 12.3.4.1: If both sides have guard and/or grenadier
corps, the decision to commit or not and (if applicable) the
number of morale levels of the shift must be written down
by both side's players at the start of every combat round
and revealed simultaneously.
OR 12.3.4.2: The effect of committing the guard is to
increase the morale level used on the Combat Resolution
Table by "+1" or "+2". For example, the "3-2" combat table
becomes the "3-3" (increased by "+1") or "3-4" (increased
by "+2") combat table.
OR 12.3.4.3: Only two or more guard factors of French
and/or Russian guards may be used to attempt to increase
the morale level by "+2". One or more guard factors of
Austrian, French, Prussian and/or Russian guard factors
may be used to increase the morale level by "+1". Despite
these minimums, all available guard factors of a nationality
that is committed must be used for this. British and/or
Spanish guard factors may not be committed.
OR 12.3.4.4: The player who commits his guard then
consults the GUARD COMMITMENT TABLE on the Game
Card and rolls a die. The die roll is cross-referenced with
the column showing the number of morale levels shifted.
The result is the number of guard factors automatically lost
(in addition to any that may be lost during the coming
combat round).
OR 12.3.4.5: If at least one guard factor of the committed
nationality is left, then the combat round proceeds, with the
modified morale level. The lost guard factors do not
participate in the combat round. If all committed guard
factors were lost, then the committing side is automatically
considered to break without fighting that combat round
(although the opposing side still fights).
OR 12.3.4.6: If at least one guard factor survives and the
combat round is fought with the modified morale level, the
other side must be broken during that combat round or the
side that committed the guard is automatically considered
to be broken.
OR 12.3.5 ARTILLERY CORPS: The French and Russian major
powers each have the use of an artillery corps. These have
special uses during field and limited field combats, trivial
combats and limited field combats. These special uses do
not apply during siege assaults or defender attacks (unless
a relieving force is available for a limited field combat).
OR 12.3.5.1: In every combat round (see 7.5.2.8 for
sequencing) the artillery may be used to "bombard" before
normal combat is resolved, the casualties inflicted by
bombardment taking no part in later combat. If both sides
possess artillery, the bombardment losses are considered
to be determined simultaneously.
OR 12.3.5.2: The losses removed by bombardment may not
be militia, where possible, if the side taking the
bombardment losses already has a morale loss of "2.0" or
greater.
OR 12.3.5.3: Artillery bombardment inflicts only casualties-it
has no effect on morale (ignore morale losses when doing
an artillery bombardment).
OR 12.3.5.4: Artillery always bombards using the "5-5" table,
irrespective of the tables being used for the normal combat
round. Artillery bombardment is unaffected by any terrain
other than marsh-there can be no bombardment in marsh
terrain, although the artillery factors still participate in
normal combat.
OR 12.3.5.5: Artillery also takes part during the normal
combat round (ie., when used for bombardment it
effectively gets to fight twice).
OR 12.3.5.6: If at any time during a combat round a side (or
the pinning force of a side) consists of only artillery factors,
that side is automatically considered to break.
7.5.2.9 STEP NINE-COMBAT RESOLUTION: The opposing
players each throw one die each and crossgrid their modified rolls on
their respective combat tables on the COMBAT RESOLUTION
CHART for each round, applying the result. Combat is considered to be
conducted simultaneously so both forces take their losses at the same
time.
7.5.2.9.1 Die Roll Modifiers: See 10.6.1 for determining commanders
and their tactical ratings. The die roll is modified by commander
differences. Use the COMMANDER CHART on the Game Card and
crossgrid the opposing commander's tactical ratings to find the modifiers.
For example, if the attacking commander's tactical rating is 4 and the
defending commander's tactical rating is 3, the attacker's die roll is
modified by + 1. Any optional modifier (see 12.3.3. 1) is cumulative with
the commander modifiers, although the maximum cumulative modifier
can never exceed +1.
7.5.2.9.1.1: Commander tactical ratings are recalculated after every
round of combat (they can change if reinforcing corps or a new
reinforcing commander arrive).
7.5.2.9.1.2: If desired, a player may declare at the start of a combat
round that his commander's tactical rating is less than it actually is
for purposes of determining the die roll modifiers on the
COMMANDER CHART.
OR 12.3.7.1 CORPS LEADERS: For purposes of combats
(although without a leader counter corps must still attempt to
withdraw or reinforce individually), when no leader is
available for a multi-corps force and the best corps rating is
used, treat these best corps ratings the same as if the force
were commanded by a leader with those strategic and
tactical ratings and a tactical maximum rating of "1" and
modify accordingly (see 10.6.1.2.1).
OR 12.3.7.2 FURTHER TACTICAL RATING REDUCTIONS: This
option extends rule 10.6.1.2.1 by allowing a commander with
three times the corps of the tactical maximum rating to have
the tactical rating reduced by "-3", with four times the corps
to be reduced by "-4", etc. The tactical rating can still never
be reduced to below zero.
OR 12.3.7.3 NAPOLEON'S RATINGS: Napoleon's military skill
slipped noticeably as he got older. If this option is used, the
NAPOLEON leader's tactical rating is reduced to "4" starting in
January, 1809 and the strategic rating reduced to "4" starting
in January, 1812. These reductions do not apply for combats
fought within the original French home nation boundaries.
7.5.2.9.2 Percentage Loss-Types of Casualties: The percentage loss
(%LS) result is the percentage (see the CASUALTY PERCENTAGE
TABLE on the Game Card) of that side's number of army factors which
the other side must remove as losses. Losses incurred may be taken in
any fashion within the following conditions:
7.5.2.9.2.1: Where possible, militia casualties may be taken only
until (not including) the round in which the cumulative morale loss
of the army equals or exceeds 2.0.
7.5.2.9.2.2: In the round in which a side breaks, one of its losses
must be cavalry (any type-regular, feudal, cossack or freikorps), if
possible.
7.5.2.9.2.3: Factors that become casualties in one combat round
may not be used in later rounds.
OR 12.3.6 PROPORTIONAL LAND LOSSES: When army factors of
mixed nationality (including minor country nationalities)
participate in a combat, the losses suffered should be
as nearly proportional to the starting proportions as
possible. Round ". 5 " and above up. When proportions
do not "round out" precisely, an "odd" loss or losses
should be assigned by mutual agreement or, if
agreement cannot be reached, by competitive die
rolls. Once the number of army factors lost by each
contingent are determined, the controlling players
decide the types of factors to be lost by each
contingent (within the normal limits for militia, cavalry,
guard, etc. factors that must be lost by the whole army)
by mutual agreement or, if impossible, by competitive
die rolls.
7.5.2.9.3 Morale Loss: The "morale loss" ("MRLS") is subtracted from
the other side's final morale level. These are accumulated from round to
round.
7.5.2.10 STEP TEN-VICTORY AND DEFEAT: When a force is
eliminated or its total morale loss reaches or exceeds its final morale level
it breaks, may be pursued and must retreat (unless totally eliminated). The
combat is over and no further combat rounds are resolved. This may
occur at the end of any round. Skip this step and go to Step 11 if the field
combat continues. If the combat is over, perform this step, then skip to
Step 14.
18
7.5.2.10.1 Winning a Field Combat: A major power wins a field
combat when the enemy side or an enemy pinning force either breaks
or is completely eliminated.
7.5.2.10.1.1 "Breaking": When a side's total morale loss equals
or exceeds its final morale level,it"breaks" (retreats from the
field) and combat ceases after that round has been completed. In
the round in which a side breaks, at least one of that side's losses
incurred must be cavalry (this includes Cossacks and freikorps),
if possible.
7.5.2.10.1.2 Pinning Force Defeat: If a pinning force breaks or is
eliminated before the outflanking force "arrives", the whole side
(including the outflanking force) is considered to be broken and
may be pursued.
7.5.2.10.1.2.1: If the pinning force is eliminated before the
outflanking force "arrives", all enemy leaders present are
captured by the victor and the outflanking force is broken and
may be pursued.
7.5.2.10.1.2.2: If a pinning force is eliminated, any excess
casualties caused to that side go on the outflanking force.
7.5.2.10.1.3 Political Points For Winning/Losing Field Combats:
The victor now gains political points and the loser loses them,
recorded on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status
Card). Half a political point is gained or lost for each corps of
the defeated side (rounding fractions up) used during any round
of that combat (this includes corps in outflanking forces that
never arrive, but not reinforcing corps that do not arrive) up to a
maximum of +3 political points. For this purpose a single corps
which begins or reinforces a battle with more than 20 factors in
it is treated as 2 corps.
7.5.2.10.1.3.1: If the victor was commanded by the NAPOLEON
leader, they get one extra political point.
7.5.2.10.1.3.2: If the loser was commanded by the NAPOLEON
leader, they lose two extra political points.
7.5.2.10.2 Pursuit After Combat: When a side breaks, the victor may
launch a "pursuit" using the victor's cavalry factors. Pursuit procedure
is as follows:
7.5.2.10.2.1 Pursuit Class: The "pursuit class" is determined
from the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE on the Game Card by
crossgridding the victor's total morale loss in the combat with
the number of combat rounds completed. Combats going into
two or more days always use the 3+ rounds column. The number
found is the "pursuit class number", which is then applied on the
PURSUIT TABLE. For example, if the victor had a 2.6 total
morale loss when the loser breaks at the end of the second
combat round, the 2-2.9 line is crossgridded with the 2 column
to find a 3pursuit class. EXCEPTION: If a pursuit is ordered
against forces withdrawing after a day's combat rather than
breaking, automatically use a 1 pursuit class (prior to applying
any modifiers).
7.5.2.10.2.2 Pursuit Class Modifiers: The following cumulative
modifiers all apply when using the PURSUIT TABLE:
7.5.2.10.2.2.1 Cavalry Leader Present: +1 is added to the die roll
if a cavalry leader (denoted by a cavalry leader symbol on the
leader counter) is present on the victor's side at the combat even
if he was not the commander, so long as at least one cavalry
factor of the leader's major power takes part in the pursuit.
7.5.2.10.2.2.2 In Forest, Mountain or Desert: If the combat took
place in a forest, mountain or desert area, the pursuit class
column used on the PURSUIT TABLE is shifted one column to
the right of the column indicated by the pursuit class number (a -
1 modification). For example, if the pursuit class number from
the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE is 3 and the combat area is
forest, mountain or desert, the shift is from the 3 to the 2
column.
7.5.2.10.2.2.3 In Marsh: If the combat took place in a marsh
area, the pursuit class column used on the PURSUIT TABLE is
shifted two columns to the right of the column indicated by the
pursuit class number (a 2 modification).
7.5.2.10.2.2.4 No Pursuit: Any result modified to less than a
class 1 pursuit means that no pursuit takes place.
7.5.2.10.2.3 Pursuit Losses: Roll the die and crossgrid the
modified die roll number with the modified pursuit class column
on the PURSUIT TABLE. The result is the percentage loss of
the total (this does include cavalry factors that were in an
outflanking force that did not arrive) cavalry factors in the
victor's force inflicted on the broken force. Every loss in the
broken force not taken in cavalry (which includes cossacks and
freikorps) is taken as three non-militia or six militia factors (ie.,
1 cavalry=3 infantry 6 = militia). If the entire losing force is
eliminated by pursuit, all losing leaders are captured by the
victor.
HR 7.5.2.10.2.3: La baja de 1I se puede intercambir por 1A.
Las bajas de 1G equivalen a 1I. Las bajas de Guerrilla
se toman como milicias.
7.5.2.10.3 Retreat After Losing A Combat: The loser is retreated one
area by the victor. This occurs after pursuit (if any).
7.5.2.10.3.1: All retreats must be into an adjacent land area that is
closest (any closest area, if several qualify equally) to the nearest
depot of any nationality in force, or if none is on the map, towards
that force's nearest controlled national capital city.The depots
discussed here are those of the losing force. Gen 27/2
HR7.5.2.10.3.1: Si hay una isla en la ecuación : la retirada
será hacia una zona que pueda ser abastecida desde
un depot existente en el mar o colocable en la
siguiente fase.
7.5.2.10.3.2: A retreating force may never be split up.
7.5.2.10.3.3: If the area retreated to contains an unbesieged enemy
corps, cossack, freikorps or depot garrison, the force is retreated
one more area (same rules as 7.5.2.10.3. 1), etc., until an open area
is reached.
7.5.2.10.3.4: Retreat across a crossing arrow or onto ships is not
permitted.
7.5.2.10.3.5: A force may not retreat into the same area twice in the
same retreat.
7.5.2.10.3.6: A force must surrender (An army factors and leaders
in the force become prisoners) if no retreat route is available.
HR7.5.2.10.3.6: La ruta de retirada está limitada por los puntos
de movimiento impreso de cada ficha. En el momento
que una ruta de retirada excede los pm de una ficha,
esta se rinde, mientras el resto de la fuerza continua la
retirada.
HR7.5.2.10.3.7: Para cada combate el árbitro declarará las
posibles zonas de retirada para cada fuerza, en el
momento de declarar el combate, antes de tirar
ningún dado y si hubiera dudas, se resolverán antes
del combate. La última palabra la tendrá el árbitro,
que para eso es árbitro.
7.5.2.10.4 Unusual Field Combat Results: Sometimes field combats
may have unusual conclusions.
7.5.2.10.4.1 Break and Eliminated: If a side's forces break in the
same combat round in which the enemy forces are completely
eliminated (or a pinning force is eliminated before the outflankers
arrive) then the broken major power wins the combat and does not
retreat (an outflanking force whose pinning force was eliminated
does retreat. Political points are gained by the winner (survivor)
and lost by the loser of this victory as per 7.5.2.10.1.3.
7.5.2.10.4.2 Both Break: If both forces break in the same combat
round and there are survivors on both sides then neither side wins,
gains or loses political points, or is pursued. Only the attacker
retreats-as per 7.5.2.10.3, except that the attacker retreats his own
forces.
7.5.2.11 STEP ELEVEN-REINFORCING ATTEMPTS: After each
round of a combat "day," players may attempt to reinforce from adjacent
land areas.
FAQ 7.5.2.11: A reinforcing corps doesn´t need to have any
movement points remaining.
7.5.2.11.1 Reinforcing A Field Combat: After each round of field
combat-corps, cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas in adjacent land areas
may attempt to reinforce. Furthermore, unbesieged corps, cossacks,
freikorps or guerrillas (for an attacker) in a city in the same or an adjacent
area to the field combat may also attempt to reinforce.
7.5.2.11.1.1: Reinforcement across a crossing arrow or by
disembarking is not permitted.
7.5.2.11.1.2: Forces may not attempt to reinforce if they have
already or will take part in another combat this same major power
sequence.Trivial combats do not count as a combat to prevent
attempts to reinforce. If all of a side's forces in an as yet
unresolved trivial combat leave to reinforce another combat, the
trivial combat does not take place. Gen 25/4
7.5.2.11.1.3: Allied forces may take part in a combat round only if
at war with all the major powers on one side, by reinforcing the
other side (unless also at war with a major power on that side) even
if they would not otherwise move in this major power's sequence
of the Land Movement Step.
7.5.2.11.2 Reinforcing Procedure: If the reinforcing forces have a leader
(determine a commander as in 10.6.1.1.1, if there is more than one leader)
with them (essential to reinforce with cossacks, freikorps and/or
guerrillas), the leader's strategic value is used when dicing to reinforce
with all the corps in that area as a single unit, otherwise each corps dices
separately to reinforce. The commander's strategic rating or less needs to
19
be rolled to reinforce.If a leader is used for a reinforcing force, one or
more counters may be left behind, if desired. Gen 27/2
7.5.2.11.3 Strategic Rating Modifiers For Reinforcing: A reinforcing
commander's or corps' strategic rating is reduced by -1 if it occupies a
mountain, forest or marsh area, or wishes to reinforce across a river.
The reductions are not cumulative-the maximum reduction never
exceeds -1. A reduction may result in corps being unable to reinforce at
all.
7.5.2.11.4 Pinning Force Reinforcements: Any friendly forces that
reinforce a battle on a side with a pinning and an outflanking force are
attached to the pinning force, not to the outflanking force.
7.5.2.11.5 Using Reinforcements: A side's final morale level is not
changed due to the arrival of reinforcements but its cavalry factors (not
doubled for this purpose) are counted for determining cavalry
superiority (see option 12.3.3.1) and all of its army factors may be
added to the side's army factors for determining percentage losses on
the enemy. A reinforcing leader may take command if 10.6.1.1.3
applies.
7.5.2.12 STEP TWELVE-ARRIVAL OF OUTFLANKING
FORCES: After the first and second combat rounds of the day, players
may attempt to roll for the arrival of outflanking forces.
7.5.2.12.1 Outflanking Force Arrival (?): At the end of the first round
of combat the outflanking player rolls a die and compares the number
rolled to the commander's strategic rating.
7.5.2.12.1.1: If the die roll is less than or equal to the
commander's strategic rating, as modified (all modifiers
arecumulative) byterrain and notes on the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART, the outflank is successful and the
outflanking forces "arrives", otherwise, the outflankers must dice
again for possible arrival at the end of the 2nd round.
7.5.2.12.1.2: For outflanking, Commanders' strategic ratings are
reduced by -1 if the area containing the reinforcing forces is a
forest, mountain or marsh area.
7.5.2.12.1.3: The strategic rating of a commander is increased by
+2 at the end of the second combat round.
7.5.2.12.2 Withdraw vs. Outflanking: If the opposing side chose the
outflank chit and the outflanking force does not arrive after the first
round, all remaining corps of a withdraw chit side are withdrawn
successfully before the second round is fought. This is handled as a
normal withdrawal, as in 7.5.2.5.2.3. There is no pursuit.
 If this is not the third round of the day, repeat Steps 7-12,
using the combat tables appropriate for each combat round.
7.5.2.13 STEP THIRTEEN - "END OF DAY" WITHDRAWAL /
ADDITIONAL COMBAT: At the conclusion of three combat rounds
(ie., one combat "day"), if neither side has been eliminated or broken,
the players have the choice to continue a battle or to end it. The
opposing commanders should secretly note their intention to "fight" or
"withdraw", then reveal their choices simultaneously.
7.5.2.13.1 Withdrawing After A "Day" of Combat: Either or both
sides may automatically withdraw if that was their choice. These
withdrawals are handled as per losing a combat (see 7.5.2.10.3.1), but
are conducted by the controlling players for their sides. If both sides
choose to withdraw, both must leave the area and there are no pursuits.
Since no one was defeated, no political points are gained or lost from
the combat.Gen 25/4& 27/2
FAQ 7.5.2.13.1a: If only one side withdraws after a
complete day of combat, i.e., neither side breaks or is
eliminated, no political points should be awarded.
FAQ 7.5.2.13.1b: When only a side withdraws after a day's
combat there is pursuit, because 7.5.2.10.2 states that
pursuit can be launched "when a side breaks..." and
7.5.2.10.2.1 lists an exception to using the pursuit table
concerning pursuit of a force withdrawing unbroken after a
day's combat. Rule 7.5.2.13.1 says there is no pursuit when
both sides breaks.
HR 7.5.2.13.1 Expl: Cuando un bando se retira al final del
día, el otro bando sí puede hacer persecución.
7.5.2.13.2 New "Days" of Combat: If both players chose to fight, the
combat goes into a further day (three rounds more). New Operational
Possibilities chits are chosen, etc., repeating Steps 1-12.
7.5.2.13.2.1:The final morale levels used are those of the first
day less -0.5 for each succeeding day plus any OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART modifiers. Final morale levels are
otherwise not re-calculated even if reinforcements arrived.
7.5.2.13.2.2: Any outflanking forces that have not yet arrived
rejoin the pinning force "overnight," so that all forces are once
again united at the start of each day. Possible reinforcing forces
do not arrive overnight.
7.5.2.14 STEP FOURTEEN-DEPOTS AFTER FIELD BATTLES:
If there are any enemy supply depots in the area with only friendly
forces remaining, then that supply depot may be destroyed or converted
to a friendly supply depot if it would then be part of a valid supply chain
(see 7.3.6.2).
OR 12.7 LEADER CASUALTIES: After the completion of a field or
limited field combat, a trivial combat, or a naval combat
,each side with a leader or leaders present checks to see if
any became casualties in the combat by rolling two dice.
Rolling a "12" indicates a leader casualty. If a casualty is
indicated, randomly choose a leader counter from among
those present (if more than one is present) and roll one die
for the chosen leader. If a "6" is rolled, the leader casualty is
"killed" and taken permanently from the game. On any other
roll, the leader casualty is "wounded" and taken from the
map for a number of complete months equal to the die roll
number.
7.5.2.15 EXAMPLE OF FIELD COMBAT: Turkey is at war with
Russia. In its Land Movement Step it moves with 7 corps containing 18
feudal infantry, 18 feudal cavalry and 14 Janissary (regular infantry)
factors into an area containing 4 Russian corps with 6 Guard infantry, 17
regular infantry, 13 militia and 1 regular cavalry factors. These forces are
not revealed until after cross-referencing on the OPERATIONAL
POSSIBILITIES CHART occurs.
STEP ONE (see 7.5.2.1): The Turkish player chooses from the attacker's
set of operational possibilities chits and the Russian player from the
defender's set.
STEP TWO (see 7.5.2.2): Next, each player declares whether or not they
have chosen "outflank". Neither has, so Step Three (see 7.5.2.3) is
skipped.
STEP FOUR (see 7.5.2.4): Turkey now reveals he has chosen the
"assault" chit and Russia shows the "cordon" chit. Since the Russians did
not choose the withdraw chit, Step Five (see 7.5.2.5) is skipped.
STEP SIX (see 7.5.2.6): Morale (using Method One) for Turkey is: 36
(feudal infantry and cavalry factors) times 2.0 morale value plus 14
(Janissary infantry factors) times 3.0 morale value equals 114 divided by
50 army factors equals 2.28, which round up to 2.3 base and final morale
level. Morale for Russia is: 6 (guard infantry factors) times 5.0 morale
value plus 17 (regular infantry factors) times 3.0 morale value plus 13
(militia factors) times 2.0 morale value plus 1 (regular cavalry factor)
times 4.0 morale value equals 111 divided by 37 army factors equals 3.0
base and final morale level. Both sides reveal their sizes (number of army
factors) and compositions (types of army factors).
STEP SEVEN-FIRST ROUND (see 7.5.2.7): Cross-referencing on the
OPERATIONAL POSSIBILITIES CHART indicates that for the first
round Turkey is on the 4-1 table and Russia on the 2-1 table. No terrain
modifiers apply. Step Eight (see 7.5.2.8) is skipped, as those options are
not being used.
STEP NINE-FIRST ROUND (see 7.5.2.9): Both players have a leader
with a modified tactical rating of 2 which results in no leader die roll
modifiers from the COMMANDER CHART. If option 12.3.3.1 were
used (it is not), Turkey would have a + 1die roll modifier for (8 feudal
cavalry versus 1 regular cavalry factor) cavalry superiority. Turkey, on
the 4-1 table, rolls a 4, which causes a 10 percentage loss (10% of 50
Turkish army factors = 5 Russian army factors lost) and a -1.0 morale
loss. The Russians can take all of their army factor losses in militia
factors as their total morale loss is less than 2.0. Russia, on the 2-1 table,
rolls a 3, which causes a 5 percentage loss (5 % of 3 7 Russian army
factors = 2 Turkish army factors lost) and a -.02 morale loss. The Turks
take both of their army factor losses as feudal infantry factors. As neither
side breaks nor is eliminated and there are no reinforcements or flanking
forces involved, Steps Ten through Twelve are skipped (see 7.5.2.10-
75.2.12) and play moves to the second combat round.
STEP SEVEN-SECOND ROUND: On the second round Turkey is on
the 4-3 table and Russia is on the 2-1 table.
STEP NINE-SECOND ROUND: Again, no die roll modifiers. Turkey,
on the 4-3 table, rolls another 4, which causes a 15 percentage loss (15%
of 48 surviving Turkish army factors = 7 Russian army factors lost) and a
-2.0 morale loss. Russia, on the 2-1 table, rolls a 4, which causes a 5
percentage loss (5% of 32 Russian army factors=2 Turkish army factors
lost) and a -.05 morale loss. The Turks again eliminate two feudal
infantry factors. Russia has broken as total morale loss is -3.0, -1.0 in
round one plus -2.0 in round two, exactly equalling the Russian final
morale value), therefore one of the losses inflicted in the last round must
be cavalry (the Russian loses his only regular cavalry factor) and none
can be militia (if possible) as morale loss has exceeded a total of -2.0 this
round (6 Russian regular infantry factors are removed). Russia now has 6
guard, 11 regular infantry and 8 militia factors remaining.
STEP TEN (see 7.5.2. 10): Having broken the Russians and having
cavalry, Turkey now pursues the Russians. As it was the second round in
which the Russians broke and Turkey has lost a total of - 0.7 morale,
checking the PURSUIT CLASS TABLE shows a 5 pursuit class. On the
20
PURSUIT TABLE, Turkey rolls a 5 which means 60 % of 18 Turkish
Feudal cavalry factors = 11 pursuit loses to the Russians. This is
equivalent to 33 regular infantry and/or guard factors which is a lot
more than the Russian has, therefore his force is wiped out and the
leader(s) captured. Turkey gains 2 political points and Russia loses 2,
as there were 4 corps on the losing side.
7.5.3 TRIVIAL COMBATS: Combats in which one side initially
consists solely of garrison factors on a depot, cossacks, freikorps and/or
guerrillas not in cities must be resolved using trivial combat. Players
may also resolve any other field or limited field combats in this
manner, if both commanders agree.
7.5.3.1: Trivial combats are resolved similarly to field combats, but the
procedure is much simplified. No operational possibilities chits are
chosen, but commander (see 7.5.2.9.1) and cavalry superiority (see
option 12.3.3.1) modifiers are included as for field combats. Trivial
combats may not be reinforced (see 7.5.2.1.1) unless trivial combat
procedure is being used to resolve a field or limited field combat.
7.5.3.2: Combat is fought using the 5-2 combat table for both sides for
all three combat rounds, subject to modification for terrain (see 7.5.2.7)
and guard commitment (see option 12.3.4). Additional "days" of
combat may be fought using trivial combat.
7.5.3.3: Any type of factor may be removed as a casualty, at the
controlling player's option, during any round of a trivial combat (ignore
the restrictions of 7.5.2.9.2.1).
7.5.3.4: The normal field combat methods of determining final morale
values, breaks, retreats, withdrawals at the end of a "day" and pursuit
rules are followed. Depot and citygarrisons cannot retreat and losing
survivors that break must surrender if not eliminated by a pursuit.Gen
27/2
7.5.3.5: No political points are gained or lost in trivial combats.
EXCEPTION: If both commanders had agreed to resolve what could
have been a field or limited field combat by using trivial combat
procedures, the normal political point changes are made (see
7.5.2.10.1.3).
OR 12.3.10: OVERWHELMING NUMBERS: Field or limited field
combats where one side has a 5:1 or better ratio in strength
factors must be resolved using trivial combat. EXCEPTION:
An outnumbered defender may attempt to withdraw
before the trivial combat by rolling the commander's
strategic rating or less.
HR12.3.10: Overwhelming numbers avanzada
-Ataques 1:5 : el ataque no tiene lugar. El atacante rompe
y tiene que retirarse antes de producirse el ataque. El
atacante pierde un PP. Ningún efecto para el defensor.
-Ataques 5:1 hasta 15:1 : field combat resuelto con las
tablas de trivial. No se escogen chits (seran siempre
assault vs withdraw) a menos que el atacante me mande
un probe DE ANTEMANO. Hay intercambio de PP, el
combate impide al atacante (y al defensor si sobrevive)
reforzar un combate posterior.
-Ataques 15:1 o superior: Es un combate trivial a todos los
efectos excepto : el atacante no gana PP pero el defensor
si los pierde. El atacante puede reforzar combates
posteriores.
7.5.4 SIEGES: These represent the surrounding and reduction of
garrisoned enemy cities. A major power's corps may besiege any
occupied city in territory controlled by a major power or minor neutral
with which it is at war or any city occupied by enemy troops wherever
it is located. Guerrillas, freikorps and cossacks may only conduct
sieges in conjunction with friendly corps. Depot garrisons may never
take part in sieges. The forces besieging a city are the "besiegers”, and
the garrison inside the city are the "defenders". A phasing force that
just attacked and won a field or trivial combat in an area may then
besiege an enemy city in that same area if all corps in the, phasing
force used depot (regular, sea and/or invasion) supply, and/or did not
use unused movement points to modify a foraging roll (see 7.4.1.2.2).
HR7.5.4 Aclaracion : Los Asedios se declaran después de
resolver los combates de campo o triviales, por tanto si un
cuerpo que hubiese gastado PM en forage, se retira a una
zona con ciudad tras perder un combate, la ciudad NO
puede ser asediada ni asaltada.
7.5.4.1 BESIEGER ASSAULT ATTEMPTS: A besieging major
power may elect to launch "assault" attempts. For assault attempts a die
is rolled and the result referenced to the SIEGE TABLE on the Game
Card.
7.5.4.1.1 Assault Attempt Modifiers: The die roll for assault attempts
is cumulatively modified as follows:
 7.5.4.1.1.1 City Siege Value: The city siege value (the number of
fleches in the city picture on the mapboard) is subtracted from the
die roll.
7.5.4.1.1.2 Undergarrisoned: +1 is added if the city is not
garrisoned to within 5 factors of the city's garrison capacity. For
example, if the garrison capacity is 15, one will be added if there
are 9 or less factors in the city.
7.5.4.1.2 Assault Attempt Results: The results from the SIEGE TABLE
are resolved as follows.
7.5.4.1.2.1 Sortie?:If “sortie?" is the result the defender may elect
to "sortie" (historically, in a sortie a besieged force would launch a
limited surprise attack on the besiegers) out against the besieging
force. In a sortie, the defending player rolls a die. On a roll of 5 or
6 the defender loses one army factor (defending player's choice),
and any other result is a one army factor loss (besieging player's
choice) to the besieger. If the defender chooses not to roll a die,
nothing happens.
7.5.4.1.2.2 NR: No results. Nothing happens.
7.5.4.1.2.3 Breach: If "breach" (indicating that a gap has been
blown through the defender's walls) is the result on the SIEGE
TABLE, the following may be done:
7.5.4.1.2.3.1 Honors of War: The defender may ask for the "honors
of war" (EXCEPTION: Turkish and Spanish defenders and their
minor allies may not). If honors of war are granted by the besieger,
the garrison corps and/or garrison army factors are moved to the
nearest friendly-controlled unbesieged city and/or city area. If
there is no such city, the garrison surrenders or fights instead. Note
that minor Free State garrisons may not leave their own country,
and if forced to, would have to surrender or fight. There are no
political points for the honors of war.
7.5.4.1.2.3.2 Surrender: If honors of war are not granted, or not
requested, the garrison may surrender (all become prisoners) or
may fight an assault combat, at the defending player's option. If the
defender fights and is broken, the surviving defending army factors
must surrender. There are no political points for a surrender.
7.5.4.1.2.3.3 Assault: If there are no honors of war or surrender,
the besieger must fight and assault the city.
7.5.4.1.3 Assault Combat Resolution: These simulate attempts to
"storm" a city by an assault through a breach. Assault Combat is resolved
similarly to trivial combat, but is even more simplified.
7.5.4.1.3. 1: The besieging forces fight on the 5-1 combat table and
the defenders on the 5-2 combat table of the COMBAT
RESOLUTION CHART on the Game Card for a maximum of
three rounds (assault combats never last more than one "day") with
no modifications for terrain, leaders and/or cavalry superiority. All
available factors on both side must participate. There are no
pursuits and assault combats may not be reinforced.
7.5.4.1.3.2: Final morale levels are determined as per 7.5.2.6.
7.5.4.1.3.3: Any type of army factor may be removed as acasualty,
at the controlling player's option, during any round of an assault
combat.
7.5.4.1.3.4: If the besieger loses or does not win (break or
eliminate the defenders) within three rounds, the siege is resumed,
with no further combat this player sequence.
FAQ 7.5.4.1.3.4: If the besieger assaults a city and both forces
break the siege continues, because the beseiger did
not win (see 7.5.4.1.3.4: and 7.5.2.10.4.2).
7.5.4.1.3.5: If the besieger wins (the defender is eliminated or
broken), then the city is captured and all surviving army factors
and leaders are surrendered.
7.5.4.1.4 Political Points For Siege Assault Combat Winners: If the
assaulted city contains a corps and/or is a "fortress" (has one or more
fleches), the defender gets one political point if the besieger loses (is
eliminated or broken) or does not win within three rounds, and the
besieger gets one political point if the city is captured. Record on the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card. No political points
are ever lost on either side, regardless of the outcome and none are gained
if the city has a no corps and/or is not a fortress (has no fleches).
FAQ 7.5.4.1: When a multinational force assaults a fortress or
city with a corps garrison, all powers with forces in the asault
gets the political points.
7.5.4.2 DEFENDER ATTACKS BESIEGER: Defenders may attack
besiegers during the defending player's sequence of a Land Combat Step,
if desired.
7.5.4.2.1 Garrison Attack Combats: These simulate a city garrison
attacking the besiegers and are resolved similarly to siege assault
combats.
7.5.4.2.1.1: If the defending garrison or a portion thereof (all
defending factors do not have to be used) chooses to attack, the
defending major power uses the 5-1 combat table and the besieger
(who must use all available factors) uses the 5-2 combat table on
21
the COMBAT RESOLUTION CHART for a maximum of three
rounds (garrison attack combats never last more than one "day")
with no modifications for terrain, leaders, or cavalry superiority.
There are no pursuits and these combats cannot be reinforced.
7.5.4.2.1.2: Final morale levels are determined as per 7.5.2.6.
7.5.4.2.1.3: Any type of army factor may be removed as a
casualty, at the controlling player's option, during any round of a
garrison attack combat.
7.5.4.2.1.4: If the defending force loses or does not win (break or
eliminate the besiegers) within three rounds, the siege is
resumed, unless the combat eliminates every army factor in a
garrison, in which case the city is captured.
7.5.4.2.1.5: If the defender wins, the besieger retreats in
accordance with the retreat after combat rules (see 7.5.2.10.3),
but may not be pursued, and any previously besieged corps may,
if desired, be immediately moved out of the city into the
surrounding area.
7.5.4.2.2 Political Points For Garrison Attack Combats: There are
no political points gained or lost for garrison attack combats.
7.5.4.2.3 Relieving Force-Limited Field Combats: If the besieged force
attacks with the help of "relieving forces" (ie., external corps
that enter the area from another area) or such relieving forces
attack without assistance from any part (all besieged factors do
not have to be used) of the besieged force, a "limited" field
combat instead of a defender attack combat is fought. Limited
field combats are fought at the same time as field and trivial
combats (ie., before any siege assault or defender attack
combats). A limited field combat is a normal field combat (use
all normal field combat rules) that may not exceed one "day"
(three combat rounds) in length and uses the following special
rules:
7.5.4.2.3.1 Relieving Force Fails TO Win: If the relieving force
breaks or does not win within 3 rounds, the siege is resumed.
7.5.4.2.3.1.1: The surviving siege defenders return to the
besieged city and the entire relieving force returns to the area
from which it entered the siege area (returns to any one of the
areas from which it entered, if more than one). If all siege
defenders were eliminated, the city is captured.
7.5.4.2.3.1.2: There is no pursuit if the relieving force did not
break, and, if it did break, only the relieving force may be
pursued, not the siege defenders.
7.5.4.2.3.2 Relieving Force Wins: If the besiegers break, they
retreat in accordance with the normal retreat after combat rules
(see 7.5.2.10.3), but may only be pursued by cavalry that is in
the relieving force (not in the siege defender's force) and any
previously besieged corps may, if desired, then be immediately
moved out of the city into the surrounding area.
7.5.4.2.3.3 Political Points For Limited Field Combats: Political
points for winning and losing are assigned as for field combats
(see 7.5.2.10.1.3). To win or lose, one side must be broken or
eliminated; otherwise the combat is considered a draw.
7.5.5 REMOVAL OF CORPS: At the end of a day's combat, when all
casualties are removed, excess corps counters emptied by losses may
also be removed from the mapboard. This may causea change in a
commander's tactical rating for the next day's combat (see 10. 6.1.2. 1)
[ 7.6 ] THE GUERRILLA STEP: Guerrilla creation and anti -
guerrilla operations occur in this step-see 10.1.1.
[ 7.7 ] THE CONQUEST STEP: This step is performed after all
major power sequences are completed. It can be performed any
convenient order. Control flags are changed to show the conquest of
minor countries and their change of control. The control flags are
changed only if the capital of the minor country was occupied during
the previous Turn and the conqueror has maintained uninterrupted and
unbesieged occupation for the entire current Turn. A newly conquered
minor country is always marked with a conquered control flag.
FAQ 7.7a: If 2 allied major powers occupy a minor country
capital at the exact same instant, even in combined
movement, powers still move in an order (see 7.3.8.1).
Whoever moves first may occupy the capital by detaching
a garrison (or having a corps be a garrison). If no garrison
was left, the power moving last may detach a garrison and
controlling the city. If a garrison WAS left, the power moving
last may besiege the city (7.5.4 allows a power to besiege
any city in enemy-controlled territory). Since the two
powers are allied, the garrison is neutral to the besieger.
Therefore, by 10.3.3, the garrison must surrender.
FAQ 7.7b: If a country is at the top of the Dominant Zone
and, during the Conquest Step, she is due to receive
control of one minor and lose control of another, you
should add up all conquest step awards/debits before
applying the result. In this case +1, -1 would result in a net
change of 0.
HR 7.7: El paso de Conquista es simultáneo
HR 7.7bis Para controlar una ciudad vacía de guarnición
enemiga, es suficiente con permanecer en el área, no es
necesario destacar una guarnición dentro de la ciudad. En
el caso que dos potencias mayores no en guerra entre si
ocupen en la misma fase y durante un turno entero, la
capital de un minor con el que estén en guerra, se resolverá
8.0 * THE ECONOMIC PHASE
During this phase, which occurs only at the end of the March, June,
September and December Turns, money and manpower are collected and
certain expenditures are made. Players should keep track of their current
amounts of money on a separate sheet of paper or use the
REINFORCEMENTS RECORD and ECONOMIC AND MANPOWER
WORKSHEET forms on copies of side two of the National Cards.
Prussia should do similarly for current saved manpower levels. The
actions of the Economic Phase occur in the following order:
[ 8.1 ]THE VICTORY POINTS STEP: In this step, the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card is consulted and each major
power receives the victory Points specified for the position at which it is
located. For example, if the Austrian political status marker was on the
square at the extreme right of the neutral zone line, Austria would receive
8 victory points.
8.1.1 RECORDING VICTORY POINTS: The victory points gained
are recorded by adjusting each major power's victory point markers on the
VICTORY POINTS DISPLAY on the Status are to show the new total of
victory points.
8.1.2 POSSIBLE BRITISH CHANGE IN VICTORY POINTS: The
British player has the option of spending up to one third of the victory
points he gained this step to subtract that same number of victory points
from the total victory points of any ONE major power with which Great
Britain is currently at war. This is done instead of Great Britain gaining
those victory points.
8.1.3 HOW TO WIN A GAME: During the Victory Points Step of a
game's final Turn, or possibly sooner, a victor is determined.
8.1.3.1 SCENARIO VICTORY: Each scenario has its own victory
conditions (see the individual scenarios in 13.0) and the victory
determination systems are different from those used for campaign games.
8.1.3.2 CAMPAIGN VICTORY: Victory points are collected during
each Victory Points Step (see 8.1). In the campaign games, the first
player(s) to obtain enough total victory points to reach or exceed his
major power's victory level and announce this fact (it does not have to be
announced at the first opportunity) is a winner. If two or more major
powers have reached or exceeded their victory levels simultaneously,
those major powers are co-winners. Players may not transfer victory
points to each other. If no player reaches the required victory level by the
end of a campaign game, Great Britain wins.
8.1.3.2.1 The Major Power Victory Levels: The required victory levels
for each major power are given in the VICTORY LEVELS CHART on
the Game Card.
8.1.3.2.2 Shorter Campaigns: If players wish to finish a campaign game
earlier, they can determine the victor by calculating the major power
which has attained the largest percentage of its victory level. Average
these percentages for players controlling two major powers (see 14.2.2).
8.1.3.2.3 The Final Victory Points Step: During a Victory Points Step
when the announced total victory points of a major power has matched or
exceeded that major power's victory level or, if the final month that will
be played has been concluded, during the final Victory Points Step of the
game, manpower levels are counted for additional victory points.
8.1.3.2.3.1: Each major power counts its total currently controlled
manpower values in controlled home nation provinces, controlled
ceded provinces of other home nations and conquered minor
countries (none of the component territories of the new political
combinations used in options 11.1-11.6 count as conquered).
Controlled minor Free States and/or controlled provinces or minor
countries with capitals currently occupied by an enemy are not
counted.
8.1.3.2.3.2: These manpower values are added as extra victory
points to the major power's victory point totals for determining a
winner or winners.
8.1.3.2.3.3: For players controlling two major powers (see 14.2.2)
to win, both of their major powers must match or exceed their
victory level or the excess victory points of one of these major
22
la conquista de la siguiente manera :
- Si ninguno de los dos destaca una guarnición o ambos lo
hacen : un competitive roll decidirá quién de los dos
conquista el minor.
- Si uno de ellos destaca guarnición, y el otro no, el que la
destaque conquista el minor. (Y aquí podría darse el caso
de asedio y rendición por neutralidad comentado en la
FAQ)
powers must be enough that, by adding these excess (not needed
to match its own victory level) victory points to the other major
power's victory points, that addition will be enough to bring that
second major power to its victory level.
[ 8.2 ] THE MONEY AND MANPOWER COLLECTION STEP:
The "tax" (for money) and "manpower" (recruiting for ships and army
factors) values for each province are printed within the province on the
mapboard. The domestic trading values for each port city are printed in
its blockade box. NOTE: Copies of the ECONOMIC AND
MANPOWER WORKSHEET forms on side 2 of the National Cards
are useful for the calculations involved in 8.2-8.5.
8.2.1 MONEY COLLECTION: There are a number of sources from
which a major power may collect money. Each player totals the money
due to him from Economic Manipulation (see option 12.5-this may be
negative), from taxation, from trade and Spanish Gold. This total is
added to any accumulated amount carried over from previous quarters.
8.2.1.1 MONEY COILLECTION BY TAXATION: The tax money
due a major power is determined by adding together all of the tax
values of all of its controlled home provinces, currently ceded enemy
provinces and conquered minor countries. The tax money due a
controlled minor Free State is similarly and separately figured (see
8.2.3). A major power may not collect taxes from a province or minor
country if its capital city is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors. A
major power collects no taxes at all (except for its minor Free States) if
its national capital city (or, in the case of Russia, if either Moscow or
St. Petersburg) is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors.
8.2.1.2 MONEY COLLECTION BY TRADE: The trade money due
a major power is determined by adding together all of the domestic
trading values of its ports. The domestic trade money due a controlled
minor Free State is similarly and separately figured.Great Britain may
trade with any eligible ports, but only if the major power controlling
the port also wishes to trade. For ALL trade, Great Britain announces
all trading he wishes to conduct, after which each major power
involved may agree or disagree. Gen 25/4& 27/2
HR 8.2.1.2: Esta HR opta por la segunda opción del FAQ
8.1.2.1. GB debe comerciar con todos los puertos de una
nacion o con ninguno, pero no con algu-nos si y con otros
no.
8.2.1.2.1 Domestic (Normal) Trade: All domestic trade is considered
to be done with Great Britain. When an eligible port does trade, Great
Britain receives the first trading value amount listed for its trade and
the controlling major power gains the second trading value amount.
8.2.1.2.1.1: A port is not eligible for trading (domestic or
overseas) if it is blockaded, besieged, or occupied by an enemy
major power other than the major power controlling the province
or minor country in which the port lies.
8.2.1.2.1.2: Ports north of the ice line are not eligible for trade in
the last (December) Economic Phase of a year.
8.2.1.2.1.3: Ports on the Black Sea can only trade if given
permission by the major power controlling Constantinopole.
8.2.1.2.1.4: A major power may not trade using any port in a
province or minor country if that province or minor country's
capital city is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors.
8.2.1.2.1.5: A major power may not conduct any trade (except
through eligible controlled minor Free State ports) if its national
capital city (both Moscow and St. Petersburg for Russia) is
occupied by unbesieged enemy factors. A major power at war
with Great Britain may not conduct any domestic trade.
8.2.1.2.1.6: Great Britain may trade with ports in minor neutral
countries, with no major power earning the second amount.
8.2.1.2.1.7:Great Britain may trade with eligible ports in
provinces and minor conquered countries it controls, gaining
 both values. Great Britain may also trade with eligible ports in
minor Free States it controls, gaining the first amount, the minor
Free State gaining the second.
8.2.1.2.2 Overseas Trade: This represents trade with nations and
colonies not shown on the map.
8.2.1.2.2.1 British Colonial Trade: Great Britain receives an
additional 30 (only 15 money points while at war with the U.S.A.-
see 8.2.1.2.2.2.2.3) money points for trade with its colonies.
8.2.1.2.2.2 American Trade: American trade represents European
trade with the American continents.
8.2.1.2.2.2.1 American Trade Value: Each major power
other than Great Britain may trade with America, receiving
twice the second domestic trading value of any one port
eligible (must use the one with the highest possible domestic
trading values) for domestic trade which it controls. This port
may not be in a controlled minor Free State but may be in a
controlled conquered minor country. It does not matter if this
port is also used for domestic trade with Great Britain. Minor
Free States have no separate American trade.
FAQ 8.2.1.2.2.2.1: A major power can´t conduct
American trade if its capital is occupied
8.2.1.2.2.2.2 Stopping American Trade-War With The
United States: If Great Britain is at war with another major
power(s), it may elect during this step to automatically stop
that major power(s) from trading with America.
8.2.1.2.2.2.2.1:If Great Britain stops the American trade,
Great Britain gains the value of the American trade it
stops.
8.2.1.2.2.2.2.2: If this is done, the British player also rolls
one die. If the roll is equal to or less than the number of
major powers denied trade with America by Great Britain,
Great Britain's actions are considered to have started a
war with the U. S. A. Great Britain immediately loses 15
money points and loses 15 money points of its colonial
trade every following Economic Phase while it remains at
war with the USA. While Great Britain is at war with the
USA no major power may trade with America. The war
with the USA lasts until Great Britain ends it by choosing
to lose 5 political points during any Peace Step. There
may be more than one war with the USA during the
course of a campaign game.
[12.9] AMERICAN TRADE OPTION: The War of 1812
between Great Britain and the United States was
to some extent "engineered" by Napoleon and
his "continental system". In this option, if peace
condition B.6 is applied to stop as major power's
American trade, this counts as a major power
denied trade with America for the die roll
required in 8.2.1.2.2.2.2 and the British must
make the die roll during any Money and
Manpower Collection Step in which any major
powers are denied American trade by Britain
and/or by the B.6 peace condition.
8.2.1.3 SPANISH GOLD: Spain receives money from a yearly gold
convoy from Spanish overseas colonies-two dice are rolled on the
SPANISH GOLD CONVOY TABI-E on the Game Card during the
September Economic Phase only and the amount indicated is received in
money points. If Great Britain is at war with Spain at this time, modify
the dice roll by -2. A modified dice roll of less than 2 results in there
being no gold for Spain this year-instead, Great Britain has captured the
gold convoy and gets 15 money points for the capture. If all Spanish-
controlled ports are blockaded and/or if no ports are Spanish-controlled or
unoccupied by enemy forces then there is also no gold convoy, although
there is also no dice roll in this case.
8.2.1.2.4 Continental Blockade: If using the option that Great Britain
may choose which specific ports he will trade with, rather than just
trading with (all ports of) the Major Power, implement this rule. At the
conclusion of the Money and Manpower Collection Step, Britain loses
one political point (PP) if its total Domestic Trade is less than $25, and
loses a second PP if its total trade is less than $15. MLB
8.2.2 MANPOWER COLLECTION: Each player totals the manpower
due to him from Economic Manipulation (this may be negative), from
friendly controlled home provinces and conquered minor countries only.
Manpower is not collected from ceded enemy provinces nor from a
controlled province or minor country whose capital city contains
unbesieged enemy factors. The presence of an unbesieged enemy in the
national capital of a major power does not affect the collection of
manpower except for the capital's province.
8.2.3 MINOR FREE STATES MONEY AND MANPOWER
23
COLLECTION: Minor Free States gain doubles the money and
manpower values printed on the map. To this is added the money value
of any domestic trade with Great Britain. Minor Free Statedo not trade
with America. This money and manpower is used exclusively for
purchases and maintenance of that minor's forces. Any wastage is lost.
The controlling major power may loan money (actually, give the
money-minor Free States never repay loans, and may not make loans of
their own) to a minor Free State. If the capital city of a minor Free State
is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors, it gains no money (including
trade) or manpower.
[ 8.3 ]THE LENDING MONEY STEP: Major powers may now lend
or give ("subsidies?") money to each other or to their own controlled
minor Free States. Minor Free States may not loan money. Money may
not be lent or given at any other time in the game. Money that changes
hands is added or subtracted from the money obtained from other
sources. Manpower may not be loaned or given away at any time.
Between major powers, money may, only be loaned or given to allies.
FAQ 8.3 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: The existence or
amount of a loan may be kept secret, but I would advise a
paper trail for any questions that might pop up later, during
your after game wrap-up.
HR 8.3 Expl: No se puede prestar dinero a no-aliados, y el
préstamo a aliados se puede dar en las condiciones que
se desee (a fondo perdido, con intereses, etc.). A los
menores siempre se presta dinero a fondo perdido.
[ 8.4 ] THE MANIPUILATION SFEP:
8.4.1 OCCUPIED HOME NATION CAPITALS: If a major power
home nation capital is enemy occupied and unbesieged during a
Manipulation Step, the major power without a capital may not collect
money (see 8.2.1.1) or carry out any previously set economic
manipulation (see option 12.5) or set any new economic manipulation
(0 must be set). Instead, the major power's political status marker must
be adjusted on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPILAY on the Status
Card to show the following drop in points:
8.4.1.1 LONDON OR PARIS OCCUPIED: -3 political points.
8.4.1.2 BERLIN, CONSTANTINOPLE OR VIENNAOCCUPIED:
-2 political points.
8.4.1.3 MADRID, MOSCOW OR ST PETERSBURGOCCUPIED:
-1 political point. For Russia, this is -1 political point per capital
(Moscow and/or St. Petersburg) occupied.
8.4.2 ECONOMIC MANIPULATION (OPTIONAL): If 8.4.1does
not apply, see option 12.5 for information on using economic
manipulation during this step.
OR 12.5 ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Economic
manipulation simulates the ability of a major power to
control its economy to gain the additional political points,
money or manpower that are needed. Economic
manipulation takes place during the Manipulation Step of
an Economic Phase (see 8.4). Performing economic
manipulation consists of first recording changes from the
last economic manipulation setting and then resetting the
ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY on side one of each
major power's National Card (even if side two is used for
everything else, this display on side one should be used
with this option during a campaign game) for the next
economic manipulation. The setting is always in the "0"
square at the start of a campaign and 8.4.1 restrictions can
limit the ability to use other settings.
OR 12.5.1 RECORDING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Major
powers gain or lose the number of political points specified
by the large Political Status Adjustment ("PSA") number in
the square of its ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY in
which that major power's economic manipulation marker is
positioned. This square also specifies gains or losses in
money and/or manpower. Record any political point
changes on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status
Card and add or subtract the money and manpower from
the totals determined during the Money and Manpower
Collection Step.
OR 12.5.2 SETTING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: The owning
player then sets the economic manipulation marker's
position to any square on the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION
DISPLAY. This position specifies the PSA number and
amount of money and/or manpower to be gained or lost in
the next Economic Phase's Manipulation Step.

8.4.3 RETURNING REMOVED LEADERS: At the end of a
Manipulation Step, determine if a removed leader (removed as a result of
peace condition C.6) can be returned to play (or drop political points at
this time to ensure the return during the next Reinforcement Phase-see
10.6.4).
[ 8.5 ] MONEY AND MANPOWER EXPENDITURE STEP: Money
and manpower are used to pay expenses and for building/recruiting new
ships and/or army (regular infantry and cavalry, militia, guard and/or
artillery) factors. Minor Free States pay their own maintenance, at the
same rates. If the minor Free State cannot pay, the major power
controlling the minor Free State must pay. Money should be expended in
the order that expenses are listed below. Any major power that becomes
"bankrupt" during 8.5.1 or 8.5.2 loses -3 political points (immediately
adjust the major power's political status marker on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY)
8.5.1 MAINTENANCE: These represent the expense of counters already
on the map. If there is insufficient money for the maintenance of all
counters in 8.5.1, the major power pays all available money and becomes
bankrupt. This has no effect on the counters on the map.
8.5.1.1 CORPS MAINTENANCE: For each corps of any type and at
any location a major power has on the map (not including minor Free
State corps, which are paid for separately) it expends one money point in
maintenance.
8.5.1.2 FLEET MAINTENANCE: It costs various amounts to maintain
fleets; one money point for each fleet located in a port, 2 money points
for each fleet in a blockade boxJJand 5 money points for each fleet
located in a sea area.
8.5.1.3 DEPOT MAINTENANCE: For each of its depots on the map a
major power expends one money point in maintenance.
8.5.2 FORMAL DEBTS: Major Powers now pay off any "formal" debts
that is, those required through peace terms (see peace terms B. 3, C. 3 and
C. 7). If there is insufficient money for this the major power pays what
there is and becomes bankrupt (if not already so) and the remainder of the
debt still exists as a formal debt. Players may now also choose, but are
not obliged, to pay any informal debts.
HR 8.5.2 Expl: Los pagos por paces son tan ineludibles como
el resto de deudas formales y deben pagarse en este
momento.
8.5.3 EXPENDITURE ON FORCES: Major Powers with money left
may spend it on army factor or ship purchases (see the PURCHASE /
COST CHART on the Game Card). For example, an infantry factor could
be purchased by using three money and two manpower points.
HR 8.5.3: El número de navíos construídos y el puerto son de
dominio público si se usa la regla optativa 12.1.2. Esto
prescribe expresamente el FAQ 8.5.3.
8.5.3.1: Minor Free States make separate purchases using their own
money and manpower.
8.5.3.2: Any excess manpower is lost (except for Prussia, which may save
manpower, though its controlled minor Free States may not).
8.5.3.3: The purchase of army factors and ships and their date of arrival
on the map as reinforcements should be recorded on a separate piece of
paper or on copies of the REINFORCEMENT RECORD of sides two of
the National Cards.
8.5.3.4: Neither the Turkish Major Power nor minor Free States may
build militia infantry. Insurrection, feudal troops, guerrillas, cossacks or
freikorps are not build in this step (see 10.1.1.1, 10.1.2.1, 10.1.3.1 and
10.1.4.2). Turkey may not build any guard factors and only France and
Russia may build artillery factors.
8.5.3.5: All ships and factors purchased during this step are placed on the
map as reinforcements during the Reinforcement Phase(s) after the
required number of months have passed (based on the "Time" column on
the PURCHASE/COST CHART on the Game Card) following the
purchase of the factors. For example, an infantry factor (which requires
three months to build) purchased during the March, 1806 Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step is placed on the map during the June, 1806
Reinforcement Phase.
8.5.4 EXPENDITURE ON NEW CORPS AND FLEET COUNTERS:
Major Powers and their controlled minor Free States may purchase fleet
and corps counters not currently on the map by paying one money point
per counter. Only AVAILABLE (currently off the map) fleet and corps
counters may be purchased as "new" counters. Counters currently on the
mapboard may NOT be purchased to be available for immediate return to
play as "new" counters should they be eliminated. Gen 25/4These
counters must be placed on the board within the next three months (the
next quarter) or they must be again purchased on another Economic Phase
before they can be placed on the map. Turkish feudal, Austrian
insurrection and the Austrian Tyrol corps that are not on the map at this
time do not have to be purchased.
8.5.5 SURPLUS MINOR FREE STATE MONEY OR MANPOWER:
Any remaining unused money or manpower points belonging to minor
24
Free States are lost.Minor country Free States and Kingdomsmay save
up to $14 between economic phases. If at any time in the future a new
rule introduces a factor that costs more than $15, then the savings limit
is increased to one less than that cost.JJ
8.5.6 MILITIA CONVERSION (OPTIONAL): If option 12.1.1 is
used, militia to be converted is removed from the map and paid for
during this step.
8.5.7 SURPLUS MAJOR POWER MONEY OR MANPOWER:
Any remaining money points belonging to a major power are available
for use to meet any of that major power's expenses (ie., building depots,
using depot supply, etc.-this also includes these expenses for controlled
Free States and/or supplying allied corps) during future months.
Prussian manpower points can also be saved-those of other major
powers are lost if not used.
[ 8.6] THE POLITICAL STATUS ADJUSTMENT STEP: In this
step, each player checks the box on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card containing his political status marker and
gains or loses the political points specified by the value of the large
political status adjustment ("PSA") number in the box. Where this is a
positive number, this is a political points gain (move the marker to the
right); where the number is negative, this is a political points loss
(move the marker to the left). The political status marker is moved by
the indicated number of boxes in the indicated direction. Players may
not transfer political points to one another.
[ 8.7 ] THE CIVIL DISORDER STEP: If, during any Economic
Phase, a major power can collect no home nation manpower, that major
power goes into "civil disorder" and that major power is permanently
out of the game and all of its home nation forces are permanently
eliminated from the map.
8.7.1: All conquered minor countries of the major power undergoing
civil disorder pass to the control of the major power occupying the
major power's capital.
8.7.2: Controlled minor Free States of the major power undergoing
civil disorder become neutral if no enemy forces control their capital. If
a capital is controlled, their control passes to the major power
occupying their capital.
8.7.3: Each of that major power's home nation provinces are ceded to
the major power controlling the provincial capital. EXCEPTION:
Where no major power controls the provincial capital, that province
passes to the major power controlling the national capital. These
provinces are now all considered to be ceded provinces.
8.7.4: If the forces of two or more major powers are placed to dispute
claims to territory arising from civil disorder (ie., mixed forces occupy
a capital city), the involved major powers may decide on control in any
mutually agreeable manner, or, if unable to agree, may use competitive
die rolls to determine the new controlling major power (the modifiers
from 4.6.2 apply to these die rolls for disputed minor countries).
8.7.5: Each major power at war with the major power undergoing civil
disorder gains 5 political points, the same as if the major power in civil
disorder had surrendered unconditionally.I’m sorry, but this rule is
horrible. We will use 11.9.1.2.
11.9.1.2 RESTRICTIONS ON CIVIL DISORDER: No major power
with a player may ever go into civil disorder. Ignore 8.7.1
through 8.7.5 for a major power with a player that meets
the civil disorder requirements (see 8.7) and, instead,
require that player to sue for and accept any type of
peace during the next Peace Step with all major powers
with which that major power was at war when the civil
disorder conditions were met.We will use this rule.
[ 8.8 ] THE CEDING STEP: Each player secretly writes down what
controlled minor country or ceded province he wishes to "cede"
(change control) to another major power. When such territories are
ceded as a result of a peace settlement rather than of an player
agreement, the territory is instead ceded at the moment peace is
declared.
8.8.1: Unceded home nation provinces may not be ceded at this time.
They may only be ceded as part of a formal (conditional or
unconditional surrender) peace settlement.
8.8.2: Territory ceded during this step may only be ceded to allies. If
desired, a major power may cede one individual district of a
multidistrict minor country instead of ceding the entire minor country
(this still costs a political point). During any one Ceding Step no
individual major power may cede more than one minor country, minor
country district or ceded province
HR 8.8.2 Expl: Se puede ceder un menor multidistrito o
nueva combinación al coste de 1PP por distrito.
8.8.3: A territory may not be ceded while it contains any forces of a
major power at war with the controlling major power or, in the case of
a minor country, separately at-war with that minor country, unless it is
ceded to that major power with forces inside that territory.
8.8.4: Ceding a territory during this step costs the ceding major power
one political point (still only one regardless of the number
of districts in a minor country). Record on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY on the Status Card.
8.8.5: When a minor Free State is ceded, the new controlling major power
may accept it and all its current forces as a Free State or immediately
remove its forces (army factors are eliminated, ships are recorded for
possible later use as in 10.2.1.1) and change it to a (add a conquered
control flag) conquered minor country.
8.8.6: A ceded province that is ceded back to its original home nation
becomes an unceded province again. A ceded province that is ceded to
any other major power remain a ceded province
OR 12.3.9 NO CEDING: Allow the ceding of minor countries
only as a peace term and at no other times.
9.0 THE TIME RECORD PHASE
During this phase, the Turn markers are advanced to show the start of a
new month. The "month" marker is advanced every month and the "year"
marker is advanced whenever the "month" marker is moved into the
"JAN" box.
[ 9.1 ] WINTER: The months of January, February and December are
"winter" months and the ice lines printed on the map apply.
10.0 MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERAL RULES
This section covers rules that apply in various phases and steps and so do
not fit into the sequence of play format of the rules covered so far.
[ 10.1 ] IRREGULAR FORCES: These are special types of army forces
that require some special rules.
10.1.1 GUERRILLAS: Guerrillas are special land forces available to
Spain when invaded by an enemy.
10.1.1.1 CREATING GUERRILLA FACTORS: Guerrilla counters of
the appropriate number of factors are placed on the map under the
following conditions:
10.1.1.1.1: Whenever Spain loses a field or limited field combat
involving a Spanish corps inside an unceded Spanish home nation
province, one guerrilla factor is created in that area as soon as the combat
is ended.
10.1.1.1.2: For every unceded Spanish province containing an unbesieged
enemy corps and/or garrison during the Spanish Guerrilla Step, a die is
rolled. For every point the die is lower than that province's guerrilla
value (printed on the map in parenthesis next to Spanish provincial
tax/manpower values) one guerrilla factor is placed in an area in that
province.
10.1.1.2 ANTI-GUERRILLA OPERATIONS: A major power (major
powers using combined movement are treated as one major power for this
purpose) at war with Spain may mount an "anti-guerrilla operation"
during its Guerrilla Step in each Spanish province occupied by one or
more of its corps that did not participate in any type of land combats
during that major power's Land Combat Step and is not besieged or a
besieger. The player rolls a die for each province. This die roll is
modified by +1 if the major power has two or more corps available for an
anti-guerrilla operation in a province. If the result is higher than the
province's guerrilla value, all unbesieged guerrilla factors in any areas of
that province are eliminated. Note that if several different major powers
had corps in the same Spanish province, each could do this during that
major power's Guerrilla Step.
10.1.1.3 USING GUERRILLAS: Guerrillas have a morale value of 1.
They may be used as part or all of city garrisons but may not be used to
garrison depots. They may attack if the controlling player chooses to use
some or all of the guerrilla factors present in an area, but may not be
attacked using the usual combat procedures unless besieged in a city.
10.1.1.3.1: Guerrillas are not compelled to attack or defend when
occupying an area containing enemy forces.
10.1.1.3.2: Guerrillas may block supply lines but need no supply
themselves unless besieged.
10.1.1.3.3: Guerrillas may besiege cities only in conjunction with friendly
corps.
10.1.1.3.4: Guerrillas may be moved during Spanish Land Movement
Steps only into one adjacent area (regardless of terrain) each Turn, if they
are moved at all. They may never leave Spain's original home nation
borders.
10.1.1.3.5: Guerrillas can be ignored for movement purposes by enemy
forces.
25
[ 8.9 ] THE NEW POLITICAL COMBINATIONS STEP
(OPTIONAL): Skip this step if options 11.1 through 11.6 and/or 11.8
are not used. Otherwise, new political combinations, additions to these
combinations, component parts going neutral and/or changes in
dominant status are determined and announced during this step.
[ 8.10 ] THE LEVY STEP: New cossack and/or freikorps counters are
placed on the map, if eligible (see 10.1.2.1), excess cossacks are
removed from the map (see 10.1.2.1.1) and (in December Economic
Phases only) feudal and insurrection corps are brought up to full
strength (see 10.1.3.1 and 10.1.4.3).
[ 8.11 ] THE UMP CONTROL STEP: This step is used only at the
end of December Turns in campaign games with less than seven
players (see 14.3) to determine who runs the UMPS.
[ 9.2 ] WINTER ZONE: All areas on the map are in the "winter zone"
(ie., all winter rules apply) except for those in the southern portion of
the map, specifically Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Tripolitania, Cyrenica,
Egypt, Palestine, Corfu, Cyprus, Rhodes, Crete, Malta and Majorca.
10.1.1.4 GUERRILLA REMOVAL: If there are no enemy factors
inside any unceded Spanish home nation province during a Spanish
Guerrilla Step, all guerrilla factors are removed from the board.
10.1.2 COSSACKS AND FREIKORPS: Each cossack or freikorps
counter represents one army factor. This factor is a cavalry factor for
all purposes and has morale value of 1. In scenarios, they are placed as
reinforcements when directed by the scenario instructions.
10.1.2.1 * CREATION OF COSSACKS AND FREIKORPS: New
cossack and freikorps counters, if all allowable counters are not already
on the map, may be placed on the map during a Levy Step.
10.1.2.1.1 Cossack Placement: One cossack counter is placed in any
Russian-controlled "cossack province" (a cossack province has a "C" in
parenthesis next to the province name on the map), so long as there
would then be no more cossack counters on the map than there are
Russian-controlled cossack provinces. EXCEPTION: If an enemy
corps is inside the Russian home nation, even if besieged, then there
may be up to two cossacks on the map for each Russian-
controlledcossack province. Any excess is removed by the Russian
player during a Levy Step when enemy corps are no longer inside
Russia.
FAQ 10.1.2.1.1: Russian can place 1 Cossack per C
province and per phase.
10.1.2.1.2 Freikorps Placement: A new Austrian freikorps counter is
placed in the Vienna area and a new Prussian freikorps counter is
placed in the Berlin area, if those areas are under their own home
nation control and the cities are unbesieged. Freikorps are only
available after certain dates. The Austrian freikorps is available starting
in the March, 1809 Economic Phase and the Prussian freikorps is
available starting in the March, 1813 Economic Phase.
10.1.2.2 USING COSSACKS AND FREIKORIPS: Cossacks and
freikorps have five movement points and may not be forced marched.
They may move through enemy forces and may be moved through by
enemy forces, without being required to stop. They may not be
transported by fleets. Cossacks may move anywhere they can reach and
are allowed by the rules, but freikorps may operate only within their
home nation's original border and in areas currently controlled by their
major power.
HR 10.1.2.2: Un cosaco o Fk puede activar las defensas de
puerto sólo con estar en el área, no es necesario que esté
expresamente guarnicionando.
10.1.2.2.1: Cossacks and freikorps block enemy supply but do not need
to be supplied themselves unless besieged.
10.1.2.2.2: When a cossack or freikorps ends its movement in an area
containing enemy field forces it must initiate an attack.
10.1.2.2.3: When unbesieged cossack and/or freikorps that are alone in
an area and are themselves attacked, the controlling player(s) may, if
desired, automatically retreat them before any combat occurs into any
adjacent area not containing an unbesieged enemy corps.
EXCEPTIONS: If attacked by a force containing at least one enemy
corps with a cavalry symbol, cossacks and/or freikorps may only retreat
before combat if their controlling player(s) rolls a 4 or less on one die
(roll once for the cossacks, regardless of the number of cossack counters
present). This system is also used when cossacks/freikorps are with corps
attempting to withdraw (see 7.5.2.5.2.2). Opposing cossacks/freikorps
must fight a trivial combat if alone (no other forces from either side)
together in an area.
10.1.3 TURKISH FEUDAL TROOPS: Turkey differs from the other
major powers in that it purchases army factors and ships only for the
Janissary, Imperial Cavalry and Nizami-Cedid corps and fleets. Turkish
feudal corps (infantry and cavalry) start the game at full strength in feudal
infantry or cavalry factors.
FAQ 10.1.3: Turkish feudal infantry can set up anywhere
during initial setup.
10.1.3.1 RAISING FEUDAL FACTORS: All army factors in the feudal
corps are raised in an annual "levy." During the Levy Step of a December
Economic Phase, the Turkish player may elect to bring any or all of the
feudal corps up to full strength by removing them from any location
(even if eliminated and/or off the map) to any area in the province of their
origin (the province for which the feudal corps is named). This may not
be done if that province contains an unbesieged enemy corps, if it is
controlled by another major power or if the feudal corps in question is
besieged.
FAQ 10.1.3.1: An unbesieged garrison in the province's
capital would prevent the levy of that province's feudal
corps.
Aclaración 10.1.3.1: Los cuerpos feudales no pueden mover
el turno que se colocan pero la fase de leva ocurre en
diciembre, por tanto un cuerpo feudal reconstruido en la
fase de leva puede mover normalmente en el turno de
enero.
10.1.3.2 STANDING DOWN FEUDAL CORPS: During the year the
Turkish major power may "stand down" (ie., remove from the map) any
or all feudal corps (feudal infantry and feudal cavalry) during Turkey's
Land Movement Step without altering their army factor strengths. A
feudal corps may not stand down if besieged.
FAQ 10.1.3.2: A Turkish leader when all corps with which he is
stacked are feudal and all stand down are removed from the
map and may be returned during any later reinforcement
step.
10.1.3.3 RETURNING FEUDAL CORPS THAT STAND DOWN:
Any feudal corps that stands down may be placed back on the map during
any later Turkish Land Movement Step.
FAQ 10.1.3.3 OFFICIAL ANSWER FROM TAHGC: Feudal corps
don´t pay for supply or forage the same turn they stand up.
10.1.3.3.1: A feudal corps that stands down may only be placed back on
the map in its home province if that home province does not contain an
unbesieged enemy corps or is not controlled by another major power.
HR 10.1.3.3.1a Expl: El turco no puede poner un cuerpo
nuevo si la capital tiene tropas sin asediar o hay cuerpos
enemigos en la provincia. Podrá poner cuerpos nuevos
aunque Constantinopla esté asediada o controlada por
enemigos (aunque en este caso no podrá, lógicamente,
colocar los cuerpos anatolios)
HR 10.1.3.3.1b: Un cuerpo prisionero podrá ser reconstruido
en la leva de diciembre, pero todos los factores feudales
prisioneros en diciembre desaparecen en enero.
10.1.3.3.2: A corps may not move on the same Turn it is placed back on
the map.
10.1.3.4 USING FEUDAL CORPS: Feudal corps perform like other
corps except that they may neither detach, exchange, or absorb army
factors.
10.1.3.5 FEUDAL CORPS PROVINCES: The Crimean, Podolian and
Transylvanian feudal corps are available only if the province of the same
name is ceded to Turkey. Feudal corps from any provinces ceded by
Turkey to other major powers are lost while ceded-Turkey cannot use the
feudal corps nor can it be used by the major power to which the province
was ceded.
10.1.3.6 FEUDAL CORPS MAINTENANCE: Maintenance must be
paid only for feudal corps actually on the map during a Money and
Manpower Expenditure Step of an Economic Phase. Feudal corps not
then on the map, even if placed during the following three months, do not
have to be purchased.
10.1.4 AUSTRIAN INSURRECTION CORPS: The Austrian major
power has two insurrection corps available.
FAQ 10.1.4: If the Austrian places his insurrection corps in an
area containing corps of two different nations, both of which
are at war with Austria and with each other, the moving
26
corps (which triggered placement of the insurrection
corps) must fight all enemy corps in the area.
10.1.4.1 PLACING INSURRECTION CORPS: Immediately after an
enemy corps, cossack or freikorps has entered certain Austrian border
provinces, the triggers the possible placement of the insurrection corps
and the Austrian player may (if desired) place on-map either or both
insurrection corps anywhere within that province, at their current
strength. These border provinces are Illyria, Military Border,
Transylvania and Hungary. These border provinces are not eligible for
insurrection corps activation if the province is currently ceded.
10.1.4.1.1: If the corps are placed in the area containing the enemy
corps, that enemy corps (but not cossack or freikorps) would have to
cease its movement.
10.1.4.1.2: Insurrection corps need not be placed at the first opportunity
and so could cut supply chains if corps, cossacks or freikorps later
activate their placement by crossing a border into an eligible Austrian
border province.
10.1.4.1.3: Insurrection corps may only move within these four border
provinces, even if they are ceded (subject to access rules-see 10.3). If
compelled to retreat out of these border provinces they must
immediately stand down.
10.1.4.1.4: Insurrection corps may not move during the same Turn they
are placed on the map.
10.1.4.2 USING INSURRECTION CORPS: In other respects
insurrection corps are treated similarly to Turkish feudal corps-they
may not detach, absorb or exchange factors; they may stand down
during Austria's Land Movement Step unless besieged or as a result of
a retreat (see 10. 1.4.1.3). However, after standing down, they may not
be placed on the map except by using the activation procedure in 10.
1.4. 1.
FAQ 10.1.4.2: If an insurrection corps must retreat, and the
nearest depot is outside of it's allowed provinces, the corps
may choose to retreat to another depot within allowed
areas, and it´s not stood down.
10.1.4.3 * RAISING INSURRECTION CORPS FACTORS:
Insurrection corps are brought up to their full strength of 15 militia and
3 regular cavalry factors (even if off map), only during the Levy Step
of the December Economic Phase, if not then besieged, so long as any
one of the four border provinces is Austrian controlled and contains no
unbesieged enemy corps. Unlike Turkish feudal corps, the factors in the
insurrection corps are treated as normal Austrian militia and regular
cavalry factors (although they may not be detached).
10.1.4.4 * INSURRECTION CORPS MAINTENANCE:
Maintenance must be paid only for insurrection corps actually on the
map during a Money and Manpower Expenditure Step. Insurrection
corps not then on the map, even if placed during the following three
months, do not have to be purchased.
10.1.5 THE AUSTRIAN TYROLEAN REVOLT CORPS: If a
major power to which the Tyrol province has been ceded goes to war
with Austria, the Austrian player may, during any Austrian Land
Movement Step, place the Tyrol corps marker in any Tyrol area that
does not contain an enemy corps. The Tyrol corps may not be moved
during the same step in which it is placed on the map.
10.1.5.1 TYROL CORPS STRENGTH AND USE: The Tyrol corps
has an initial strength of eight Austrian regular infantry factors and,
once placed, can be used the same as any other Austrian corps,
detaching and absorbing army factors, getting infantry factors as
reinforcements, etc.
10.1.5.1.1 *: Maintenance must be paid for the corps during every
Money and Manpower Expenditure Step that it is on the map.
10.1.5.1.2: If the corps counter is removed from the map for any
reason, it cannot be placed on the map again for the remainder of the
war that triggered its placement.
10.1.5.2 TYROL CORPS REMOVAL *: When peace is made
between Austria and the major power that held (and may still hold)
Tyrol province, the Tyrol corps and any infantry factors it may hold at
that time is removed from the map. It may be introduced again, at its
full strength of 8 infantry factors, if there is another, later war that
again triggers its availability, etc.
[ 10.2 ] * MINOR COUNTRIES AND CEDED PROVINCES
CONTROL:
10.2.1 THE CONQUEST OF MINOR COUNTRIES: A minor
country is conquered by one month's unbesieged occupation of its
capital. The old control flag is changed for a conquered control flag of
the new controlling Major Power to show the new control during the
Conquest Step.
10.2.1.1: When a minor country is conquered by a major power, the
minor country's surviving land forces (except for Poland-see 11.1.3.3)
are considered to be eliminated and removed from the map. Minor
country fleets are removed, but remain at their current ship strength and
the fleet and ships are available as soon as that minor country again
becomes a minor Free State. While off-map, no maintenance is paid and
factors and ships may not be added.
10.2.1.2: A minor country conquest gains the conqueror one political
point per district (see 10.4) and costs the major power from which the
country was conquered one political point per district. Record on the POI-
ITICAI- STATUS DISPI-AY on the Status Card.
10.2.1.3: If a major power is not at war with another major power when a
minor country it has been selected to run captures army factors of that
other major power, those army factors must be returned immediately
when the minor country is conquered or the war lapses (see 4.4.6. 1).
10.2.2 CONQUERING CEDED PROVINCES: A major power may
conquer a ceded province (even if not originally owned by that major
power) exactly as if it were a minor country, unless the original owner
controls it again, in which case it again becomes an unceded province.
An unceded province may never be conquered. A major power may cede
provinces only as part of a formal (conditional or unconditional) peace
(see peace terms B.7 and C.4). Conquest of a ceded province does not
gain or lose political points.
[ 10.3 ] * FORCES IN OTHER COUNTRIES-ACCESS:
10.3.1 ACCESS: "Access" is one country permitting another country's
forces to operate in the first country's territory. There may be limitations
on this access.
FAQ 10.3: If a major power captures the port of another major
power and garrisons it, can´t allow it a third major power's
fleet to enter that port if the third major power is not at war
with the power whose port was captured.
10.3.1.1 MINOR COUNTRY ACCESS: Any major power may move
forces and trace supply through a neutral minor country. A major power
may not also build depots and/or occupy cities in a minor country unless
that major power is at war with or controls that minor country.
10.3.1.2 MAJOR POWER ACCESS: A major power may only move
through another major power's territory with that major power's
permission (called "voluntary access") or, without permission, if at war
with that major power or if peace condition C.5 applies.
10.3.1.2.1 General Access Rules: Once inside another's province or
controlled minor country, the voluntary access permission to be there may
not be rescinded (unless war between the major power's negates the
agreements).
10.3.1.2.1.1: Other corps or forces may be denied entry, but those
already there must be allowed to move, detach garrisons and place
depots as desired within any conditions already set.
10.3.1.2.1.2: Forces may not be granted voluntary access to move
through a major power's territory and then denied permission to
return by the same route and under the same conditions.
10.3.1.2.1.3: Neutral forces that previously had access in territory
that has changed control (i.e., due to reconquest or ceding) can be
given voluntary access under any new conditions granted by the
new controlling major power (unconditional access MUST be
given if peace condition C.5 applies between the involved major
powers). If no access is given or available, the neutral forces must
be handled as with force repatriation (see 4.4.6.2 and/or option
12.4).Gen 23/4
10.3.1.2.2 Voluntary Access Limitations: Voluntary access permission
might be limited by specifying only certain provinces through which
movement is permitted. "Conditional access" is also possible (eg., access
only if at war with a particular country, etc.). This is up to the players,
who may wish to put the conditions in writing. The player having access
must obey the conditions set. The player through whose territory access is
desired may set any conditions (eg., whether the moving major power can
leave garrisons, build depots, payment for the privilege, etc.).
OR 12.8 ALLIED VOLUNTARY ACCESS: Amend the rules in
10.3.1.2.2 to state that voluntary access may be granted only
to an ally.
10.3.1.2.3 Unconditional Access: Access gained as a peace condition
(see C.S on the VICTORY CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card) is
"unconditional access" and no restrictions other than those in peace
condition C.5 can be imposed.
10.3.2 CITY OCCUPATION: The nationality of a city garrison
determines who controls the city for combat purposes, regardless of the
major power formally controlling the province or minor country in which
the city is located. For example, a Russian garrison in a French port city
allows the Russian player to determine if the port's harbourdefences are
used against attacking fleets.
HR 10.3.2 Expl: Esto no permite al que controla la ciudad dar
paso a quien quiera (por ejemplo a una flota de una tercera
nacion), sólo es a efectos de combate, tal como se
especifica.
27
10.3.2.1: If a city has a garrison consisting of army factors from more
than one major power, control is with the major power formally
controlling the province or minor country. If no army factors of the
major power formally controlling the province are present, control for
combat purposes can be decided by mutual agreement among the
players with army factors present or, if agreement is impossible, by
competitive die rolls with no modifiers.If garrisons in the same city
suddenly find themselves at war due to a declaration of war,
IMMEDIATELY determine city control by trivial combat between the
hostile garrison forces. Gen 27/2
HR 10.3.2.1: El perdedor debe rendirse con los factores que
le queden y la ciudad controlada por el vencedor en
exclusiva. Las tropas neutrales no participan en el
combate y pueden permanecer en la ciudad.
10.3.2.2: If there is no garrison, the city is controlled by major power
or neutral minor country which controls the territory in which the city
is located-port cities without garrisons may not use their
harbourdefences.
10.3.3 NEUTRAL GARRISONS IN ENEMY TERRITORY:
Neutral garrisons or portions of garrisons (army factors belonging to a
major power not at war with any of the besieging corps) in a city
belonging to an enemy of a besieging corps must surrender as soon as a
siege of the city is announced. These surrendered army factors and
corps are automatically "exchanged" and automatically returned to the
map as reinforcements during the surrendered forces next Army
Reinforcement Step.
10.3.4 FORCIBLE ACCESS:If a major power is denied voluntary
access or denied desired access conditions, its land forces may still be
moved into or through desired areas by using "forcible access," as
follows:
10.3.4.1: Forcible access operates under the same restrictions as access
through neutral minor countries (see 10.3.1.1).
HR 10.3.4.1 Aclaración: Tropas haciendo acceso forzado
no pueden crear depots ni destacar factores en
guarnición.
10.3.4.2: A phasing major power loses one political point per Turn for
EACH major power's territories in which forcible access is used. For
example, during a Turn, French counters are moved through some
Bavarian and Saxon areas using forcible access. France loses one
political points if both these minor countries are controlled by Prussia,
but loses two political points if Bavaria is Austrian-controlled and
Saxony is Prussian-controlled.
10.3.4.3: The major power controlling territory in which forcible access
occurs may, if desired, IMMEDIATELY declare war and lose the
requisite political points for EACH separate declaration on any or all of
the major powers using forcible access in its territory, unless prevented
by limitation in 4.2.2.1. This chance to declare war is repeated each
time a counter using forcible access is moved. If war is declared, allies
may be called as in 4.3.Gen 23/4
ER: Add to the POLITICAL POINTS CHART: -1: Per major
power per Turn using forcible access (10.3.4) and -1 per
major power per turn in the first turn of forcible access (not
for depot´s forcible access)
[12.4] PEACE TREATY LIMITED ACCESS: This option
supersedes the force repatriation rules in 4.4.6.2 and forces
are not repatriated when peace is made. Instead, when
peace is made, the former enemies have a period of
automatic "limited access" to get their forces out of the
former enemy power's territory.
12.4.1 GARRISONS: By the end of three Land Phases after
peace is made, all garrison factors must be out of the other
major power's cities. In the case of a victor that chose
peace condition C.5, the requirement is reduced to getting
garrisons out of the capital cities during this period.
12.4.2 CORPS, FLEETS AND DEPOTS: By the end of six Land
Phases after peace is made, all corps, fleets, depots and
depot garrison factors must be out of the other major
power's territory. This requirement can be ignored by a
victor that chose peace condition C.5.
12.4.3 FAILURE TO LEAVE: Any forces that have not met the
requirements in 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 in the required times must
be demobilised and/or scuttled during the next
Reinforcement Phase (NOTE: rule 5.1.4.2 limitations on
scuttling may be ignored to meet this requirement) unless
the major power controlling the territory grants voluntary
access (see 10.3).
[ 10.4 ] * MINOR COUNTRIES WITH DISTRICTS: Some minor
countries are unusual in that they consist of two or more "districts " while
most minor countries have only one district.
10.4.1 COUNTRY COMPOSITION: These minor countries have a
"major" district (which gives its name to the whole minor power) and a
"secondary" district. The minor country Denmark consists of the major
district of Denmark (capital Copenhagen) and the secondary district of
Norway (capital Christiana). Similarly, there is the major district of
Sweden (capital Stockholm) and the secondary district of Finland (capital
Abo). Others can occur if optional rules 11.4 and 11.7 are used.
10.4.1.1 ADDITIONAL COUNTRIES WITH SECONDARY
DISTRICS: The following minor countries may have secondary
districts added to them. There are no PP gained for adding a
secondary district. These states remain in existence for purposes of
rule 10.4.3.2 until the primary district is conquered by another major
power.
10.4.1.1.1 Egypt-Palestine: If the Ottoman Empire does not exist,
Palestine may be added to Egypt as a secondary district. The
subsequent creation of the Ottoman Empire by another power does
not dissolve Egypt-Palestine. DB, MLB & JJ
10.4.1.1.2 Sweden-Norway: Norway can be made a secondary district
of Sweden. This can be done regardless of whether Finland is also a
secondary district of Sweden. Norway cannot be transferred to either
Sweden or Denmark if it is presently a secondary district of the other.
DB & JJ
10.4.1.1.3 Tripolitania-Cyrenaica: Cyrenaica may be a secondary
district of Tripolitania. The Tripolitania-Cyrenaica multi-district minor
(called Libya)exists at the start of the 1792 and 1805 campaigns. Once it
is dissolved it may not be recreated. DB & JJ
10.4.2 DECLARATIONS OF WAR: Major Powers may not separately
declare war on a neutral secondary district while it is still part of the
neutral combined minor country. For example, a declaration of war on
Sweden is also considered a declaration of war on Finland (unless
Finland has already been conquered). The cost in political points to
declare war on neutral minor countries with more than one district is one
political point per district.
10.4.3 CONTROL: Whoever is given control of, or conquers, the major
district of one of these minor countries is also automatically given control
of, or conquers, the secondary district with no need to independently
conquer the. secondary district capital.
10.4.3.1: The control of a secondary district is not given to the controller
of the major district if a secondary district is already controlled by a
different major power.
10.4.3.2: It is possible for one major power to conquer a secondary
district (by controlling its capital) while another major power controls the
major district For example, one major power can conquer Norway, by
controlling Christiana while another major power conquers Denmark
(the district) by controlling Copenhagen. When this happens, Sweden is
considered a separate minor country from Finland, Denmark is
considered a separate minor country from Norway, etc. until a secondary
district satisfies the conditions of returning to neutrality (eg., the
controlling major power is in the Fiasco Zone of the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY-see 10. 5. 2). The secondary district does not in this
case revert to neutrality but immediately reverts to the control of the
major power controlling the major district or (if also neutral) to the
control of the major district to again form a multi-district minor country.
For example, Norway reverts to the control of the major power
controlling Denmark (as part of the controlled-Danish Free State), or, if
Denmark is also neutral, Norway would again become a part of
combined neutral Denmark minor country
10.4.4 CORPS AND FLEETS: The major power controlling the major
districts of these minor countries controls their corps and fleets. For
example, Finland and Norway have no corps and fleets and, when
separate, these secondary districts must be treated as conquered minor
countries. EXCEPTION: see option 11.7 for Naples and Sicily, if used.
When a secondary district is a part of its combined minor Free State its
manpower and money values can be used to purchase that minor Free
State's ships and army factors. For example, when Norway is a province
of Denmark its manpower and money values (all doubled-see 8.2.3) can
be used to purchase Danish ships and army factors.
[ 10.5 ] THE POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY: Each major power has
an initial starting position on this Status Card display as given in the
campaign games. That position is altered by winning or losing combats,
by gaining formal allies or breaking alliances, being surrendered to or
surrendering, declaring war upon a country, becoming bankrupt,
economic manipulation, by conquering a minor country or having one
conquered from you or by being selected to run it, etc. See the
POLITICAL POINTS CHART on the back of this rulebook and the
28
appropriate rules sections to find the reasons for and the extent of these
adjustments.
10.5.1 ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: When political points are
adjusted, all positive adjustments require the major power's political
status marker to be moved that number of spaces along the display
from left to right (the zone lines are contiguous eg., the right hand end
of the Neutral Zone joins the left hand end of the Dominant Zone).
Similarly, negative adjustments require the marker to be moved from
right to left along the display. A major power's political status marker
cannot be adjusted off either end of the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY, but remains at the end until adjusted away by gains or
losses. If a major power would have been forced off the lower end of
the display, then that major power must sue for peace during the
nextPeace Step with every major power at war with it (only a
conditional surrender has to be accepted).
10.5.2 LOCATED IN THE INSTABILITY/FIASCO ZONES:
When a Money and Manpower Collection Step of an Economic Phase
finds a major power's political status marker in a box in the Instability
or Fiasco Zones, a die may have to be rolled by that major power's
controlling player. No die roll is necessary if there is no economic loss
number in the box. If the roll is not greater than the economic loss
number found in the political status marker's box then only half the
available major power money and manpower values are collected by
that major power (rounding fractions up) and its minor Free States
collect only their printed values, not the normal doubled amounts. The
value of trade is unaffected. Other effects are:
10.5.2.1 BEING IN THE INSTABILITY ZONE: If a major power
commences the Minor Country Control Step of a Political Phase in the
Instability Zone of the display, all of the conquered minor countries of
that major power become neutral, unless there is an unbesieged corps
or a 5 infantry garrison JJof that major power in the minor country.
EXCEPTIONS: see options 11.2.3.2, 11.5.3.2 and 11.6.3.2.
HR10.5.2.1 Aclaración Si el cuerpo fuera un cuerpo en
prestamo, se mira el propietario, y NO el usuario.
10.5.2.2 BEING IN THE FIASCO ZONE: If a major power
commences a Minor Country Control Step in the Fiasco Zone all
controlled minor countries of that major power will become neutral
regardless of occupation attempts, including minor Free States.
10.5.2.3 CHANGING CONTROL: If an enemy corps is located in the
minor country and/or an enemy garrison is in the minor country at these
times, the minor country does not become neutral but is transferred to
the control of that enemy major power instead (resolve control by
competitive die rolls -as in 8.7.4 if two or more different enemy major
power forces occupy the minor country). Free States whose control is
transferred become conquered minor countries. When a minor Free
State becomes neutral or its control changes, all of its forces are
removed, but a note is kept of its current fleet strength (which will
become available if the minor country later again becomes a Free
State).Garrison factors (NOT corps, freikorps, or cossacks in garrison)
of the former controlling major power MUST be immediately removed
from the minor country using the honors of war rules (see 7.5.4.1.2.3.1-
-in this case, it can be done by Spanish and Turkish garrisons).Gen
25/4
HR 10.5.3.2: Cuando un Minor Country revierte a neutral
TODAS las guarniciones deben ser movidas según el
procedimiento de honores de guerra, no solo las del Major
Power controlador. Bajo ninguna circuntancia puede
haber una guarnición en un menor neutral.
10.5.2.4 POLITICAL POINTS FOR CHANGED CONTROL: No
political points are lost when a major power loses control of minor
countries in this way. However, all major powers who have the control
of a minor country (regardless of the number of districts) transferred to
them gain a political point.
10.5.3 STATUS MODIFIERS: The status modifiers at the side of the
POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY are the die roll modifiers used (in
addition to any others) when dicing to determine who will, run a
particular neutral minor country that has been attacked (see 4.6.2 and
4.6.3) or when using the Uncontrolled Major Power (UMP) rules (see
14.3). The status modifiers number next to the zone line a major
power's political status marker occupies is used.
[ 10.6 ] LEADERS AND COMMANDERS: The leaders in the game
represent historical personalities who held major commands during the
Napoleonic Wars. All leaders, except NELSON, must always be
stacked with a corps of that major power or controlled minor power
when on the map. NELSON must always be stacked with a fleet(s) of
the British major power or British-controlled minor country. A player
may not voluntarily cause his leader to become unstacked. Where a
leader becomes unstacked due to foraging losses or disbanding, the
leader is removed from the board and is returned in any later Army
Reinforcement Step (Naval Reinforcement Step for NELSON). Leaders
do not need supply and, except for NELSON, may be transported on
fleets only if stacked with a corps.
10.6.1 LEADERS WHO ARE COMMANDERS: The leader in charge
of a force is called the "commander." If no leader is present, the best
corps intrinsic ratings (there intrinsic ratings reflect the abilities of the
corps commanders) of the corps present is used. Fleets have no intrinsic
ratings. These intrinsic strategic and tactical ratings can be found on the
reverse of the counters and minor countries' intrinsic ratings are those of
their controlling major power. If no corps is present, garrisons, cossacks
and guerrillas have an intrinsic tactical and strategic rating of zero. Note
that Prussian strategic ratings differ in 1805-1809 from 1810 and later.
10.6.1.1 CHOOSING OR DETERMINING A COMMANDER: If
there is only one leader present on a side at a combat, that leader
automatically commands. Otherwise, the commander is determined as
follows:
10.6.1.1.1 Commanders For Allied Armies: If several leaders are
present on the same side at a combat then the leader commanding the
whole army must be a leader of the major power with the greatest number
of corps present. If there are equal greatest numbers, the major power
providing the leader may be chosen by the controlling players by mutual
agreement from among those major powers or by competitive unmodified
die rolls.
10.6.1.1.2 Commanders Among Other Leaders: If there are several
leaders from the one major power, the leader with the highest seniority
rating is chosen. "A" is a senior rating to "B" is a senior rating to "C" is a
senior rating to "D" If there is more than one leader of the same highest
seniority rating then the controlling player may choose which leader to
use.
10.6.1.1.3 Reinforcing Leaders Taking Command: If a reinforcing
leader arrives during a combat, it takes command only if from the same
major power as the present commander and has a higher seniority rating
or if there is currently no leader.
10.6.1.2 COMMANDER USES: The commander chosen will be used
for all purposes in combats and only that leader's strategic and tactical
ratings will be used.
10.6.1.2.1 Tactical Maximum Ratings: Each leader has a "tactical
maximum rating." If commanding more corps than this rating, the leader's
tactical rating is reduced by -1, and if commanding more corps than twice
this rating the leader's tactical rating is reduced by -2. Regardless of the
number of corps commanded, the tactical rating can never be modified to
below zero. For example if Napoleon, with a tactical maximum rating of
6 and a tactical rating of 5 , commands seven to twelve corps, the tactical
rating is reduced from 5 to 4. If Napoleon commands thirteen or more
corps, the tactical rating is reduced from 5 to 3. Corps included in an
outflanking force are counted for determining a commander's tactical
rating.
10.6.1.2.2 Tactical Ratings Comparisons: The opposing commanders'
ratings (which may be modified if tactical maximum ratings are
exceeded) are compared on the COMMANDER CHART on the Game
Card, which gives a 0, +1 or -1 die roll modifier for attacker and defender
in a combat round. The tactical rating is calculated round by round
(ie.,reinforcements may change the commanders' tactical ratings from
round to round).
10.6.1.3 COMMANDERS FOR PUIRSUIT: For pursuits, the combat
commander is not necessarily the leader used. Any leader with a cavalry
leader symbol may be used to modify the pursuit (see 7.5.2.10.2) as long
as at least one factor of that leader's nationality is pursuing.
10.6.2 LEADER MOVEMENT: Leaders may move by spending their
entire movement with a corps (fleet for NELSON) with which they began
the Land or Naval Movement Step. Alternatively, a leader may be retired
from the map during the appropriate Reinforcement Step (unless in a
besieged city-a besieged port city must also be blockaded to prevent a
leader's retirement) and then placed with any unbesieged corps (fleet for
NELSON) of its major power in any later appropriate Reinforcement
Step.
10.6.3 LEADER CAPTURE: When all factors on a side or in a pinning
force with which a leader is present are eliminated by combat that leader
is captured by any major power on the opposing side of the owning
player's choice. If a leader becomes unstacked through losses incurred
during besieged supply, the leader is captured by the besieging major
power of the owning player's choice. Captured leaders must be returned
as an effect of peace (see 4.4.6.1) and may be returned earlier at the
option of the capturing player, the leader being placed on the board in
any later appropriate Reinforcement Steps.
FAQ 10.6.3: If a leader accompanies a force attempting to
relieve a siege, and his force is eliminated in combat, but
the besieged force survives, he is captured by the
besieging side.
10.6.4 * RETURNING LEADERS: When a leader is removed from
the game under peace condition C. 6, that leader can only be returned
to the game in one of two ways:
10.6.4.1: If the removed leader's major power ever occupies the Fiasco
Zone on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card at the
end of the Manipulation Step of an Economic Phase, the leader is
eligible to be returned to the map for normal use during the next or any
later Reinforcement Phase.
10.6.4.2: If the major power is not in the Fiasco Zone at the end of a
Manipulation Step (see 8.4.3), the controlling player may, if desired,
drop a number of political points equal to the total of the removed
leader's strategic plus tactical ratings numbers (EXCEPTION: the
NELSON leader, with no ratings numbers, can be returned for a drop of
1 0 political points). If this is done, the leader is eligible to be returned
to the map for normal use during the next or any later Reinforcement
Phase.
HR 10.6.4.2 Expl: Los líderes usan sus valores actuales, no
los impresos en la ficha, ver 11.8.2.5 y 12.3.7.3. P.e:
Napoleón en 1813 usaría una reducción de 8PPs, no de
10PPs.
10.6.5 THE BERNADOTTE LEADER: The "BERNADOTTE"
leader counter has two sides and is available as a French leader (use the
French blue side of the counter) from 1805 to the August, 1810 Turn.
At the start of the Army Reinforcement Step of the August, 1810 Turn,
the French player must give this leader counter (even if besieged) tothe
major power controlling Sweden (use the gray side of the counter from
now on). The major power controlling Sweden may now place the
counter on the map during this or any later Land Reinforcement Step.
The BERNADOTTE leader counter is now a Swedish leader and can
be used with any of the corps of the major power controlling Sweden
(which could change if control of Sweden changes).
10.6.5.1: If BERNADOTTE was "killed" or France went into civil
disorder prior to August, 1810, the BERNADOTTE leader counter
does not become a Swedish leader.
10.6.5.2: If Sweden is or becomes neutral after BERNADOTTE
becomes a Swedish leader, the BERNADOTTE leader is kept off the
map and can be placed when the rest of the Swedish forces are placed.
[ 10.7 ] * DARDANELLES CONTROL: Normally, the major power
controlling Constantinople controls access through the Dardanelles sea
area (see 6.2.1.3 and 8.2.1.2.1.3 for results of control), but if
Constantinople is besieged, no one controls access through the
Dardanelles. Note that this makes it possible for any major powers to
pass through the Dardanelles and also makes it possible for enemy
fleets to enter the area to reach the Constantinople blockade box.
[ 10.8 ] SETTLING DISPUTES: Although it is pointed out in
numerous places throughout the rules that major powers with
conflicting and equal claims may settle their disputes through mutual
agreement or through competitive die, rolls (sometimes modified),
other cases can arise that are not mentioned elsewhere. In all these
cases, if a mutual agreement cannot be reached, let unmodified
competitive die rolls decide. for example, if leaders or army factors are
captured by mixed forces controlled by more than one major power, the
control over the "prisoners" can be decided by mutual agreement or, if
agreement cannot be reached, by competitive die rolls (roll for each
factor or leader over which there is a disagreement).

OPTIONAL RULES
The optional rules are just that-optional-and may be used or not used in any combinations desired by the players of the game.
Their use is suggested only for experienced players of the game.

11.0 NEW POLITICAL COMBINATIONS

The Napoleonic Wars saw many changes in the map of Europe, some These options permit players to recreate some of these changes by
proving to be only temporary and others proving to be more permanent. arranging new combinations of minor countries and/or ceded provinces

29
to form new "super" minor Free States and also permit the possibility that
any major power can become dominant in Europe. In all cases, these
changes are declared by the controlling player during the New Political
Combinations Step of an Economic Phase (covers 11.l - 11 6 and 11.8).
FAQ 11.0a: A Major Power can´t form a required new political
combination and declare dominance in the same turn,
because 11.8.1 states that a power must "reach" the New
Political Combinations Step in control of the territories
needed for dominance.
[ 11.1 ] POLAND (GRAND DUCHY OF WARSAW): Poland, once
one of Europe's great powers, had been dissolved, carved up and divided
into separate provinces by Austria, Prussia and Russia in the 1790s. The
Poles hoped to regain their independence and loyally supported Napoleon
after he created the "Grand Duchy of Warsaw."
11.1.1 CREATING POLAND: If any (the Poles will accept anyone's
help) major power controls two or more possible Polish (marked "P" next
to the province names on the map) provinces including Masovia and no
other major power holds the Polish loyalty marker, then the Polish Free
State may be declared by that major power with Warsaw as the Polish
Free State capital.
11.1.1.1 POLISH PROVINCES: The exact Polish ("P") provinces
making up the Polish Free State must be announced when the creation is
declared. In the cases of Austria, Prussia or Russia, any of their own
home nation provinces included as part of Poland are then considered to
be ceded provinces that are part of Poland. Once established, a controlling
major power may, if desired, add additional controlled "P" provinces to
Poland during later New Political Combinations Steps. East and/or West
Galicia may be part of a Russian-controlled Poland. Gen 25/4
11.1.1.2 MARKING CONTROL: The controlling major power places
one of its own Free State flags and the "Poland" political marker
anywhere in Poland and takes and holds the Polish loyalty marker to
indicate Polish loyalty.
11.1.2 USING POLAND: Once created, Poland is a normal minor Free
State of whatever size and total money and manpower values has been
determined. The combined money and manpower values of its component
provinces are doubled in value (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) and
used for the usual purposes. Polish garrison infantry factors may be
placed anywhere within Polish territory.
11.1.3 CONQUERING THE POLISH FREE STATE: The Polish
minor Free State may only be conquered by the unbesieged occupation of
Warsaw for a month (as per 10.2), after which the occupying major
power places a conquered flag in each province that defines Poland and
the Poland political marker and the previous major power's state are
removed.
11.1.3.1. Once Poland is conquered, the provinces that were part of the
Polish Free State are now considered unceded provinces, if now
controlled by their home nation major power, or ceded provinces, if
controlled by another major power.
11.1.3.2: Polish provinces other than Masovia may be independently
conquered and treated as in 10.2.2. If a Polish Free State becomes neutral,
it is treated as a multi-district minor country (see 10.4-Masovia is the
major district) except that declarations of war and assuming control are
both worth only one political point, regardless of the number of
component provinces. With a neutral Poland, no one holds the Polish
loyalty marker.
11.1.3.3: If, when Poland is conquered, there are still remaining Polish
forces, Poland may not be declared a minor Free State by the new
conquering major power. If any Polish forces remain, they remain in the
control of the original controlling major power until all Polish army
factors are lost or any type of peace is made between the major power
that conquered Poland and the major power holding the Polish loyalty
marker, at which time the former controlling-major power relinquishes
control of the Polish loyalty marker. The conquering major power may
then, if desired, again declare Poland a minor Free State (see 11.1.1)
during any later New Political Combination Step.
11.1.4 CEDING POLAND: If Poland is ceded, either voluntarily, or as a
peace condition, it must be ceded as a unit. The controlling player may
not separate individual Polish provinces for individual ceding or other
purposes. When ceded, the Poland political marker, Polish loyalty
marker and any Polish forces are also ceded and the accompanying Free
State flag is changed to show the new controlling major power. If desired,
the new controlling player may choose to handle Poland as in 8.8.5,
changing it to conquered status, although, in this case, the component
provinces become ceded and/or unceded provinces, depending on the
controlling major power.
11.1.5 POLITICAL POINTS: Poland is worth 1 point to create or to
conquer (capture Warsaw). The loss of a controlled Poland costs 1
political point, whether to conquest or by ceding.
[ 11.2 ] THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: Italy had been divided numerous
small countries since the middle ages. Napoleon created the Kingdom of
30
Italy (actually encompassing only northern Italy) to solidify support
among the Italians.
11.2.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: The Kingdom of
Italy can be created only by Austria, France or Spain. The Kingdom of
Italy consists of the minor countries of Lombardy, RomagnaNot
papacyMU & MLBand Venetia and the province of Illyria. If Austria
creates the kingdom, Illyria province, although not actually ceded, is
then considered to be part of the Kingdom of Italy and its money and
manpower values are not counted for Austrian money and manpower.
If Austria, France or Spain controls all four of these, then the Kingdom
of Italy may be declared by the controlling major power.
11.2.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power Free
State flag and the "K. of Italy" political marker anywhere in the
kingdom.
11.2.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Kingdom of Italy
regains control of territory that could be part of the kingdom, this
territory must be added to the Kingdom of Italy during the next New
Political Combinations Step.
11.2.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: Once created, the
Kingdom of Italy is generally treated as a normal minor Free State. The
combined money and manpower of its component parts are doubled (as
in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value and used in any desired way
for the usual purposes. The combined money and manpower may be
used to purchase army and/or ship factors for the corps, garrisons or
fleets of either Lombardy or Venetia. Garrison factors from the
Kingdom of Italy may be placed anywhere within its territory. In
addition:
11.2.2.1: If France controls the Kingdom of Italy, the Lombardy and
Venetian corps have a movement allowance of 4. If this option is used,
these corps do not get a 4 movement allowance simply for being
French-controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom of Italy must be created
for their movement allowance to be increased.
11.2.2.2: When the Kingdom of Italy is created the controlling major
power gets the Venetia fleet counter and its current number of ships.
This fleet and ships are not available to the major power controlling
Venetia unless that major power also controls the Kingdom of Italy.
11.2.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: The
component parts of the Kingdom of Italy are still treated as separate
minor Free States and a ceded province for purposes of conquering it.
However, as long as the Kingdom of Italy's controlling major power
still controls at least one component minor country with corps, the
Kingdom of Italy still exists (consisting of whatever territory remains).
11.2.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
Kingdom of Italy goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered the kingdom
will cease to exist and will become separate parts (either neutral or
under control, as the case may be) again. If not otherwise controlled,
Illyria province returns to Austrian control or, if Austria no longer
exists, Illyria goes to the major power controlling Austria province. The
Kingdom of Italy political marker and the previous major power's Free
State flag are removed when the kingdom goes neutral or ceases to
exist and/or is ceded.
11.2.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor country
components in the Kingdom of Italy. Instead of the component minor
countries automatically going neutral during a Minor Country Control
Step, they only need to be checked during a New Political
Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone during a New Political
Combinations Step, one die is rolled for each of the component minor
countries. Failure to roll higher than the economic loss number means
that the component minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see
10.5.2.3); otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if
there is no economic loss number in the Fiasco, Zone box or for Illyria
province.
11.2.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF ITALY: If the Kingdom of
Italy's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace condition,
they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or a province. The
political marker is never ceded, only removed if the conditions for the
kingdom's existence end-if the kingdom is gone, then it must be
recreated as in 11.2.1 to exist again.
11.2.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Italy is worth one
political point to create. Individually gaining or losing parts of it
gain/cost the usual political points for conquering/losing minor
countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2).
[ 11.3 ] * THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: The numerous
small states of north western Germany were tempting prizes to the
major powers that vied for their control. Napoleon created the
Kingdom of Westphalia to consolidate his control in this area.
11.3.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: The
Kingdom of Westphalia can be created only by France or Prussia. The
Kingdom of Westphalia consists of the minor countries of Hanover and
Hesse and the province of Magdeburg, If Prussia creates the kingdom,
Magdeburg province, although not actually ceded, is then considered to
be part of the Kingdom of Westphalia and its money and manpower
values are not counted for Prussian money and manpower. If France or
Prussia controls all three of these, then the Kingdom of Westphalia may
be declared by the controlling major power.
11.3.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power Free
State flag and the "K. of Westphalia", political marker anywhere in the
kingdom.
11.3.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Kingdom of
Westphalia gains control of territory that could be part of the kingdom,
this territory must be added to the Kingdom of Westphalia during the next
New Political Combinations Step.
11.3.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: Once created,
the Kingdom of Westphalia is generally treated as a normal minor Free
State. The combined money and manpower of its component parts are
doubled in value (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) and used in any
desired manner for the usual purposes. In addition:
11.3.2.1: If France controls the Kingdom of Westphalia, the Hanover and
Hesse corps have a movement allowance of 4. If this option is used, these
corps do not get a 4 movement allowance simply for being French-
controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom of Westphalia must be created for
their movement allowance to be increased (NOTE: movement is also
increased if the Kingdom of Westphalia is not created, but Hanover
and/or Hesse are incorporated as part of the Confederation of the Rhine -
see 11.5.2.1).
11.3.2.2: The money from Magdeburg province can be used for any
purpose, but its manpower can be used only to purchaseHanoverian
infantry and cavalry factors.
11.3.2.3: Only Hessian infantry can be used as minor country garrisons
within Hesse. Only Hanoverian infantry can be used asminor country
garrisons within Hanover and Magdeburg.If Hanover is NOT part of the
Kingdom of Westphalia, Hanoverian army factors are not available for
use by the Kingdom of Westphalia. Gen 23/4
11.3.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: The
component parts of the Kingdom of Westphalia are still treated as
separate minor Free States and a ceded province for purposes of
conquering it. However, as long as the Kingdom of Westphalia's
controlling major power still controls at least one component minor
country with corps, the Kingdom of Westphalia still exists (consisting of
whatever territory remains)
11.3.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the Kingdom
of Westphalia goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered, the kingdom will
cease to exist and will become separate parts (either neutral or under
control, as the case may be) again. If not otherwise controlled,
Magdeburg province returns to Prussian control or, if Prussia no longer
exists, Magdeburg goes to the major power controlling Brandenburg
province. The Kingdom of Westphalia political marker and the previous
major power's Free State flag are removed when the kingdom goes
neutral or ceases to exist and/or is ceded.
11.3.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor country
components in the Kingdom of Westphalia. Instead of the component
minor countries automatically going neutral during a Minor Country
Control Step, they only need to be checked during a New Political
Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone during a New Political
Combinations Step, one die is rolled for each of the component minor
countries. Failure to roll higher than the economic, loss number means
that the component minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see
10.5.2.3); otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if
there is no economic loss number in the Fiasco Zone box or for
Magdeburg province.
11.3.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF WESTPHALIA: If the
Kingdom of Westphalia's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a
peace condition, they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or a
province. The political marker is never ceded, only removed if the
conditions for the kingdom's existence end-if the kingdom is gone, then it
must be recreated as in 11.3.1 to exist again.
11.3.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Westphalia is worth one
political point to, create. Individually gaining or losingof it gain/cost the
usual political points for conquering/losing parts minor
countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2).
[ 11.4 ] THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The King of Bavaria was an
ambitious fellow and Napoleon gave him the Tyrol province to cement
their relations. The Tyrolians detested their Bavarian overlords and all-in-
all this was one of Napoleon's least successful creations.
11.4.1 CREATING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The Kingdom of
Bavaria can be created by France or Prussia. The Kingdom of Bavaria
consists of the minor country of Bavaria and the province of Tyrol. If
France or Prussia controls both of these, then the Kingdom of Bavaria
may be declared by the controlling major power. Control is marked by
31
placing a controlling major power Free State flag and the "K. of
Bavaria" political marker anywhere in the kingdom.
11.4.2 USING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: Once created, the
Kingdom of Bavaria is generally treated as a normal minor Free State.
The combined money and manpower of its component parts are
doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value and used in any
desired way for the usual purposes. The combined money and
manpower may be used to purchase Bavarian army factors. Garrison
factors from the Kingdom of Bavaria may be placed anywhere within
Bavaria and/ or the Tyrol. In addition, if France controls the Kingdom
of Bavaria, the Bavarian corps has a movement allowance of 4. If this
option is used, this corps does not get a 4 movement allowance simply
for being French controlled (see 7.3. 1. 1)-the Kingdom of Bavaria
must be created for their movement allowance to be increased (NOTE:
movement is also increased if the Kingdom of Bavaria is not created,
but Bavaria is incorporated as part of the Confederation of the Rhine
see 11.5.2.1).
11.4.3 CONQUERING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: The
component parts of the Kingdom of Bavaria are treated much the same
(the difference being what Austria does with Tyrol province) as a
multi-district minor country (see.10.4) with the major district being
Bavaria (capital Munich) and the minor district being Tyrol (capital
Salzburg).
11.4.3.1: If the Tyrol is conquered separately by Austria, it becomes an
unceded province of Austria and if conquered by any other major
power that does not control Bavaria, it becomes a ceded province under
their control.
11.4.3.2: If Austria conquers the Kingdom of Bavaria by capturing
Munich. Tyrol is immediately reincorporated into Austria as an
unceded province, and the Kingdom of Bavaria ceases to exist (remove
the political marker) and if this is done by any other major power,
Tyrol becomes a ceded province and Bavaria becomes a conquered
minor country under that major power's control-the Kingdom of
Bavaria ceases to exist.
11.4.3.3: If the Kingdom of Bavaria goes neutral, the Kingdom of
Bavaria political marker remains on the map and is treated as a multi-
district neutral minor country for determining political points for
declaring war (see 4,2.1.2) and assuming control (see 4.6.3.1), but is
conquered as in 11.4.3.2.
11.4.3.4: The Kingdom of Bavaria political marker is removed
whenever Tyrol province is under different control than Bavaria's.
11.4.4 CEDING THE KINGDOM OF BAVARIA: If the Kingdom
of Bavaria's two districts are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace
condition, they are ceded together as one minor country, along with the
political marker. The controlling major power may not break up the
kingdom to cede individual districts or for other purposes.
EXCEPTION. If ceded to Austria, handle as in 11.4.3.2.
11.4.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Kingdom of Bavaria is worth one
political point to create and costs one political point to cede.
Individually gaining or losing parts of it gains/costs the usual political
points for conquering/losing minor countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2
and 10.2.2-ie., +1 political point to conquer Bavaria, political point to
have Bavaria conquered and no political points to separately conquer or
lose Tyrol province).
[ 11.5 ] * THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE: Napoleon
created the Confederation of the Rhine to further consolidate his
position in Germany. Austria, through their control of the Holy Roman
Empire had previously had the dominant position in Germany, but this
dominance had been slipping for centuries.
11.5.1 CREATING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE:
The Confederation of the Rhine can be created only by Austria, France
or Prussia. The Confederation of the Rhine consists of the minor
countries of Hanover and Hesse (which may, also be part of the
Kingdom of Westphalia), Baden, Bavaria, Saxon and Wurttemburg, all
of which have corps the minor countries Berg, Duchies, Kleves and
Mecklenburg, which do not have corps, and the provinces of
Magdeburg (which may also be part of the Kingdom of Westphalia)
and Tyrol (which may also be part of the Kingdom of Bavaria). If
Austria or Prussia creates the confederation, their own provinces (Tyrol
for Austria, Magdeburg for Prussia), although not actually ceded, are
considered to be part of the Confederation of the Rhine and no longer
provide money and manpower for the home nation. If Austria, France
or Prussia controls at least five of the six minor countries with corps
plus any three other minor countries and/or provinces (all possible
minor countries and/or provinces that the major power controls must be
incorporated), then the Confederation of the Rhine may be declared by
the controlling major power.
11.5.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power Free
State flag and the "C. of the Rhine" political marker anywhere in the
confederation.
11.5.1.2: In order for Austria to create the Confederation of the Rhine (or,
"Holy Roman Empire" in this case), peace condition C.8 may never have
been applied against Austria, or, if it was applied, it must have been
cancelled by Austria applying peace condition C. 9 to any and all major
powers that had previously applied C.8 against Austria.
11.5.1.3: In order for France or Prussia to create the Confederation of the
Rhine, at least one major power must have applied peace condition C.8
against Austria land not had this cancelled by Austria using peace
condition C. 9 against them. NOTE: Historically, the creation of the
Confederation of the Rhine somewhat predated the official end of the
Holy Roman Empire, but the French victories at Ulm and Austerlitz had
made Austria's bowing to Napoleon's demands on this matter inevitable.
11.5.1.4: Whenever the major power controlling the Confederation of the
Rhine gains control of territory that could be part of the Confederation of
the Rhine, -this territory must be added to the Confederation of the Rhine
during the next, New Political Combinations Step.
11.5.1.5: The Confederation of the Rhine can never be created by one
major power, even if all other requirements can be met, if the
Confederation of the Rhine political marker is still on the map with
another major power's Free State flag.
11.5.2 USING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE: Once
created, the Confederation of the Rhine is generally treated as a normal
minor Free State. The money and manpower of its component parts are
doubled in value and used for the usual purposes. In addition:
11.5.2.1: If France controls the Confederation of the Rhine, the Baden,
Bavaria, Hanover, Hesse, Saxony and Wurttemburg corps have a
movement allowance of 4. If this option is used, these corps do not get a 4
movement allowance simply for being French-controlled (see 7.3.1.1)-the
Confederation of the Rhine must be created for their movement
allowance to be increased. EXCEPTIONS: If the Confederation of the
Rhine is not created, some corps may still get a 4 movement allowance if
French controlled if options 11.3.2.1 and 11.4.2 apply.
11.5.2.2: The money from all minor countries and provinces can be used
for any purpose, but manpower from minor countries and
provinces without corps can be used only to purchase Hanoverian
infantry and cavalry factors.
11.5.2.3: Only infantry of the appropriate minor country can be used as
minor country garrisons within the minor countries with corps. Only
Hanoverian infantry can be used as minor country garrisons within
Hanover and the minor countries and provinces without corps. NOTE:
Hanoverian and Bavarian infantry have the same morale value and,
therefore, any "Hanoverian" infantry factors placed as garrison in Tyrol
province are considered to be Bavarian infantry if the Kingdom of
Bavaria is in existence.If Hanover and/or Bavaria are NOT part of the
Confederation of the Rhine, their army factors are not available for use by
the Confederation of the Rhine.Gen 23/4
11.5.3 CONQUERING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE:
The component parts of the Confederation of the Rhine are still treated as
separate minor Free States and ceded provinces for purposes of
conquering it. However, as long as the Confederation of the Rhine's
controlling major power still controls at least one component minor
country with corps, the Confederation of the Rhine still exists (consisting
of whatever territory remains).
11.5.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the
confederation goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered, the confederation
will cease to exist and become separate parts (either neutral or controlled,
as the case may be) again. If not otherwise controlled and the Kingdom of
Westphalia is not also in existence, Magdeburg province returns to
Prussian control or, if Prussia no longer exists, to the major power
controlling Brandenburg province. If not otherwise controlled and the
Kingdom of Bavaria is not also in existence, Tyrol province returns to
Austrian control or, if Austria no longer exists , to the major power
controlling Austria province. The Confederation of the Rhine political
marker and the previous major power's Free State flag are removed when
the confederation goes neutral or ceases to exist or and/or is ceded.
11.5.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor country
components in the Confederation of the Rhine. Instead of the component
minor countries automatically going neutral during a Minor Country
Control Step, they only need to be checked during a New Political
Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone during a New Political
Combinations Step, one die is rolled for each of the component minor
countries. Failure to roll higher than the economic loss number means
that the component minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see
10.5.2.3); otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if
there is no economic loss number in The Fiasco Zone box or for
Magdeburg or Tyrol provinces.
11.5.4 CEDING THE CONFEDERATION OF THE RHINE: If the
Confederation of the Rhine's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as
a peace condition, they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or
provinces. The political marker is never ceded, only removed if the
32
conditions for the confederation's existence end-if the confederation is
gone, then it must be recreated as in 11.4.1 to exist again.
11.5.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Confederation of the Rhine is
worth two political points to create. Individually gaining or losing parts
of it gain/cost the usual political points for conquering/losing minor
countries/provinces (see 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.2).
[ 11.6 ] * THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: Definitely weakened, but not
quite yet the "sick man of Europe" it would become later in the century,
the Turks definitely dreamed of regaining control of their Islamic North
African empire (although most of these nations wore still nominally
under Turkish control, the real power was not there). France, Great
Britain and Spain, in a different manner, also had ambitions in North
Africa (they would definitely have called it by a different name, but
"Ottoman Empire" is used for convenience).
11.6.1 CREATING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: The Ottoman
Empire can be created only by France, Great Britain, Spain or Turkey.
The Ottoman Empire consists of the, minor countries of Algeria,
Cyrenica, Egypt, Morocco, Palestine, Syria, Tripolitania and Tunisia. If
France, Great Britain, Spain or Turkey controls any six of these (all
possible minor countries that the major power controls must be
incorporated), then the Ottoman Empire may be declared by the
controlling major power.
11.6.1.1: Control is marked by placing a controlling major power Free
State flag and the "Ottoman Empire" political marker anywhere in the
area.
11.6.1.2: Whenever the major power controlling the Ottoman Empire
gains control of territory that could be part of the empire, this territory
must be added to the Ottoman Empire during the next New Political
Combinations Step.
11.6.1.3: The Ottoman Empire can never be created by one major
power, even if all other requirements can be met, if the Ottoman
Empire political marker is still on the map with another major power's
Free State flag.
11.6.2 USING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: Once created, the
Ottoman Empire is generally treated as a normal minor Free State. The
combined money and manpower of its component parts are doubled (as
in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value and used in any desired way
for the usual purposes. The combined money and manpower may be
used to purchase army factors for the corps or garrisons of any of the
component minor countries with corps. Garrison factors from the
Ottoman Empire may be placed anywhere within its territory. In
addition, there are extra advantages for a Turkish-controlled Ottoman
Empire, as follows:
11.6.2.1 IMPROVED OTTOMAN MORALE: If Turkey controls the
Ottoman Empire, the morale value of every Ottoman Empire corps
becomes 2.0for infantry and 3.0 for cavalry.
11.6.2.2 "TRIBUTE": If Turkey controls the Ottoman Empire, at the
conclusion of all December Money and Manpower Expenditure Steps,
any unspent Ottoman Empire money points are added as "tribute" to
Turkey's remaining money points (see 8.5.7) instead of being lost as in
8.5.5.
11.6.3 CONQUERING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: The component
parts of the Ottoman Empire are still treated as separate minor Free
States for purposes of conquering it. However, as long as the Ottoman
Empire's controlling major power still controls at least one component
minor country with corps, the Ottoman Empire still exists (consisting
of whatever territory remains).
11.6.3.1: If the last component minor country with corps of the empire
goes neutral, is ceded or is conquered the empire will cease to exist and
become separate parts (either neutral or controlled, as the case may be)
again. The Ottoman Empire political marker and the previous major
power's Free State flag are removed when the kingdom goes neutral or
ceases to exist and/or is ceded.
11.6.3.2: Rule 10.5.2.2 is modified when applying to the minor country
components in the Ottoman Empire. Instead of the component minor
countries automatically going neutral during a Minor Country Control
Step, they only need to be checked during a New Political
Combinations Step. If in the Fiasco Zone during a New Political
Combinations Step, one die is rolled for each of the component minor
countries. Failure to roll higher than the economic loss -number means
that the component minor country goes neutral (or changes control-see
10.5.2.3); otherwise there is no effect. NOTE: No die rolls are made if
there is no economic loss number in the Fiasco Zone box.
11.6.4 CEDING THE OTTOMAN EMPIRE: If the Ottoman
Empire's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace condition,
they are ceded as separate minor countries. The political marker is
never ceded, only removed if the control of all the empire's territories
goes to another major power or powers-if the empire is gone, then it
must be recreated as in 11.2.1 to exist again.
11.6.5 POLITICAL POINTS: The Ottoman Empire is worth
twopolitical pointsGen 23/4 to create. Individually gaining or losing parts
of it gain/cost the usual political points for conquering/losing minor
countries (see 10.2.1.2).
[ 11.7 ] * THE KINGDOM OF THE TWO SICILIES: When this
option is used, the minor countries of Naples and Sicily should be
considered to be one multi-district minor country called the "Kingdom of
the Two Sicilies" (it is like this in campaign games starting in 1805).
Naples is the major district and Sicily is the secondary district, but there
are some special rules that apply if this option is used:
11.7.1: If the two are controlled by different major powers the Naples
corps are controlled by the major power controlling Naples and the
Naples fleet is controlled by the major power controlling Sicily.
11.7.2: The money and manpower values of Naples and Sicily are
combined and doubled (as in any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) but, if
separate minor Free States controlled by different major powers the
money and manpower values of each are not doubled.
[ 11.7a ] * CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: There are two obvious omissions
in the starting situation of 1805 Campaign Games. Prior to 1805
Lombardy and Romagna were united as the Cisalpine Republic, re-
established by the Treaty of Luneville in 1801 and governed (under the
presidency of Bonaparte) by the liberal Italian nobleman Count Melzi. In
January 1805 Napoleon converted the republic into the Kingdom of Italy,
to which he added Venetia after the Treaty of Pressburg. The Treaty of
Luneville also converted the Grand Duchy of Tuscany, which for most of
the 18th c. had been a possession of a junior branch of the Habsburg
dynasty, into the “Kingdom of Etruria”; in return for Spain’s cession of
Louisiana to France, the new kingdom was transferred to a member of the
House of Bourbon-Parma, who was also the nephew of the Spanish queen
and the husband of a Spanish princess.
11.7a.1 CREATING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: The Cisalpine
Republic, consisting of the primary district of Lombardy and the
secondary district of Romagna, begins 1805 campaign games as a French
Free State with eleven infantry and one cavalry strength points.
11.7a.1.1: If destroyed, the Cisalpine Republic may not be recreated.
11.7a.2 USING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: Once created, the
Cisapline Republic is generally treated as a normal minor Free State. The
combined money and manpower of its component parts are doubled (as in
any minor Free State-see 8.2.3) in value and used in any desired way for
the usual purposes. The combined money and manpower may be used to
purchase Lombardian army factors. Garrison factors from the Cisapline
Republic may be placed anywhere within Lombardy and/or Romagna.
11.7a.3 CONQUERING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: If Lombardy
is every ceded (with or without Romagna), then the Cisapline Republic is
dissolved. Additionally, if the Kingdom of Italy is created later, the
Cisalpine Republic is dissolved.
11.7a.4 CEDING THE CISAPLINE REPUBLIC: If the Cisalpine
Republic's territories are ceded, either voluntarily or as a peace condition,
they are ceded as separate minor countries and/or provinces. The political
marker is never ceded, only removed if the conditions for the republic's
existence end. MLB & JJ
[ 11.81 ] * ALTERNATE DOMINANT POWERS: In EMPIRES IN
ARMS, as with the historical events portrayed, France and Great Britain
have obvious and constant qualitative advantages over the other five
major powers and, although anyone can still win, they are the "dominant"
powers in the gate and the centers of diplomatic activity. For example, if
Prussia does very well early in a campaign game, it is still the rather puny
Prussia of the Napoleonic period in terms of army factor morale, with the
addition of some minor country corps for help. It is certainly not the
dangerous Prussia of Frederick the Great less than 50 years earlier or the
dominant Prussia (the basis of modem Germany) of 50 years later and
will have trouble maintaining any early gains. Every one of the major
powers in the game has the capability to become a dominant European
power and, during the previous 200 years or during the next century,
every one of them was or would be a dominant power. This option allows
players, as the rulers of their respective major powers to alter the
historical balance.
11.8.1 ACHEIVING OR LOSING DOMINANT POWER STATUS:
In order for Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey to become a
dominant power, they must reach the New Political Combinations Step of
an Economic Phase at peace with all other major powers and in control of
certain territories. In order for France or Great Britain or any other major
power that earlier achieved dominant power status to lose their dominant
power status, they must reach the New Political Combinations Step of an
Economic Phase at peace with all other major powers and not in control
of the territories necessary to maintain their dominant power status. A
France or Great Britain that earlier lost dominant power status may regain
dominant power status if they reach a New Political Combinations Step at
33
peace with all other major powers and in control of the territories
needed to avoid the loss of dominant power status. Any changes in
dominant power status must be announced during a New Political
Combinations Step.
FAQ 11.8.1a: If France or Great Britain lose dominant power
status, to regain it, do they have to regain control of 2 of
the seven required territories, because 11.8.1 states that
France and Great Britain may regain dominant power
status by being "in control of the territories needed to avoid
the loss of dominant status". This means that they need only
control 2 of the seven required territories.
FAQ 11.8.1c: For those countries which have to form a new
political combination in order to meet their dominance
requirements, they can´t form that combination and
declaredominance in the same step. Therefore,
dominance is determined as the first step in the New
Political Combinations Step, before any new political
combinations are declared.
11.8.2: AFFECTS ACHEIVING OR LOSING DOMINANT
POWER STATUS:
11.8.2.1 MORALE: If Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey
become dominant powers, the morale value of the dominant power's
regular infantry is increased by +1.0 and, for Spanish and Turkish
regular cavalry, morale is also increased by +1.0 Turkish dominant
power feudal infantry and feudal cavalry have their morale increased
by +0.5. If France or Great Britain loses their dominant status, the
morale of the diminished status major power's regular infantry is
reduced by -1.0.
11.8.2.2 CHANGED NAVAL ADVANTAGES: For Great Britain,
the loss of dominant status also means that their fleets lose their +1 die
roll modifier in naval combats and they must always take the first
sequence in a Naval Phase. If Austria and/or Prussia become dominant
powers their fleets lose their -1 die roll modifier in naval combats.
11.8.2.3 CHANGED LAND PHASE SEQUENCE: If Austria,
Prussia, Austria, Spain and/or Turkey becomes a dominant power while
France remains a dominant power, France no longer gets to choose its
spot in the sequence but must always take the first sequence in a Land
Phase. If two or more of Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey
become a dominant power while France is not a dominant power,
France must always take the first sequence in a Land Phase. If only one
of Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or Turkey is a dominant power while
France is not a dominant power, France takes that major power's usual
position in the sequence while the dominant major power may
announce when it will take its sequence, the same as France usually
does.
11.8.2.4 INCOME CHANGES: For Austria, Prussia, Russia, Spain or
Turkey, their total major power income is automatically increased by
10 money points on the Money and Manpower Collection Steps of
every Economic Phase while a dominant power. For France or Great
Britain, their total major power income is automatically reduced by 10
money points on the Money and Manpower Collection Steps of every
Economic Phase while not a dominant power.
11.8.2.5 LEADER IMPROVEMENT: If Austria, Prussia, Russia,
Spain or Turkey become a dominant power, the controlling player may
select one leader and consider that, for that one leader, there is an
increase in strategic, tactical and tactical maximum rating numbers of
+1. EXCEPTION: No leader's ratings may be considered to be
increased to exceed 5-5-6.Clarification: Leader improvement also
increases leaders seniority rating to a maximum of A (for example C ->
B). Single leader can be promoted only once (in case where major
power achieves dominance more than once). Leader improvement is
not cancelled if major power loses dominant status.
11.8.2.6 PROVINCE CHANGES: At the moment a major power
becomes a dominant power, all ceded provinces of other major powers
that it controls become unceded provinces of the new dominant power's
home nation. Any ceded provinces acquired later remain ceded
provinces.
11.8.3 CONTROLLED TERRITORY REQUIRED TO GAIN
DOMINANT STATUS: The following territories must be controlled
by the given major power in order to achieve dominant status:
11.8.3.1 AUSTRIA: Must control all home nation provinces plus any 5
of the following 7 territories: the Bosnia province, the Confederation of
the Rhine (even if reduced after creation-if not using option 11.5,
Austria must control at least five out of Baden, Bavaria, Hanover,
Hesse, Saxony or Wurttemburg, which count together as one territory),
the Kingdom of Italy (even if reduced after creation-if not using option
11.2, Austria must control Lombardy, Papacy and Venetia, which count
together as one territory), the Piedmont minor country, the Serbia
province, the Silesia province and the Switzerland minor country.
11.8.3.2 PRUSSIA: Must control all home nation provinces plus any 4 of
the following 6 territories: the Confederation of the Rhine (even if
reduced after creation-if not using option 11.5, Prussia must control at
least five out of Baden, Bavaria, Hanover, Hesse, Saxony or
Wurttemburg, which count together as one territory), the Denmark minor
country (with or without Norway), the Lorraine province, the Palatinate
minor country, the Moravia province and Poland (must be created).
11.8.3.3 RUSSIA: Must control all home nation provinces plus any 6 of
the following 7 territories: Armenia province, Bessarabia province, East
Galicia province, Moldavia province, Poland (must be created), the minor
country of Sweden (must include Finland) and West Galicia.
11.8.3.4 SPAIN: Must control all home nation provinces plus all 5 of the
following territories: the minor country of Gibraltar, the Kingdom of Italy
(even if reduced after creation-if not using option 11.3, Spain must
control Lombardy, Papacy and Venetia, which count together as one
territory), the Kingdom of the Two Sicilies (both Naples and Sicily), the
minor country of Morocco and the minor country of Portugal.
11.8.3.5 TURKEY: Must control all home nation provinces plus any 5 of
the following 6 territories: the Crimea province, the Georgia province, the
Military Border province, the Ottoman Empire (even if reduced after
creation-if not using option 11.6, Turkey must control at least five out of
Algeria, Cyrenica, Egypt, Morocco, Syria, Tripolitania or Tunisia, which
count together as one territory), the Podolia province and the
Transylvania province.
11.8.4 CONTROLLED TERRITORY LOSSES REQUIRED
TO LOSE DOMINANT STATUS: France and Great Britain start as
dominant powers and, to lose dominant status, must lose the control of
the following territories:
11.8.4.1 FRANCE: Must lose control of any 6 of the following 7
territories: the Flanders minor country, the Holland minor country, the
Lombardy minor country, the Lorraine province, the Palatinate minor
country, the Piedmont minor country and the Switzerland minor country.
11.8.4.2 GREAT BRITAIN: Must lose control of any 6 of the following
7 territories: the Gibraltar minor country, the Hanover minor country
(already lost at the start of every campaign game), the Ireland province,
the Malta minor country, the Portugal minor country (neutral and not
controlled by Great Britain in campaign games starting in 1805), the
Scotland province and the Wales province.
[ 11.9 ] * POLITICAL RESTRICTIONS ON PEACE:
11.9.1 "BALANCE OF POWER" RESTRICTIONS ONLOSSES: No
matter how the major powers' rulers may have wanted to dominate the
local landscape, they were all, to some extent, committed to leaving at
least a "rump" of territory and authority to their peers. This also
12.0 MISCELLANEOUS OPTIONS
[ 12.1 ] * REINFORCEMENT OPTIONS:
12.1.1 MILITIA CONVERSION: During a Money and Manpower
Expenditure Step, while at war with no other major power, a major
power's player may remove any militia factors located in controlled
home nation territory from the map and pay three money points per
militia factor to "convert" them to regular infantry factors. These new
regular infantry factors are returned to the map as reinforcements three
months later (ie., the same as newly-purchased regular infantry factors).
YES
12.1.2 SHIP BUILDING LOCATIONS: When ships are purchased,
the exact port or ports where these ships will become available when
completed (ie., where they are being "built") must be noted and
announced (their building is common knowledge). These ports are the
only ones where these ships can become available as reinforcements.
12.1.2.1: If a port city containing building and/or completed but
unassigned ships is occupied by an enemy, all of these major power
ships are considered to be destroyed.
12.1.2.2: If a minor Free State port city containing building
and/orcompleted but unassigned ships is occupied by an enemy, these
minor power ships are not necessarily considered to be destroyed and, if
building, construction can continue normally, as the major power that
took the port desires (competitive die rolls determine the ships' fate if a
mixed force occupies the port and agreement cannot be reached).
Control of these ships will eventually go to the major power that
controls both the minor country fleet counter and the port, so that the
ships can be transferred to the fleet.YES
[ 12.2 ] * NAVAL OPTIONS:
12.2.1 OPTIONAL SEA CROSSING ARROWS:
34
guarantees that any player who starts a game can still be in it when it
ends. This can be reflected in two options, either or both of which can
be used in a game:
11.9.1.1 RESTRICTIONS ON TERRITORIAL LOSSES: No major
power with a player may ever have its home nation reduced by more
than a total of three provinces.
11.9.1.2 RESTRICTIONS ON CIVIL DISORDER: No major power
with a player may ever go into civil disorder. Ignore 8.7.1 through 8.7.5
for a major power with a player that meets the civil disorder
requirements (see 8.7) and, instead, require that player to sue for and
accept any type of peace during the next Peace Step with all major
powers with which that major power was at war when the civil disorder
conditions were met.We will use this rule.
11.9.2 GREAT BRITAIN AND FRANCE AT WAR: No major
powers necessarily start at war in the campaign games (14.4 and 14.7)
that start in 1805 to give players the maximum flexibility in creating
their own diplomatic climate. Actually, France and Great Britain were
already at war and the duel between them was to continue to the bitter
end. These optional rules recreate this competition:
11.9.2.1 START AT WAR: France and Great Britain must start at war
in the campaign games starting in 1805.France and Great Britain may
NEVER make an informal peace and, unless one or both have ceased to
be dominant powers, may never be allies. Gen 23/4(Similar inGen
25/4.)
11.9.2.2 MANDATORY PEACE CONDITIONS: If France sues
Great Britain for peace, Great Britain must demand an unconditional
peace that includes peace condition C.6 to remove the NAPOLEON
leader (unless already killed). Peace cannot be made if these conditions
cannot be met (ie., if another major power with which France is making
peace at the same time does not agree to the removal of NAPOLEON).
If Great Britain sues France for peace, France must demand an
unconditional peace that includes peace condition C.1.c (which could
be chosen by any major power with which Great Britain is making
peace at the same time) to remove two fleets and peace condition C.5,
which must permit French major power forces access. These
requirements are all dropped in a game using option 11.8 if either
France or Great Britain ceases to be a dominant power and/or if one of
the other major powers becomes a dominant power.
FAQ 11.9.2.2a: If France or Britain surrenders to the other
plus other powers and the other powers involved refuse to
agree to the mandatory peace conditions, only Fr and/or
GB don't get their peace.
12.2.1.1 CHANNEL ARROW: Consider that there is a sea crossing
arrow between the Lille area and the area east of Portsmouth. NO
12.2.1.2 DANISH/SWEDISH SEA CROSSING ARROWS: These
areas are extremely narrow and could be dominated even by the guns of
the period. A fleet in the sea area cannot block any of the sea crossing
arrows in Denmark or the one connecting the Copenhagen and Malmo
areas if enemy corps and/or garrisons are located in both land areas
connected by the arrows. YES
12.2.2 NAVAL RAIDING: For each sea area adjacent to Great Britain
that contains an enemy fleet(s), British colonial trade is reduced by 5
money points (maximum reduction to 0). This is determined during an
Economic Phase. Gen 25/4This applies only during the Economic
Phase. Gen 27/2YES
12.2.3 MOVING LARGE FLEETS/TRANSPORTS: Larger fleets or
fleets convoying transports are not as mobile as smaller fleets.
12.2.3.1: These rules apply to fleets in an area that are all controlled by
one major power and/or using combined movement. They do not apply
to fleets in the same area that are controlled by different major powers
that are not using combined movement.
12.2.3.2: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack where some or all
of the fleets are transporting corps and/or contain a depot for invasion
supply loses -1 movement point off of its movement allowance for the
Naval Phase.
12.2.3.3: Any fleet starting its Naval Phase in a stack loses -1 movement
point off of its movement allowance for the Naval Phase per fleet in the
stack in excess of one fleet. For example, the movement allowance in a
stack of two fleets would be reduced to 6 and, in a stack of three fleets,
would be reduced to 5.
12.2.3.4: Rules 12.2.3.2 and 12.2.3.3 are cumulative if both apply.
However, the maximum movement allowance reduction that ever
applies is -3 movement points-a movement allowance of 4 movement
points is the least to which a stack can be reduced.
12.2.3.5: These movement allowance reductions apply only to normal
naval movement-they do not apply for naval retreat and pursuit
movements.NO
12.2.4 REDUCED NAVAL TRANSPORT CAPACITY: If this option
is used, rule 6.2.5 is modified to redefine carrying capacity. Fleets may
carry no more than 10 army factors each, regardless of how these are
organised into corps (the army factors must still be in corps). If
transporting fleets are eliminated, all excess army factors that they were
transporting are also eliminated these losses may be taken from various
corps, if desired.YES
12.2.5 PROPORTIONAL NAVAL LOSSES: When a stack of fleets
of mixed nationalities (including minor country nationalities)
participates in a combat, the losses it takes should be as nearly
proportional to the starting proportions as possible. Round .5 and above
up. When proportions do not "round out" precisely, an "odd" loss or
losses should be assigned by mutual agreement or, if agreement cannot
be reached, by competitive die rolls. For example, a stack of fleets
totalling 68 ships contains 36 British (52.9%), 20 Swedish (29.4%) and
12 Portuguese (17.7%) ships and loses 10 ships in a naval combat. The
losses should be 5.29 (5) British, 2.94 (3) Swedish and 1.77 (2)
Portuguese ships.YES
[ 12.3 ] LAND OPTIONS:
12.3.1 SUPPLY LIMITS PER DEPOT: Each individual depot that is a
supply source or part of a valid supply chain may only be used to supply
a maximum of four corps and/or besieged garrisons.YES
12.3.2 BRITISH TRAINING: Great Britain proved quite adept at
turning certain minor country troops into first-class soldiers, notably the
Portuguese and Hanoverian (the "King's German Legion" or "KGL")
troops that they trained. Under this option, after 24 continuous months
as a British-controlled minor Free State, the morale of the army factors
in the Hanover or Portugal corps is considered to be 4.0 for both infantry
and cavalry in those corps. Garrison infantry factors of these
nationalities retain their usual (2.0) morale.YES
12.3.3 CAVALRY OPTIONS:
12.3.3.1 CAVALRY SUPERIORITY: If a side has at least twice as
many cavalry factors (including cossacks and freikorps) as the other side
at the beginning of any round of a field, limited field or trivial combat (if
necessary, recalculate the number of cavalry factors present for every
combat round), the superior side gets +1 added to its combat die roll.
NOTES: The net maximum modifier to a combat die roll for all
modifiers is +1. Cavalry factors in an outflanking force are not counted
for cavalry superiority until the outflanking force "arrives" (see
7.5.2.12). Cavalry factors in an outflanking force that has arrived are not
counted as double factors for purposes of determining cavalry
superiority. This rule does not apply if all factors on both sides are
cavalry.YES
12.3.3.2 CAVALRY WITHDRAWALS: A defending cavalry corps
stacked alone or only with other cavalry corps and/or cossacks/freikorps
has its strategic rating (or that of its commanding leader) increased by
+1 for withdrawal purposes only (see 7.5.2.5.2.2). This rule does not
apply if the attacker is also an all-cavalry force and/or if the
commanding leader has a strategic rating of 5. Gen 25/4 The Austrian
Light Infantry Corps IS considered to be a cavalry corps for this
purpose. Gen 27/2YES
MLB12.3.3.3 Mameluke & Spahi Cavalry: The Islamic States
of the Levant & North Africa had ready access to feudal or
semi-feudal cavalry which were considerably cheaper to
raise than European cavalry. Cavalry raised by Syria, Egypt,
Cyrenaica, Tripolitania, Tunisia, Algeria & Morocco cost $9,
rather than $15 each.
O sea, la caballeria arabe, cuesta 9$ en vez de los 15$ que
cuesta la caballería europea.
12.3.4 GUARD COMMITMENT: Before the resolution of a combat
round commences (see 7.5.2.8 for sequencing), a player with a guard or
grenadier corps involved may choose to "commit the guard" and
announces that this is being done. If a force includes guard or grenadier
corps of two or more nationalities, only one corps may be used for this
purpose. A player may do this only once per day of combat.
12.3.4.1: If both sides have guard and/or grenadier corps, the decision to
commit or not and (if applicable) the number of morale levels of the
shift must be written down by both side's players at the start of every
combat round and revealed simultaneously.
12.3.4.2: The effect of committing the guard is to increase the morale
level used on the Combat Resolution Table by +1 or +2. For example,
the 3-2 combat table becomes the 3-3 (increased by +1) or 3-4
(increased by +2) combat table.
12.3.4.3: Only two or more guard factors of French and/or Russian
guards may be used to attempt to increase the morale level by +2. One
35
or more guard factors of Austrian, French, Prussian and/or Russian
guard factors may be used to increase the morale level by +1. Despite
these minimums, all available guard factors of a nationality that is
committed must be used for this. Turkish(See 12.10.2), British and/or
Spanish guard factors may not be committed.
12.3.4.4: The player who commits his guard then consults the GUARD
COMMITMENT TABLE on the Game Card and rolls a die. The die roll
is cross-referenced with the column showing the number of morale
levels shifted. The result is the number of guard factors automatically
lost (in addition to any that may be lost during the coming combat
round).
12.3.4.5: If at least one guard factor of the committed nationality is left,
then the combat round proceeds, with the modified morale level. The
lost guard factors do not participate in the combat round. If all
committed guard factors were lost, then the committing side is
automatically considered to break without fighting that combat round
(although the opposing side still fights).
12.3.4.6: If at least one guard factor survives and the combat round is
fought with the modified morale level, the other side must be broken
during that combat round or the side that committed theguard is
automatically considered to be broken. YES
12.3.5 ARTILLERY CORPS: The French and Russian major powers
each have the use of an artillery corps. These have special uses during
field and limited field combats, trivial combats and limited field
combats. These special uses do not apply during siege assaults or
defender attacks (unless a relieving force is available for a limited field
combat).
12.3.5.1: In every combat round (see 7.5.2.8 for sequencing) the artillery
may be used to "bombard" before normal combat is resolved, the
casualties inflicted by bombardment taking no part in later combat. If
both sides possess artillery, the bombardment losses are considered to be
determined simultaneously.
12.3.5.2: The losses removed by bombardment may not be militia,
where possible, if the side taking the bombardment losses already has a
morale loss of 2.0 or greater.
12.3.5.3: Artillery bombardment inflicts only casualties-it has no effect
on morale (ignore morale losses when doing an artillery bombardment).
12.3.5.4: Artillery always bombards using the 5-5 table, irrespective of
the tables being used for the normal combat round. Artillery
bombardment is unaffected by any terrain other than marsh-there can be
no bombardment in marsh terrain, although the artillery factors still
participate in normal combat.
12.3.5.5: Artillery also takes part during the normal combat round (ie.,
when used for bombardment it effectively gets to fight twice).
12.3.5.6: If at any time during a combat round a side (or the pinning
force of a side) consists of only artillery factors, that side is
automatically considered to break. YES
12.3.6 PROPORTIONAL LAND LOSSES: When army factors of
mixed nationality (including minor country nationalities) participate in a
combat, the losses suffered should be as nearly proportional to the
starting proportions as possible. Round .5 and above up. When
proportions do not "round out" precisely, an "odd" loss or losses should
be assigned by mutual agreement or, if agreement cannot be reached, by
competitive die rolls. Once the number of army factors lost by each
contingent are determined, the controlling players decide the types of
factors to be lost by each contingent (within the normal limits for militia,
cavalry, guard, etc. factors that must be lost by the whole army) by
mutual agreement or, if impossible, by competitive die rolls. YES
12.3.7 ARMY LEADER OPTIONS:
12.3.7.1 CORPS LEADERS: For purposes of combats (although
without a leader counter corps must still attempt to withdraw or
reinforce individually), when no leader is available for a multi-corps
force and the best corps rating is used, treat these best corps ratings the
same as if the force were commanded by a leader with those strategic
and tactical ratings and a tactical maximum rating of 1 and modify
accordingly (see 10.6.1.2.1).YES
12.3.7.2 FURTHER TACTICAL RATING REDUCTIONS: This
option extends rule 10.6.1.2.1 by allowing a commander with three
times the corps of the tactical maximum rating to have the tactical rating
reduced by -3, with four times the corps to be reduced by -4, etc. The
tactical rating can still never bereduced to below zero.YES
12.3.7.3 NAPOLEON'S RATINGS: Napoleon's military skill slipped
noticeably as he got older. If this option is used, the NAPOLEON
leader's tactical rating is reduced to 4 starting in January, 1809 and the
strategic rating reduced to 4 starting in January, 1812. These reductions
do not apply for combats fought within the original French home nation
boundaries.YES
12.3.8 DETACHING/ABSORBING MINOR FREE STATE
FACTORS: If players wish to allow Free State factors to be detached as
garrisons outside of the Free State's borders, they may do so, but the
players must keep side notes on the nationalities of garrisons,
marknationalities on grey garrison/strength counters placed outside of a
Free State's borders or make their own garrison/strength counters for the
various possible minor Free States. YES
12.3.9 NO CEDING:Allow the ceding of minor countries only as a
peace term and at no other times. Gen 23/4NO
12.3.10: OVERWHELMING NUMBERS: Field or limited field
combats where one side has a 5:1 or better ratio in strength factors
MUST be resolved using trivial combat. EXCEPTION: An outnumbered
DEFENDER may attempt to withdraw before the trivial combat by
rolling the commander's strategic rating or less. Gen 25/4YES
[ 12.4 ] * PEACE TREATY LIMITED ACCESS: This option
supersedes the force repatriation rules in 4.4.6.2 and forces are not
repatriated when peace is made. Instead, when peace is made, the former
enemies have a period of automatic "limited access" to get their forces
out of the former enemy power's territory.
12.4.1 GARRISONS: By the end of three Land Phases after peace is
made, all garrison factors must be out of the other major power's cities.
In the case of a victor that chose peace condition C.5, the requirement is
reduced to getting garrisons out of the capital cities during this period.
12.4.2 CORPS, FLEETS AND DEPOTS: By the end of six Land
Phases after peace is made, all corps, fleets, depots and depot garrison
factors must be out of the other major power's territory.This requirement
can be ignored by a victor that chose peace condition C.5.
12.4.3 FAILURE TO LEAVE: Any forces that have not met the
requirements in 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 in the required times must be
demobilised and/or scuttled during the next Reinforcement Phase
(NOTE: rule 5.1.4.2 limitations on scuttling may be ignored to meet this
requirement) unless the major power controlling the territory grants
voluntary access (see 10. 3).NO
[ 12.5 ] * ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Economic manipulation
simulates the ability of a major power to control its economy to gain the
additional political points, money or manpower that are needed.
Economic manipulation takes place during the Manipulation Step of an
Economic Phase (see 8.4). Performing economic manipulation consists
of first recording changes from the last economic manipulation setting
and then resetting the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY on
side one of each major power's National Card (even if side two is used
for everything else, this display on side one should be used with this
option during a campaign game) for the next economic manipulation.
The setting is always in the 0 square at the start of a campaign and 8.4. 1
restrictions can limit the ability to use other settings.
12.5.1 RECORDING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: Major
Powers gain or lose the number of political points specified by the large
Political Status Adjustment ("PSA") number in the square of its
ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY in which that major power's
economic manipulation marker is positioned. This square also specifies
gains or losses in money and/or manpower. Record any political point
changes on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status Card and
add or subtract the money and manpower from the totals determined
during the Money and Manpower Collection Step.
12.5.2 SETTING ECONOMIC MANIPULATION: The owning
player then sets the economic manipulation marker's position to any
square on the ECONOMIC MANIPULATION DISPLAY. This position
specifies the PSA number and amount of money and/or manpower to be
gained or lost in the next Economic Phase's Manipulation Step.YES
[ 12.6 ] BLANK FORMS: Copies of the blank forms found on side two
of the Minor Countries National Card and the back of the Status Card
can be filled out and used to provide a written record of when and what
happened. Copies of these forms, when cut apart and filled in, not only
provide reference during a game but, if used faithfully, they provide a
good record of the major events in a game. Some samples are filled in
below.
[ 12.7 ] LEADER CASUALTIES: After the completion of a field or
limited field combat, a trivial combat, or a naval combat,each side with a
leader or leaders present checks to see if any became casualties in the
combat by rolling two dice. Rolling a 12 indicates a leader casualty. If a
casualty is indicated, randomly choose a leader counter from among
those present (if more than one is present) and roll one die for the chosen
leader. If a 6 is rolled, the leader casualty is "killed" and taken
permanently from the game. On any other roll, the leader casualty is
"wounded" and taken from the map for a number of complete months
equal to the die roll number.YES
12.7.1 KEY LEADER SURVIVAL: Each player will choose one “key
leader”, who cannot be killed. If that “key leader” rolls a 12 then a 6,
during the above process in rule 12.7, instead of killing the “key leader”
change the result to a 12 month injury.
12.7.1.1 CHOOSING THE “KEY LEADER”: At the start of the
game, each player will choose one leader who cannot be killed. For
some countries, their key best leader enters as a reinforcement, ie.
Blucher or Wellington. If the leader enters as a reinforcement, the player
may instead choose another leader (if he possesses one) from the start
36
until the time that the leader arrives. When the chosen leader arrives as a
reinforcement, the secondary choice returns to being a normal leader.
Similarly, if using the optional rule that removes Kutusov, and Kutusov
is chosen as the Key leader, Russia may choose another leader as the
“Key Leader” when Kutusov is removed.YES
[ 12.8 ] * ALLIED VOLUNTARY ACCESS: Amend the rules in
10.3.1.2.2 to state that voluntary access may be granted only to an ally.
NO
[ 12.9 ] * AMERICAN TRADE OPTION: The War of 1812 between
Great Britain and the United States was to some extent "engineered" by
Napoleon and his "continental system." In this option, if peace condition
B.6 is applied to stop as major power's American trade, this counts as a
major power denied trade with America for the die roll required in
8.2.1.2.2.2.2 and the British must make the die roll during any Money
and Manpower Collection Step in which any major powers are denied
American trade by Britain and/or by the B.6 peace condition.YES
All rules denoted by an asterisk are ignored for play of the scenarios.
The scenarios are suitable for play by two players.
[ 12.9 ] AMERICAN TRADE OPTION: The War of 1812 between
Great Britain and the United States was to some extent
"engineered" by Napoleon and his "continental system". In
this option, if peace condition B.6 is applied to stop as major
power's American trade, this counts as a major power
denied trade with America for the die roll required in
8.2.1.2.2.2.2 and the British must make the die roll during any
Money and Manpower Collection Step in which any major
powers are denied American trade by Britain and/or by the
B.6 peace condition.
[ 12.10 ] TURKISH VARIANTS
12.10.1 THE GRAND VIZIER: The Grand Vizier is simply the
Sultan's chief advisor and commander-in-chief of the army. As such, he
is "Immortal." If the Grand Vizier is the victim of a leader casualty, a die
roll of 6 does not eliminate the counter permanently. Treat the result as a
six month wound instead. The Sultan will simply appoint a new Grand
Vizier at that time. Gen 29/5YES
12.10.2 THE SULTAN’S GUARD: Each Janissary Corps hold one
factor of guard infantry in place of a regular infantry strength point. This
is a substitution, one guard replacing one of the infantry. The Corps
capacity thus becomes 14 Inf, 1 Guard in 1805. Historically, picked
warriors from the 60th through 63rd Ortas, known as the Solaks,
constituted the Sultan's finest troops. Turkey does not begin any scenario
or campaign game with a guard factor. They must be built during the
course of the game. Turkish guards cannot be used per rule 12.3.4 Guard
Commitment. The Nizami-Cedid cannot have any guards attached.Gen
29/5& JJYES
12.10.3 INCREASED CALVALRY CAPACITY: Based purely on
numbers, the Turkish regular cavalry is under-represented in the game.
If using this option, each Janissary Corps can hold 2 Cav in addition to
the infantry. If used along with the Sultan's Guard, each Janissary corps
has a capacity of 1 Guard, 14 Infantry, and 2 Cavalry in 1805, and 1
Guard, 11 Infantry, and 2 Cavalry in 1792. The capacity of the Nizami-
Cedid, is increased to 12 Inf, 4 Cav in 1805, and 8 Inf, 3 Cav in
1792.Gen 29/5& JJYES
12.10.4 THE NIZAMI-CEDID: Allow the use of the Nizami-Cedid
Corps in the 1812 and 1813 scenarios/campaign games, but restrict its
usage to within the Turkish home nation and controlled minors (only)
and consider it to have a capacity of 8 Inf, and 2 Cav. The rules are too
harsh by not allowing its use. It was restored by Selim's brother in 1808
but did not reach its former glory until after the Napoleonic Era, when it
was used to crush the Janissaries in 1826.Gen 29/5This rule goes into
effect in May 1807. From this point on it has the restriction to only
move with within Turkish home nation and controlled minors. If outside
of required locations in May 1807, it is automatically disbanded.JJYES
12.10.5 OTTOMAN CAVALRY SUPERIORITY: Ottoman cavalry is
doubled for the purposes of determining cavalry superiority only.
FINNO
[ 12.11] NORTH AFRICAN VARIANTS
12.11.1. NON-EUROPEAN TROOPS: The manpower values of
conquered minor countries listed in (11.6.1 The Ottoman Empire) are
halved if owned by any major power other than Turkey.** MLB & FIN
**Exception: Egypt produces full MP.
**Exception: Spain gets full MP for Morocco and Algiers.
**Exception: Any Free State produces full manpower. FINYES
12.11.2MAMLUK& SPAHI CAVLARY: Cavalry raised by Syria,
Egypt, Cyrenaica, Tripolitania, Tunisia, Algeria & Morocco cost
$9,rather than $15 each. MLBNO
[ 12.12 ] EGYPT VARIANTS
12.12.1 EGYPTIAN LEADER OPTION: Create a leader counter to
represent the "Napoleon of Cairo," MUHAMMAD ALI. ALI is
available during the 1805 scenario if Turkey controls Egypt as a Minor
Free State. He is available in any army reinforcement step. He is used in
the same manner as the Bernadotte leader counter in the standard game.
See 10.6.5.The MUHAMMAD ALI leader counter is rated 3-2-2-C.
Gen 29/5 Once Turkey conquers Egypt any time after December 1804,
theEgyptian leader, MUHAMMAD ALI is brought into play. ALI
counts as a Turkish/Egyptian leader. However, if Egypt is conquered by
another power and then made a Free State, ALI will be considered an
Egyptian minor leader (similar to the French/Swedish leader
BERNADOTTE).YES
12.12.2 EGYPTIAN FLEET: Egypt has a fleet capable of holding up
to 15 ships. Egyptian ships’ morale is 2.5 if advanced naval rules are
being used. Otherwise, the Egyptian fleet gets a -1 modifier in combat.
12.12.2.1: Add 8 ships to at start Egyptian OoB in 1805. MUYES
[ 12.11 ] RUSSIAN VARIANT
12.11.1 RUSSIAN SCORCHED EARTH: Russia can declare any one
home or ceded province to be “scorched” per economic phase, after the
Money and Manpower Collection Step. This costs 1 PP and may not be
attempted unless Russia is at war with a MP. The provincial capital must
be in Russian control and unbesieged. There must also be at least one
unbesieged Russian corps anywhere in the province.
12.11.1.1 A scorched province has the forage values of every area
reduced by 1 for 12 months. The money value of the province is halved
(FRD) for the duration of the same time period. MUYES
13.0 SCENARIOS
[ 13.1 ] SCENARIO FORMAT: The following abbreviations have
been used. A = artillery factor or artillery corps designator. C = regular
cavalry factor or cavalry corps designator. Ck = cossack counter. Fk =
freikorps counter. Gd = guard factor or guard or grenadier corps
designator. Gr = guerrilla factor. I = regular infantry factor. Lt = light
infantry corps designator, and M = militia factor. Where the type of
corps is not specified it is an infantry corps. Where the nationality of the
corps or army factor is not specified it is that of the major power's home
nation. Information is given in the following format.
13.1.1 FORCES SETUP: Only the forces involved on the portion of the
map in use are given in the scenarios. The opposing forces are setup in
the areas specified in the individual scenarios. which will also specify
setup order.
13.1.1.1: When a force (including reinforcements) is setup in a province.
minor country or area(s) containing a city(s) or depot(s). the army
factors or corps may be set up in any unoccupied city(s) (in their corps
and/or as garrisons) or depot(s) of that province. minor country and/or
area(s). as the controlling player desires
13.1.1.2: The corps counters given for initial setup or as reinforcements
are the maximum number available. Only the minor country corps
mentioned for setup/reinforcement are used in the scenarios Players may
organize their army factors in their corps counters to require less corps
counters, if desired and possible. Corps strengths should be recorded on
the National Cards and any factors not assigned to corps (except
Cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas, which have their own counters)
should be available as factors of garrison/strength counters.
13.1.2 STARTING MONEY: Each major power is allocated a starting
amount of money points.
13.1.3 CONTROL: Control of minor countries and ceded provinces
always remains with the major power controlling them at the start and
their forces are not removed from the map if their minor country is
conquered (unless exceptions are mentioned in the special rules. For the
scenarios, the differentiation of control into a minor Free State or
conquered minor country is used for reinforcement and historical
purposes only. Only those territories needed for a scenario are
mentioned-any territories not mentioned are "out of play" for the
scenario.
13.1.4 REINFORCEMENTS: The available reinforcements in army
factors, corps counters, leaders and money are detailed as to what
arrives, arrival time and arrival location. They must be taken at the listed
time and location-if not taken then and there, the reinforcements are lost.
Reinforcements are received only if eligible (see 5.2) and, for corps,
cossacks and freikorps, only if a counter is available for use.
37
MLB12.12 NON-EUROPEAN TROOPS: Although there were
several examples of colonial troops in the British, French and
Russian services, an attempt to recruit large numbers of
“Orientals” into one of Europe’s standing armies would have
met with serious opposition. Moreover, had a power
attempted to introduce large independent forces of Muslims
to Europe, it would certainly have paid a high price in
prestige and public opinion. The manpower values of
conquered minor countries listed in (11.6.1 The Ottoman
Empire) are halved if owned by any major power other than
Turkey. Each turn a major power (except Turkey) moves one
or more corps from “Ottoman Empire” free states into
Europe (any area of the map other than Turkey, Syria or the
“winter zone” (9.2)), it loses one political point. This penalty
does not apply to “Ottoman” corps which begin the turn
already in Europe.
O sea, si otro major power que no sea Turquía controla
estos menores como "conquered" su valor económico será
:
Syria (3/2), Egypt (6/3), Cyrenaica (1/1), Tripolitania (1/1),
Tunisia (3/2), Algeria (4/2), Morocco (3/1) y Palestine (2/1).
Además, si uno de estos países hace entrar uno o más
cuerpos "otomanos" en Europa (qualquier zona del mapa
excepto Turquía, Siria o la "winter zone" (9.2)), perderá 1 PP.
No habrá pérdida si el cuerpo ya está en Europa.
13.1.5 TIME: The Turns that the game starts and ends are given. Setup
the Turn markers in the appropriate boxes of the TIME DISPLAY on the
Status Card.
13.1.6 SPECIAL RULES: Any special rules (if any) that apply to the
scenario are explained. Special rules that apply to all scenarios are.
13.1.6.1: Forces may not enter any area outside of the territories
specified as under the control of the major powers in the scenario being
played.
13.1.6.2: A combat loss is any loss incurred during combat including
sieges and surrenders (this excludes foraging losses, besieged foraging
losses and reinforcements that are lost (see 13.1.4).
13.1.6.3: Since there is no Lending Money Step in scenarios, the major
powers may not lend money to each other unless a special rule says
otherwise.
13.1.6.4: If option 12.3.5 is not used, treat all artillery factors as if they
are regular infantry factors and allow the artillery corps to hold the same
number of regular infantry/militia factors as they could normally hold
artillery factors.
13.1.6.5: All of a major power's corps and depots are available for use,
unless otherwise stated.
13.1.7 VICTORY: This tells how to determine a scenario winner.
[ 13.2 ] THE 1805 (INTRODUCTORY) SCENARIO: This scenario
allows players to master the basic military systems of EMPIRES IN
ARMS before embarking on the later scenarios and the full military,
diplomatic and economic systems of the campaign games. The 1805
scenario simulates Napoleon's victorious Austerlitz campaign.
13.2.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.2.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first.
13.2.1.1.1 Austrian Forces:
A. 3 corps and 1C corps with 23I, 7C and the MACK leader in the Ulm
area.
B. I corps with 10I, 1C and the JOHN leader in the Salzburg area.
C. 5 corps, 1C corps and 1Gd corps and the CHARLES leader with 3Gd,
32I and 11C in and/or within 1 area of the Venice area.
D. 1I in Prague.
E. 4I in Vienna.
F. 3 depots anywhere in Austrian-controlled territory.
13.2.1.1.2 Russian Forces:
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 16I and 3C. 1Ck and the KUTUSOV
leader in the Krakow area.
B. 1Gd corps, 2 corps and 1C corps with 5Gd, 11I, 4C and the
ALEXANDER leader in the Brest-Litovsk area.
C. 2 corps with 9I and 1M, 1Ck and the BENNIGSEN leader in the
Grodno area.
D. 1 depot each in the Brest-Litovsk and Lublin areas.
13.2.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup second.
A. 1 corps with 7I with the BERNADOTTE leader in the Cologne area.
B. 3 corps with 38I and 3C with the DAVOUT and SOULT leaders in
the Mainz area.
C. 2 corps, 2C corps and lGd corps with 3Gd, 19I and 10C with the
NAPOLEON, NEY and MURAT leaders in the Strasbourg area.
D. The Bavaria corps with 10 Bavarian I and 1 Bavarian C in the 5-
forage area of the Duchies.
E. 2 corps with 21I and 4C with the MASSENA leader in the Milan
area.
F. I corps with 9I in the Florence area.
G. 3I in Stuttgart.
H. 1 depot each in the Strasbourg, Mainz and Stuttgart areas.
13.2.2 STARTING MONEY: Austria starts the game with $5, Russia
starts with $3, and France starts with $10
13.2.3 CONTROL:
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home nation
and Venetia as a conquered minor country
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Russian home nation
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation plus
Flanders, Kleves, Palatinate, Duchies, Baden, Wurttemburg, Berg,
Hanover, Switzerland, Piedmont, Lombardy, Tuscany and Romagna as
conquered minor countries and Bavaria and Holland as minor Free
States
13.2.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.2.4.1 AUSTRIAN: 6 money points every Turn. Also 3I in Vienna, 1I
in Ofen and 1I in Prague every Turn. No new corps counters are
available.
13.2.4.2 RUSSIAN: 2 money points per Turn. No other reinforcements
or new corps counters are available.
13.2.4.3 FRENCH: 5 money points per Turn. 1 corps with 5I and 1M in
the Strasbourg area in November--no other new corps counters are
available.
13.2.5 TIME: The game begins in September, 1805 and ends in
December, 1805.
13.2.6 SPECIAL RULES: There are no new special rules with this
scenario.
13.2.7 VICTORY: The French player wins if he controls the city of
Vienna at the end of the game. Otherwise, the Allied player wins.
[ 13.3 ] THE 1809 SCENARIO: This scenario simulates the campaign
on the Danube--Napoleon's last major triumph.
13.3.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.3.1.1 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup first.
A. 1 corps with 12I. 5M, 1C in the area between the Ulm and Munich
areas.
B. 1 corps with 8I and 3C and the Wurttemburg corps with 5
Wurttemburg I and 1 Wurttemburg C and the NAPOLEON and
MASSENA leaders in the Nuremburg area.
C. 1 corps and 1C corps with 23I and 7C and the Bavaria corps with 11
Bavarian I and 1 Bavarian C and the DAVOUT leader in the 3-forage
area immediately north of the Munich area.
D. 1Gd corps with 9Gd and 2C in the Strasbourg area.
E. The Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and the
BERNADOTTE leader in the northernmost 4-forage area in Bavaria.
F. The Poland corps with 4 Polish I and 2 Polish C in the Warsaw area.
G. 1 corps and 1A corps with 6I and 5A in the Zara area .
H. 1 corps with 12I and 3C and 1 Lombardy corps with 8 Lombard I and
1 Lombard C and the EUGENE leader in the Venice area.
I. 2 Polish I in any Polish city (Poland = Posen and Masovia provinces).
J. 2M in Ulm.
K. 1 depot each in the Venice, Stuttgart, Strasbourg and Warsaw areas.
13.3.1.2 AUSTRIAN FORCES: The Austrian forces are setup second.
A. 2 corps with 24I, 2M. 2C in any Bohemia province area or areas.
B. 4 corps and 2Gd corps with 48I. 10Gd, 7M and 8C, 1Fk and the
CHARLES leader in the Linz area.
C. 1 corps with 9I, 1C in any East Galicia province area or areas.
D. 1Lt corps with 4I in the Karlstadt area.
E. 2 corps with 20I and 2C and I Insurrection corps with 15M and 3C
and the JOHN leader in the Trieste area.
F. 4M in Vienna.
38
G. 1 depot each in the Vienna, Prague, Krakow and Trieste areas plus 3
other depots in any 3 other areas in Austrian controlled provinces.
13.3.2 STARTING MONEY: Austria starts the game with $20 and
France starts with no money
13.3.3 CONTROL:
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation plus
Illyria, Magdeburg and Tyrol as ceded provinces. Baden, Berg, Duchies,
Flanders, Kleves, Hesse, Holland, Hanover, Venetia, Switzerland,
Palatinate, Papacy, Romagna, Tuscany and Piedmont as conquered
minor countries and Bavaria, Wurttemburg, Saxony, Lombardy and
Poland (Posen and Masovia) as minor Free States
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home nation
less Illyria and Tyrol province.
13.3.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.3.4.1 FRENCH: 5 money points per Turn. Other reinforcements are
as follows:
A. In May, the French corps that started with EUGENE receives 13M
and/or they may be placed as garrisons in Venetia and/or Lombardy
B. In May, any one eligible French corps may receive 3M.
C. On each Turn after April, place 2 Polish I in Warsaw if it is still
controlled by French forces.
D. France may receive 1 new French corps counter of any type per Turn
except on the April turn.
13.3.4.2 AUSTRIAN: 3 money points per Turn. Other reinforcements
are as follows.
A. The second Insurrection corps is available at full strength (15M, 3C)
when activated (see 10.4) and the Tyrol corps with 8I is also available
for placement (see 10.1.5).
B. On each Turn after April, 2M are placed in Vienna, Prague and Ofen,
if the city is currently Austrian-controlled.
C. On each Turn after April, add 1C to any eligible corps
D. Austria may receive 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn except
in the April Turn.
13.3.5 TIME: The game begins in April, 1809 and ends in July, 1809.
There is no French April sequence (start the game with the Austrian
sequence of the April Land Phase).
13.3.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. All French leaders' strategic ratings (but not those of the corps'
intrinsic rating) are reduced by one in addition to any other alterations,
for the April Turn only.
B. When the French A corps first enters Vienna, it adds 5 artillery
factors to its strength.
C. When an Austrian corps is in Poland at the beginning of any
Reinforcement Phase it will either lose one army factor or increase the
Polish corps by two Polish infantry factors, at the Austrian player's
choice.
D. The number of French national corps on the map at any time cannot
exceed the guard corps, the artillery corps, 4 cavalry corps and 6 corps.
The French have only 5 depots available for this scenario.
13.3.7 VICTORY:
A. The Austrian player wins immediately if NAPOLEON is killed or
captured.
B.The Austrian player wins if, at the end of the scenario he has suffered
less combat losses than the French player and the French player has
suffered at least 20 combat losses.
C. The French player wins if, at the end of the scenario. the Austrian
player has suffered at least 30 combat losses and at least 20 more than
the French player.
D. Any other result is a draw.
[ 13.4 ] THE 1812 SCENARIO: The ultimate clash of arms in
Napoleonic times is recreated in this scenario, wherein both players
must skillfully combine caution with aggression across the sweeping
plains of Russia.
13.4.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.4.1.1 RUSSIAN FORCES: The Russian forces are setup first.
A. 5 corps, 1Gd corps, 3C corps and 1A corps with 10Gd, 46I, 10C and
10A, 2Ck and the BARCLAY and WITTGENSTEIN leaders in or
within one area of the Kovno area.
B. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C, 1Ck and the BAGRATION
leader in or within one area of the Brest-Litovsk area.
C. 2 corps and 1C corps with 18I and 4C and the TORMASSOV leader
in the 4-forage area in Polesia province.
D. 2 corps with 16I and 2C in the any Moldavia province area.
E. 10I in Sveaborg
F. 15I shared in any manner between Riga and Vitebsk.
G. 25I distributed to any of the other cities within the Russian major
power (maximum of 5 per provincial capital or 2 per any other city)
H. 6 depots are placed within the Russian major power.
13.4.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup second.
A. 1 Prussian corps with 10 Prussian I,4 Prussian M and 1 Prussian C in
the Konigsberg area.
B. 4 corps, 1Gd corps, 2C corps and 1A corps with 53I, 15M, 20Gd,
19C and 12A and the NAPOLEON, DAVOUT, MURAT, and NEY
leaders in an area or areas in or within 2 areas of the Thorn area but not
adjacent to the Russian border.
C. The Venetia corps with 8 Venetian I. The Lombardy corps with 13
Lombard I. the Bavaria corps with 12 Bavarian I and 1C corps with 5C
and the EUGENE leader in the Thorn area
D. The Poland corps and the Poland C corps with 16 Polish I and 6
Polish C. the Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and the
Hanover corps with 8 Hanoverian I and 1 Hanoverian C and the
JEROME leader in an area or areas in or within one area of the Warsaw
area but not adjacent to the Russian border
E. 1 Austrian corps with 15 Austrian I and 1 Austrian C in the Lemberg
area.
F. 6M in Konigsberg and 5 Polish I in Warsaw.
G. 1 depot each in the Thorn, Konigsberg, Warsaw and Lemberg areas.
13.4.2 STARTING MONEY: Russia starts the game with $10 and
France starts with $25
13.4.3 CONTROL:
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Russian home nation and
Bessarabia as a ceded province and Finland as a conquered minor
country
FRENCH controlled territory consists of Poland as a minor Free State
(consisting of Masovia. West Galicia and Posen)
13.4.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.4.4.1 RUSSIAN: 7 money points per Turn. Other reinforcements are
as follows.
A. In July, 15M are placed in Moscow. 10M are placed in Smolensk.
and 8I are placed in Kiev. The ALEXANDER leader must be placed
with any corps at this time
B. In September, the KUTUSOV leader is placed with any corps.
C. Beginning in August, Russia receives IM per Turn in each
unbesieged Russian-controlled provincial capital of a province
containing an enemy corps and an additional IM each in St. Petersburg,
Moscow and Kiev.
D. 1Ck is placed in any Russian-controlled cossack (C) province per
Turn, up to the counter-mix limit (6 maximum).
E. Russia may place any number of new corps counters of any type in
areas with existing Russian corps each turn.
13.4.4.2 FRENCH: 7 money points per Turn. Other reinforcements are
as follows
A. In Augustremove the JEROME leader.
B. In September, 1 corps with 51 and 11M is placed in Warsaw
C. In November, 2 corps with 5I and 20M are placed in Warsaw
13.4.5 TIME: This game begins in June. 1812 and ends in February,
1813, unless ended earlier by victory conditions.
13.4.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. Only the Eastern map is used.
B. The Alexander leader may never be taken off the map (as per 10.6.2)
once placed
C. The French can use Lemberg as a supply source
D. The Russian corps that starts in Moldavia may only move to an area
in Russia before being able to move elsewhere.
E. Both sides may enter and garrison the provinces of East Galicia and
East Prussia
F. The Prussian and Austrian corps will "go home" (are removed, along
with all remaining army factors of their nationality, even if detached)
whenever their losses equal or exceed 50 percent of their starting
strength.
G. The number of French national corps on the map at anyone time
cannot exceed the guard corps,the artillery corps, 4 cavalry corps and 6
corps. The French have only 5 depots available for this scenario
13.4.7 VICTORY:
A. The French player wins immediately if (I) the ALEXANDER leader
is killed or captured or (2) if at any time after August, Russian losses
39
(including forage losses but not reinforcements that are not placed) are
three times those of the French and total at least 50 factors, or (3) if the
French have at some time occupied Moscow, St Petersburg and Kiev.
B. The Russian player wins immediately if the NAPOLEON leader is
killed or captured, or, if at any time, a Russian factor occupies the cities
of Konigsberg and Warsaw
C. The Russian player wins at the end of the game unless the French
have at some time occupied any two of-St. Petersburg, Moscow, Kiev.
D. Any other result is a draw.
[ 13.5 ] THE 1813-1814 DER BEFREIUNGSKRIEG SCENARIO:
Following the disaster in Russia, the Central European powers foresaw
the possibility of liberation. While talking peace the German powers
prepared for war.
13.5.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.5.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first
13.5.1.1.1 Russian Forces:
A. 1Gd corps, 1 corps, 1C corps and 1A corps with 3Gd, 6I, 5C and 6A
and the ALEXANDER and TORMASSOV leaders in the Dresden area.
B. 2 corps and 1 C corps with 8I and 3C and the WITTGENSTEIN
leader in the Leipzig area
C. 1 corps and 1C corps with 5I and 3C in the Wittenberg area
D. 1 corps with 7I and 1C and the BARCLAY leader in the Thorn area
(a portion of this area shows on the western map but the name is on the
eastern map).
E. 1 corps with 3I in the Mecklenburg area F. 1 corps with 4I besieging
Glogau
G. 1 corps with 8I besieging Danzig.
H. I corps with 4I besieging Stettin
I. 1 corps with 4I besieging Kustrin
J. 2I in Hamburg.
K. 3Ck in any area(s) containing any Allied corps.
L. 2 Swedish corps with 12 Swedish I and 3 Swedish C and the
BERNADOTTE leader besieging Stettin.
M. Up to 4 Russian depots in Prussian and/or Saxon areas.
13.5.1.1.2 Prussian Forces:
A. 1Gd corps and 1 corps with 1Gd. 6I, 2M and 2C and the BLUCHER
leader in the Dresden area.
B. 2 corps with 5I, 1M and 1C and the YORCK leader in the Leipzig
area.
C. 1 corps with 3I, IM and 1C in the Wittenberg area.
D. 5I and 5M and 1 Fk in Berlin.
E. Up to 3 Prussian depots anywhere in Prussia and/or Saxony.
13.5.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup second
A. 2 corps and 1C corps plus garrisons with 221, 5M and 3C and the
EUGENE leader in the Magdeburg area
B. 1 corps with 7I and 8M and the NEY leader in the northernmost area
of Baden
C. 2 corps and 1Gd corps plus garrisons with 8I, 15M, 2Gd and 2C and
the NAPOLEON and SOULT leaders in the Mainz area.
D. 1 corps and 1C corps with 8I, 2M and 6C and the DAVOUT leader in
Hanover adjacent to the Hamburg area
E. 1 corps with 9M in the Strasbourg area
F. The Bavaria corps with 13 Bavarian I and 2 Bavarian C in the
Nuremburg area.
G. 151 besieged in Danzig.
H. 3I besieged in Glogau.
I. 1I besieged in Stettin.
J. 1I besieged in Kustrin.
K. 3I in Erfurt.
L. 5 Danish I in Copenhagen.
M. 1 depot each in the Magdeburg, Mainz and Strasbourg areas.
13.5.2 STARTING MONEY: Russia starts the game with $6, Prussia
starts with $3 and France starts with $4. Austria, when it enters, starts
with $6.
13.5.3 CONTROL:
RUSSIAN controlled territory consists of Sweden (and Finland) as a
minor Free State. Also, since no part of the Russian home nation is on
the western map, the Russians may use (when controlled) the Breslau,
Posen, Stettin and/or Danzig areas as supply sources.
PRUSSIAN controlled territory consists of the Prussian home nation
less Magdeburg province plus Mecklenburg as a conquered minor
country
AUSTRIAN controlled territory consists of the Austrian home nation
less Tyrol and Illyria provinces. Saxony is covered by the Special Rules.
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation plus
Magdeburg and Tyrol as ceded provinces, Kleves, Duchies, Holland,
Flanders, Palatinate, and Berg as conquered minors countries and
Bavaria, Baden, Denmark, Wurttemburg, Hanover and Hesse as minor
Free States.
13.5.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.5.4.1 RUSSIAN: 2 money points every Turn. Other reinforcements
are as follows.
A. In September, 3 corps and 1C corps with 191, 7M and 2C and the
BENNIGSEN leader in the Danzig area.
B. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every Turn
C. Beginning in May, 1813,3I, 1C, 1A and 1Ck (maximum 3 on the map
at one time) are available at any eligible location(s) every Turn.
13.5.4.2 PRUSSIAN: 1 money point every Turn. Other reinforcements
are as follows.
A. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every Turn
B. Beginning in May. 1813, 1M is available at any eligible location
every Turn.
C. During the June, September, December and March Turns, 1Fk (if
available) in the Berlin area.
13.5.4.3 AUSTRIANS: 3 money points every Turn, after they enter the
war. Other reinforcements are as follows:
A. Any number of available corps counters on any and/or every turn
after the Austrian entry .
B. Beginning with Austrian entry, 1I and IC are available at any eligible
location(s) every Turn.
C. During the June, September, December and March Turns, IFk (if
available) in the Vienna area
13.5.4.4 FRENCH: 2 money points every Turn. Other reinforcements
are as follows.
A. In August, the MURAT leader is placed with any C corps.
B. In September, the Gd corps receives 5Gd.
C. In September, place one corps with 5M in the Erfurt area.
D. On every Turn after Apri11813, the French player receives 3M which
can be placed in any eligible corps. He also places 1M in Paris (one die
roll's worth if the NAPOLEON leader is there)
E. On every second Turn (May, July, September, etc.), 1C can be added
to any eligible corps.
F. Up to 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn
G. In June, remove the SOULT leader.
13.5.5 TIME: The game begins in April, 1813 and ends in April, 1814.
13.5.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. Only the Western Map is used
B. Until Austria has entered the war, no units may enter or retreat into
Austrian-controlled territory
C. The Bavarian corps may not move until attacked or until Austria has
entered the war
D. Both players may enter Saxony. When the French first occupy
Dresden, the French player receives control of the full strength Saxon
corps (81 and 2C) in that area. Thereafter, for as long as it lasts, the
Saxon corps and/or any detached army factors are controlled by the
player controlling Dresden-it is not removed when the control of the
Saxon Free State changes
E. (OPTIONAL)The Swedish corps may only move in an Allied Land
Movement Step if the Allied player rolls a I, 2, or 3 with one die.
F. ARMISTICE: Either player may ask for an armistice at the beginning
of any Turn after May, 1813. If the other player agrees to it, then an
"armistice" will occur for that arid the following month. If the French
side has broken in any combat in which NAPOLEON commanded then
the French player may not refuse an Allied request for an armistice. The
Allied player may not refuse a French request for an armistice prior to
(but excluding) September, 1813, if an unbesieged French factor
currently occupies Berlin. Each player may make any number of
armistice requests but there may only ever be one armistice. An
armistice request may not be made in 1814. Units may only be moved
such that they end their movement closer (in areas) towards Paris (if
French) or Berlin (if Allied) than the area from which they started
movement during the two months of an armistice. Furthermore, combat
is not allowed during an armistice (therefore units may not move such
that an attack is required under 7.3.7. Sieges may continue but siege
assaults or defender attacks may not be attempted. Special
reinforcements are placed at the beginning of the armistice.
(1) The allies add 4 Prussian I, 1 Prussian Gd, 5 Prussian C and 30
Prussian M and as many corps as are necessary to accommodate them,
in or with any existing Prussian corps. Add 25 Russian I, 3 Russian Gd,
10 Russian C, and 10 Russian M, and as many Russian corps as are
necessary to accommodate them, in or with any existing Russian corps.
Remove the WITTGENSTEIN leader . Bring the Russian A corps up to
40
full strength. Austria is now in the war on the allied side. For the
Austrians, place 2Gd corps, 1Lt corps, 3 corps and 1C corps with 8Gd,
18I, 6M and 11C and the SCHWARZENBERG leader in any area or
areas of Bohemia province. Place 2 corps with 121, IM, and 2C
anywhere in Austria outside of Bohemia province. The Austrian Fk is
placed in Vienna. Place 4 Austrian depots anywhere in Austrian
territory. The Tyrol corps, at a full strength of 8I is available for
placement (see 10.1.5), as are the two insurrection corps (see 10.1.4) at
full strength.
(2) The French add 7Gd, 5I, 15M, and 10C to any appropriate corps.
The French player also receives 10 money. Place the French A corps
with 8A in any area containing a French corps. Place the Polish corps
with 3 Polish I and 1 Polish C in any area containing a French corps.
G. When an Allied force loses a battle on the edge of the map it must be
retreated onto an adjacent friendly depot or, if this is not possible, off the
map. A force retreated off the map may not return.
H. The number of French national corps on the map at anyone time
cannot exceed the guard corps, the artillery corps, 4 cavalry corps and 6
corps. The French have only 5 of their depots available for the scenario.
13.5.7 VICTORY:
A. The Allied player wins immediately if NAPOLEON is killed or
captured.
B. If either player asks for an armistice and the other player agrees to it,
the French player will win the scenario unless, at some time the Allies
player has a factor in Paris in which case the Allied player wins
immediately.
C. If neither player asks for armistice or one asks but the other player
does not agreed to it, the Allied player will win the scenario at the end of
April, 1814 unless there are at that time no unbesieged Allied (non-
cossack or freikorps) factors on the map in which case the French player
wins.
[ 13.6] THE PENINSULAR WAR SCENARIO (1808-1814): Fresh
from his victories in Central Europe, and with Tilsit leaving most of
Europe under his control, Napoleon decided it was time to solve the
problems in Spain. Who then could have foreseen the next six grisly
years?
13.6.1 FORCES SETUP:
13.6.1.1 ALLIED FORCES: The Allied forces are setup first.
13.6.1.1.1 Spanish Forces:
A. 1 corps with 121, 4M and 2C and the BLAKE leader in the Corunna
area.
B. 1 corps with 3I and the DE LA CUESTA leader in the Leon area
(area containing the city only).
C. 1 corps with 5I, 3M and 2C in any area adjacent to the Barcelona area
(excluding the Gerona area)
D. 1 corps with 4I and 2M in the Cuidad Real area.
E. 2 corps with 1Gd, 9I, 3M and 4C and the CASTANOS leader in the
Seville area.
F. 1 corps with 4I, 4M and 1C in the Valencia area (area containing the
city only)
G. 5M in Saragossa
H. 2 depots anywhere in Spain.
13.6.1.1.2 British Forces: 31 and I depot in Gibraltar.
13.6.1.2 FRENCH FORCES: The French forces are setup second.
A. 1 corps with 7I, 4M and 2C and the MURAT leader in the Madrid
area.
B. 1 corps with 5I, 2M and 1C in the Burgos area.
C. 1 corps with 3I besieging Saragossa.
D. 1 corps with 6M in the Barcelona area
E. 1 corps with 3I and 1M in any area adjacent to the Valencia (city)
area.
F. 1 corps with 5I and 5M in the clear area between the Seville and
Cuidad Real areas.
G. 1 corps with 9I. 2M and 2C in the Lisbon area.
H. 1 corps with 17I. 6M and 2C in the Bayonne area.
I. 1M in San Sebastian
J. 4I in Perpignan.
K. 3 depots anywhere in France or with a corps or garrison in Spain.
13.6.2 STARTING MONEY: Spain starts the game with no money.
Britain starts with $10 and France starts with $8
13.6.3 CONTROL:
SPANISH controlled territory consists of the Spanish home nation.
BRITISH controlled territory consists of Portugal as a minor Free State
and Gibraltar as a conquered minor country .
FRENCH controlled territory consists of the French home nation
13.6.4 REINFORCEMENTS:
13.6.4.1 SPAIN: 1 money point every Turn. Other reinforcements are as
follows.
A. August. 1808. 1 corps with 8I is placed in any coastal area of Spain
or Portugal. but may not be moved during that Turn's Land Movement
Step.
B. Starting in July, 1808 1I and 2M per Turn may be placed in anyone
unbesieged Spanish-controlled city or eligible corps.
C. 1C every 3 months (Jan., Apr., July, Oct.) is placed with any eligible
Spanish corps.
D. Up to 1 new corps counter of any type per Turn
13.6.4.2BRITAIN: 7 money points every Turn. Other reinforcements
are as follows:
A. August, 1808. 1 corps with 6I and the WELLINGTON leader are
placed (see Special Rule B. for placement).
B. August, 1808. 1 Portuguese corps with 2I in any area in Portugal.
C. September, 1808, withdraw the WELLINGTON leader
D. September, 1808, 1 corps and 1C corps with 13I and 2C and the
MOORE leader are placed (see Special Rule B. for placement).
E. May, 1809, the WELLINGTON leader is placed with any unbesieged
corps.
F. From October, 1808 on, 1C every 6 months (Oct., Apr.) and 1
Portuguese C every 6 months. (Jan. , July) with any eligible corps.
G. From January, 1811, 1I per Turn.
H. Up to 1 new British or Portuguese corps counter of any type per
Turn.
13.6.4.3 FRENCH REINFORCEMENTS: 5 money points every Turn
Other reinforcements are as follows:
A. July, 1808, withdraw the MURAT leader.
B. October, 1808, 3 corps and 1Gd Corps with 6Gd, 42I, 9M and 10C
and the NAPOLEON and NEY leaders placed in the Bayonne and/or
Perpignan areas A bonus of $10 is also available.
C. November, 1808, 2 corps with 10I, 2M and 6C and the SOULT
leader placed in the Bayonne and/or Perpignan areas. A bonus of $5is
also available.
D. January, 1809, withdraw the NAPOLEON leader, even if besieged.
E. February, 1809, withdraw the Gd corps with all Gd and 2C (the
cavalry may come from elsewhere if not in the Gd corps). This corps is
removed from the game and is no longer available as a reinforcement).
For each Gd factor less than 5available for withdrawal, the French
player must remove 21 or 4M from any unbesieged garrison or corps.
F. March, 1809, withdraw 3I from any unbesieged garrison or corps.
G. January, 1810, the MASSENA leader is placed with any unbesieged
corps A bonus of $5is also available.
H. April, 1810, 2 corps with 20I, 8M, 2C placed in the Bayonne area.
I. April, 1811, withdraw the NEY leader, even if besieged, and 10I from
any unbesieged garrison or corps.
K. February, 1813, withdraw the SOULT leader, even if besieged, and
8I and 2C from any unbesieged garrison or corps.
L. July, 1814, the SOULT leader is placed with any unbesieged corps. A
bonus of $5is also available.
M. From August, 1808 to December. 1811, 21 and 2M per Turn and 1C
every 3 months in any eligible corps (Jan., Apr., Jul, Oct.)
N. From January, 1812, 1I and 2M per Turn and IC every 6 months in
any eligible corps (Jan., Jul.).
O. Up to I new corps counter per Turn, as long as it is not the same Turn
as a particular corps counter is removed.
14.0 CAMPAIGN GAMES
The campaign games are suitable for play by up to seven players.
[ 14.1 ] CAMPAIGN GAME FORMAT: Rules 14.2 and 14.3 should
be used to determine who controls each major power. The game is then
setup using the information in this section, in 2.0 and in the individual
campaign games. The following abbreviations have been used A =
artillery factor or artillery corps designator, C = regular cavalry factor or
cavalry corps designator, Ck = cossack counter, Fk = freikorps counter,
Gd = guard factor or guard or grenadier corps designator, Gr = guerrilla
factor, I = regular infantryfactor and M = militia factor. Where the type
of corps is not specified, it is an infantry corps. Where the nationality of
the corps or army factor is not specified, it is that of the major power's
home nation.
41
13.6.5 TIME: The game begins in June, 1808 and ends in April, 1814
unless ended sooner due to either player achieving a decisive victory.
There is no French June, 1808 sequence (start the game with the Allied
sequence of the June, 1808 Land Phase.
13.6.6 SPECIAL RULES:
A. COUNTER LIMITS: The maximum corps counter limits are
follows.
Spain may have up to all of its corps but no more than 2 depots.
Great Britain may have no more than 2 corps, the C corps and the
Portuguese corps.
France may use only the Gd corps (from October, 1808 to February ,
1909 only) and regular infantry corps (no artillery or cavalry corps) in
this scenario. There may not be more than a total of 10 corps from June,
1808 through March. 1809 and from August. 1809 through March, 1812.
From April, 1809 through July, 1809 and from April, 1812 to the end of
the game the limit is no more than 6 corps. Army factors in any corps
that are removed are eliminated. All French depots are available from
June, 1808 through March, 1809 and from August, 1809 through March,
1812. No more than 3 French depots may be on the map during all other
Turns (remove any excess during a Depot Creation/Removal Step of an
appropriate Turn)
B. ALLIED NAVAL ALLOCATION: To represent Allied naval
strength, each Turn the Allied player may move one corps from any
coastal area of Gibraltar, Spain or Portugal to any other coastal area of
Gibraltar, Spain, or Portugal. This consumes all of the corps' movement
allowance. British reinforcements A. and D. are the naval allocation for
the August and September 1808 Turns (even though D has 2 corps, in
this case both can be placed during one Turn)
C. SUPPLY SOURCES:
French: Bayonne, Toulouse, Perpignan only.
Spanish: Any friendly controlled city in Spain.
British and Portuguese: Any friendly controlled city in Portugal or
friendly controlled port city in Spain or Gibraltar Allied forces in a port
are in supply if the British player spends $1 for each such corps or
besieged garrison plus $1 extra for each such city. This payment is a
form of regular supply which is available in port cities and their areas.
Such forces may not have been force marched
D. Required army factors for withdrawals are withdrawn from any
unbesieged corps or garrison. If no army factors of the correct type are
available to withdraw, the French player does not have to withdraw them
E. Guerrillas are used (see 10.1.1).
F. The British may freely give money points to the Spanish every Turn,
if desired
G. Option 12.3.2 may, if used, be applied to Portuguese forces two years
after the British gain control of Lisbon.
13.6.7 VICTORY:
A. The French player wins a decisive victory if at any time he controls
every city in Spain and Portugal (this excludes Gibraltar and Palma).
B. The Allied player wins a decisive victory at any time he controls
every city in Spain and Portugal as well as Gibraltar, Toulouse, Bayonne
and Perpignan.
C. If no player wins a decisive victory then the French player wins a
marginal victory if he controls 5or more cities in Spain or Portugal at the
end of the game while also controlling Toulouse, Bayonne and
Perpignan.
D. The Allied player wins a marginal victory if the French player
controls less than 2 cities in Spain or Portugal.
E. Any other result is a draw.
14.1.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.1.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: This gives the starting locations for
the major power's political status markers on the POLITICAL STATUS
DISPLAY (see 2.4.3.3)
14.1.1.2 TIME: This gives the games starting and ending Turns. Place
the Turn markers in the appropriate boxes of the TIME DISPLAY to
show the campaign's starting date.
14.1.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: This gives each major
power's total victory points at the start of a game. Record on the
VICTORY POINT DISPLAY. These may be reduced by the victory
point bids used in 14.2 and/or 143 How to win a campaign game are
explained in 8.1.32.

14.1.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than seven players, this shows what
major powers the players will control in the campaign.
14.1.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: This tells what major
powers are already at war and any existing alliances and peace
conditions when the campaign game begins.
14.1.4 FORCES SETUP: The opposing forces and any setup
restrictions are listed for every major power and for their controlled
minor Free States A major power need not use all of the available corps,
fleets and depots when first setting up (unless required to get all the
factors on the map), but must use all army factors and ships given. Any
depots not listed for initial placement are still available for use, but must
be paid for when placed (see 7.2), as usual. However, any corps or fleet
counters not initially placed cannot be placed during the next three
months, until they are paid for (see 8.5.4) during a later Economic
Phase.
14.1.4.1 ARMY SETUP: Major power's army factors (including those
of their controlled minor Free States) are setup in the following
order:Russia, Turkey, Austria, Prussia, Great Britain, Spain,
France.
14.1.4.1.1: For all major powers. the initial army factors should be
distributed among the corps, whose strengths should be recorded on the
National Cards (copies of side two recommended for campaign games).
Army factors (except cossacks, freikorps and guerrillas, which have
their own counters) not assigned to corps should be available as an
appropriate number of factors of garrison/strength counters for
placement in city and/or depot garrisons.
14.1.4.1.2: All of a major power's forces (including those of controlled
minor Free States) may be placed as desired (conforming to the rules) in
any land areas within theborders of their home nation and/or controlled
minor countries except where placement is specified.
14.1.4.1.3: Major powers also place as many of their initial depots
within their home nation and/or controlled minor countries as allowed
by the campaign, so long as all are placed as supply sources and/or as
part of valid supply chains
14.1.4.1.4: When a force is setup in a province, minor country or area(s)
containing a city(s) or depot(s), garrisons, corps, cossack, freikorps or
guerrilla counters may be set up in any unoccupied city(s) or depot(s) of
that province, minor country or area(s), as the controlling player desires.
14.1.4.1.5: Available Austrian insurrection and Turkish feudal corps not
placed on the mapboard during initial setup are considered to be
standing down.Gen 23/4
14.1.4.2 NAVY SETUP: Next, major powers set up their fleets and
assigned ships (including those of their minor Free States) in the
following order:Russia. Turkey, France, Spain, Great Britain. The
initial ships should be distributed among the initial fleets, whose
strengths should be recorded on the appropriate National Cards (side two
recommended for campaign games) Unless stated otherwise, fleets must
start in, or in a sea area adjacent to, any port in the home nation and/or
controlled minor countries or may start fleets on blockade of any port(s)
of another major power with which it is at war
14.1.4.3 MONEY AND MANPOWER: Starting money and manpower
points should be noted and modified as used.
14.1.4.4 NATIONAL CARD SETUP: The National Cards are setup as
covered in 2.4.2. The use of copies of side two of these cards is
recommended for campaign games
14.1.5 CONTROL: The provinces and minor countries controlled by
and the form of control or political organization (see options 11.1-11.7)
for minor countries is given for the start of the campaign game.
14.1.6 REINFORCEMENTS: Unusual reinforcements are given
14.1.7 SPECIAL RULES: Any special rules (if any) that apply to the
campaign game are explained
[ 14.2 ] THE SELECTION OF MAJOR POWERS: Players should
utilize the following method of selecting who controls each major power
that is to be controlled by a player.
14.2.1 SELECTION PROCEDURE (2-7 PLAYERS): Each player
secretly notes a bid for each major power specifying the number of
victory points he is willing to concede to play each particular major
power. A different value must be bid for each major power. A bid may
not be zero, a fraction or a negative number, but must be a positive
whole number
14.2.1.1: Next, all bids are simultaneously revealed and compared in the
following order: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Prussia, Spain,
Turkey (skip any major powers that will not have a player).
42
14.2.1.2: For each major power the player who has bid the highest value
gains control of that major power. All other bids for other major powers
by this player and all other bids for that major power no longer count as
the sequence moves on to other major powers. If two or morebids are
equally the highest, the decision is made by unmodified competitive die
rolls, between the players who made those equal bids. This process
continues until all players have been allotted a major power. Players
subtract the number of victory points they bid for their major power,
before the game starts, from their victory levels on the VICTORY
POINTS DISPLAY on the Status Card (see 1411.3)-this may result in
negative victory point totals
14.2.2 CONTROL OF MULTIPLE MAJOR POWERS (4-6
PLAYERS): Follow the procedure outlined in 14.1 to select additional
major powers. Once all players have selected one major power, they are
all eligible to gain control of one of the still unselected major powers, by
repeating the procedure in 14.2.1 for the remaining major powers.
14.2.2.1: One player may not control more than 2 major powers and the
player in control of France may not make a bid for control of Great
Britain For example, four players decide to play the 1812-
1815Campaign game. They follow the procedure in 14.2.1and players
have been selected to control France, Great Britain, Russia and Austria.
Each player has one major power and they are all eligible to gain
control of one more from among Prussia, Turkey, or Spain. The
procedure in 14.2.1is followed only for the three remaining major
powers and the Great Britain player gains Spain, the Russian player
gains Prussia and the French player gains control of Turkey (all at the
cost of additional victory points).
14.2.2.2: If a player controls two major powers, he only wins if both of
his major powers reach their victory levels (see 8.1.3.2.3).
14.2.2.3: Two major powers controlled by the same player may never go
to war with one another
[ 14.3 ] UNCONTROLLED MAJOR POWERS (UMPS) (2-6
PLAYERS): This rule is an alternative to or can be used in addition to
using 14.2.2and allows major powers (each controlled by a player) to
temporarily control other major powers that have no player. Rule 14.2.1
is followed to select one major power per player If desired, for games
with only two or three players, 14.2.2could then be followed to select
one additional major power per player The selected major powers are
called "controlled major powers" and any unselected major powers are
called "uncontrolled major powers" ("UMPS") Some campaign games,
in their "Players" section have a list of UMPs that are already controlled
by other major powers at the start of a scenario,
14.3.1 GAINING CONTROL OF UMPS: During the UMP Control
Step of the December Economic Phase of each year, the players use of
the following procedure to determine the control of all UMPs. 14.3.1.1
UMP BIDS: Each player secretly writes down a bid between 0 and 5for
each UMP. A major power at war with an UMP who has forces inside
the UMP's controlled territory or which just declared war on the UMP
that same month (see 14.3.2.4.1) may not bid for control of that UMP.
Also, any player who does not care to gain control of an UMP may
decline to bid. Each bid must be a whole number and (unlike 14.2.1) can
be the same for more than one UMP. Also, a player can gain control of
anynumber of UMPS, not just one. Totaling these bid numbers gives the
number of victory points that player subtracts from his highest
controlled major power's victory points total (see 14113) A player at war
with an UMP must bid 0 victory points for that UMP For example, four
players decide to play the 1805Campaign game after selecting major
powers as per 14.2.1 , they bid for the 3 UMPs (Turkey, Prussia, and
Spain) TheBritish player bids 1 for Turkey, 5 for Prussia and 5 for
Spain, subtracting a total of 11victory points from his total victory
points
14.3.1.2 UMP CONTROL DIE ROLL MODIFIERS: After
simultaneously revealing their bids, each player rolls two dice for each
UMP Modifying this dice roll are the following
14.3.1.2.1: Add the number of victory points bid for that UMP
14.3.1.2.2: Add +1 if allied to that UMP
14.3.1.2.3: Subtract -2 if at war with that UMP
14.3.1.2.4: Add or subtract the value of Status Modifier of the bidding
major power on the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY on the Status
Card (see 10.5.3)
14.3.1.2.5: Add or subtract the "natural alliance modifier" value found
by crossgridding the controlled major power with the UMP on the
NATURAL ALLIANCE TABLE on the Game Card
14.3.1.3 UMP CONTROL DETERMINATION: After control of UMPs
have been decided, play is commenced for the year. Whoever rolled the
highest modified number gains control of that UMP for the rest of the
year and gains +2 political points, in one of three ways
14.3.1.3.1 Active UMPs: The UMP is "active" if the highest player
rolled a modified 10 or higher Active UMPs which were neutral prior to
this procedure should be immediately put through a Combined
Economic Phase (see 14.3.2.4.6)
14.3.1.3.2 Inactive UMPs: If the UMP is currently at war with any other
major power and the highest player's modified dice roll was less than 10,
the UMP is "inactive." Inactive UMPS which were neutral prior to this
procedure should be immediately put through a Combined Economic
Phase (see 14.3.2.4.6).
14.3.1.3.3 Neutral UMPs: If an UMP does not meet the conditions to be
active or inactive, the UMP becomes "neutral" If, during the year, a
neutral UMP is declared war upon, it becomes an inactive UMP for the
controlling major power. If no player currently controls an UMP upon
which war has been declared or which is already at war, players may
immediately (during the Declarations of War Step) bid for control of the
UMP (regardless of the modified roll, a player who gains control in this
case has an inactive UMP). If no players wish to bid the UMP must sue
for peace in the next Peace Step and accept an unconditional peace with
all enemies
14.3.2 RULES FOR USING UMPS:
14.3.2.1 RULES FOR ALL UMPS: A major power who gains control
of an UMP with which it is at war must immediately come to an
informal peace with that UMP with no conditions or terms 14.3.2.1.1: A
major power may not declare war upon its controlled UMPs nor may
they declare war upon it. Declarations of war between major powers and
UMPs are handled normally UMPs may call to allies (see 4.3) at the
option of the controlling major power (EXCEPTION see 14.3.2.2.2 and
14.3.2.3.3)
14.3.2.1.2: No UMP may ever give or lend money or cede territory to
another major power except as a result of a formal (conditional or
unconditional terms) peace settlement.
14.3.2.1.3: UMPs are not represented on the POUTICAL STATUS
DISPLAY All political points gained or lost by an UMP are instead
gained or lost by the controlling major power. A major power may not
lose or gain more than 3 political points per battle (unless commanded
by NAPOLEON or NELSON-see 6.3.4.2 and 7.5.2.10.1.3) For example,
if an UMP and its controlling major power both had say, 4 corps in a
battle they lost, the controlling major power would not lose two sets of
2, but only 3 total political points
14.3.2.1.4: Controlled UMPs may attempt to control minor neutrals (see
4.7) and use the status modifier of the controlling major power (see
10.5.3)
14.3.2.1.5: A controlled major power that allies with an UMP it controls
gains only 1 political point (not one for each major power involved)
14.3.2.1.6: Controlled UMPs gain have an economy and gain
reinforcements in the same manner as controlled major powers (see 8.0)
UMPs may not use the economic manipulation option (see 12.5). An
UMP in a mixed force with other major powers may not take combat
losses in excess of their percentage of that force (see options 12.2.5 and
12.3.6).
14.3.2.1.7: When an UMP is setup, its forces and those of its controlled
minor countries are placed as per the campaign rules setup (see 14.1.4)
14.3.2.1.8: The 5.1.4 minor country restrictions on scuttling also apply
to UMP fleets. UMP army factors may not be demobilized voluntarily--
they may be demobilized only if forced to do so by the rules
14.3.2.2 RULES FOR ACTIVE UMPS: An active UMP may declare
war upon any major power (except its controlling one) When an UMP
declares war, the controlling major power loses political points but, if
they both declare war on the same major power, in the same phase, only
one set of political points (the highest, if different) is lost. An active
UMP's forces may be used freely within the following restrictions
14.3.2.2.1: A record should be kept of the number of land factors
(excluding Turkish feudal factors, cossacks, freikorps or Austrian
insurrection corps factors) lost due to foraging, besieged supply,
surrender, scuttling, demobilization and/or combat. As soon as factors
equal to double the UMP's original national manpower value are lost, the
active UMP reverts to inactive UMP status immediately. Each ship of an
UMP that is lost, counts as three land factors when determining whether
the UMP reverts to inactive status For example, Spain's original
National Manpower value is 16 (printed on the map), therefore as soon
as Spain has lost 9 ships and 5 land factors (for a total of 32 equivalent
land factors) it reverts to an inactive UMP
14.3.2.2.2: If an active UMP allies to its controlling major power and is
declared war upon, it must call on its controlling major power as an ally
(see 4.3), if possible. The controlling major power has the choice of
breaking the alliance or declaring war on the aggressor
14.3.2.3 RULES FOR INACTIVE UMPS: A major power at war with
an inactive UMP may force an informal peace in the Peace Step of any
Turn that major power has no forces in the UMP's territory.
43
14.3.2.3.1: An inactive UMP may not declare war upon any major
power or neutral minor country and may not attack or besiege a major
power's forces outside of the UMP's controlled territory This means that
land forces of an inactive UMP may not end its Land Movement Step so
that such an attack would be required under rule 7.3.7. This DOES
preclude movement into Austrian border areas where Insurrection corps
could be placed if both Insurrection corps are not already on the
map.Gen 27/2There are no restrictions on the usage of an inactive
UMP's fleets.
14.3.2.3.2: If at any time, an inactive UMP is not at war with any major
power, it reverts to neutral UMP status.
14.3.2.3.3: Like active UMPs, an inactive UMP must call to its
controlling major power (if allied and possible--see 4.3 and 14.3.2.2.2) if
the UMP is declared war upon. The controlling major power has the
choice of breaking the alliance or declaring war on the aggressor
14.3.2.4 RULES FOR NEUTRAL UMPS: Neutral UMPs are by
definition at peace with all major powers and mayor may not be
controlled by a player.
14.3.2.4.1: If a neutral UMP without a controlling player is declared war
upon, the procedure outlined in 14.3.1.3.3 is followed to determine the
controlling major power (if any) for the remainder of the year. However
the UMP can only be gained in inactive status and a player who just
declared war on this UMP this Turn may not roll for control
14.3.2.4.2: UMPs which revert to neutrality immediately have their
forces removed from the map at their current strength and a record kept
of their remaining money (and with Prussia, manpower also). If later
they revert to active or inactive status, the forces are placed at their
current strength anywhere in the UMP's territory by the controlling
major power
14.3.2.4.3: Neutral UMPs do not follow the Economic Phase procedure
(8.0) and may not attempt to gain control of minor neutrals (see 4.6).
14.3.2.4.4: If an active or inactive UMP gained control of minor
countries as in 4.6.1 (but was not at war with the aggressor) and
subsequently reverts to neutrality before the minor country is conquered
or there is a lapse in the war, then control of the minor country reverts to
the UMP's last controlling major power.
14.3.2.4.5: Previously controlled UMPs that have reverted to neutrality
still receive reinforcements due to it from a previous Economic Phase
and are added to corps or fleets off-map by the last controlling player
14.3.2.4.6: A record is kept of the Turn in which an UMP reverts to
neutrality. Immediately, when a neutral UMP becomes active or
inactive, the controlling major power performs a "Combined Economic
Phase" by counting the number of Economic Phases that the UMP has
been neutral and multiplying this figure by the money and manpower
values of its controlled provinces and conquered minor countries (see
8.2.1.1 and 8.2.2). This value is then halved (fractions rounded down)
and is immediately spent on the purchase of land forces and corps (see
8.5.3 and 8.5.4). Minor Free State forces of the UMP are included in this
procedure (their money and manpower values being doubled then halved
equals their basic values) These forces are immediately added to the
current strength of the UMP and the entire force deployed inside the
UMP's territory .
[ 14.4 ] THE 1805-1807 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign game
simulates the early half of the Napoleonic wars which saw Napoleon
achieve his greatest successes before the debacles in Spain and Russia
The players begin with the French in a position to carry out the proposed
invasion of England or the actual conquests of Austria and Prussia and
the triumph over the Russians at Friedland.
14.4.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.4.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (I) positions.
14.4.1.2 TIME: The game begins in January, 1805 and ends after the
December, 1807 Turn.
14.4.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: All major powers begin
with 0 victory points.
14.4.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following division
of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey, Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey
4 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France. Russia, Austria.
3 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia.
2 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France Use rules 14.2 and/or 14.3 to gain
control of all initially unselected major powers
14.4.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: Before any forces are
setup, major powers may announce pre-existing states of war. This
allows major powers in effect, to declare war before the game begins No
political points are lost for doing so Players may wish to apply option
11.9.2. Pre-existing states of war may be announced only between major
powers. Neutral minor countries may not be involved. No alliances are
in effect and no peace conditions apply
14.4.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with these
strengths.
AUSTRIA: 75I, 7Gd, 15C, 7 depots, any desired corps and $33 Both
insurrection corps begin at full strength but may not be setup on the map
The freikorps is not used in this scenario. The Tyrol corps will be used
only under the conditions of 10.1.5. All leaders except
SCHWARZENBERG are available at the start of the game
FRANCE: 135I, 5Gd, 17C, any desired corps and fleets, 4 depots, 49
ships and $45 All leaders except EUGENE and JEROME are available
at the start of the game The French player also sets up Holland (the
Holland corps with 4 Dutch I and 1 Dutch C and the Holland fleet with
15 Dutch ships--the Holland fleet must start at Amsterdam)
GREAT BRITAIN: 1Gd, 19I, 4C, 2 depots, 100 ships, any desired
corps and fleets and $25. NELSON is the only leader available at the
start
PRUSSIA: 80I, 3Gd, 17C, 5 depots, any desired corps, $18 and 9
manpower. The freikorps is not used in this scenario. Only leaders
BRUNSWICK and HOHENLOHE are available at the start of the game.
The Prussian player also sets up Saxony (the Saxony corps with 8 Saxon
I and 2 Saxon C).
RUSSIA: 75I, 5Gd, 10C, 2Ck, 6 depots, 49 ships, any desired corps and
fleets, and $37. All leaders except BARCLAY, TORMASSOV and
WITTGENSTEIN are available at the start of the game No more than
one corps (and no excess factors in garrison there) may commence the
game based at Corfu.
SPAIN: 1Gd, 41I, 6C, 2 depots, 57 ships, any desired corps and fleets
and $16. Only leaders BLAKE and CASTANOS are available at the
start of the game.
TURKEY: 35I, 7C, 2 depots, 22 ships, any desired corps and fleets and
$11. All feudal corps begin at full strength and may be placed on the
map if desired.No feudal corps may begin on the map. See errata in
14.1.4.1.5.All leaders are available at the start of the game. The Turkish
player also sets up Syria (the Syria corps with 5 Syrian I and 6 Syrian
C).
14.4.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations plus
those minor countries in the status (Free State or conquered) indicated in
the "1805" column of the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game
Card.
14.4.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in the
Army Reinforcement Step of January in the year indicated or on any
later Turn. France EUGENE (1806); Great Britain WELLINGTON
(1806) and MOORE (1807); Prussia.BLUCHER (1806); Spain DE LAS
CUESTA (1807).
14.4.7 SPECIAL RULES: There are no special rules in this campaign
game.
[ 14.5 ] THE 1812-1815 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign game
simulates the last half of the Napoleonic wars which saw Napoleon's
empire, initially at its greatest extent, collapse within only three years.
The players begin with French armies poised along the Russian border.
Russia, having just ended a war with Turkey, lies ready to meet them.
Wellington is ready to commence his 1812 offensive in Spain. Austria
and Prussia are set to rise from the ashes. Players will discover that the
qualities of all except the British army have declined dramatically.
14.5.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.5.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (II) positions.
14.5.1.2 TIME: The game begins in June, 1812 and ends after the
December, 1815 Turn.
14.5.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS:
Austria: 210.
France: 260.
Great Britain: 250.
Prussia: 180
Spain: 180
44
Russia: 205.
Turkey: 200
14.5.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following division
of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia, Spain
5 PLAYERS: Russia, France. Great Britain, Austria, Prussia.
4 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria
3 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain
2 PLAYERS: Russia, France. For major powers (if uncontrolled): At
the start of the game, Turkey is a neutral UMP with no controlling
player, Spain is an active British UMP, Prussia is an active Russian
UMP, Austria is an active British UMP, Great Britain is an active
Russian UMP. UMPs of an UMP become an UMP of the controlling
major power
14.5.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES:
14.5.3.1 WARS: France is at war with Great Britain, Spain and Russia.
Great Britain is also at war with the United States (see 8.2.1.2.2.2.2)
14.5.3.2 ALLIANCES: France is allied with Prussia. Great Britain is
allied with Spain.
14.5.3.3 PEACE CONDITIONS AND AGREEMENTS: France has
the Prussian I and Austrian I Corps on loan (see French forces for
strengths) under peace condition B4 through September, 1812 for the
Prussian corps and through January, 1813 for the Austrian corps. France
has unconditional access through Prussia under peace condition C 5 and
Prussia has also agreed to allow voluntary access to the French to
garrison Konigsberg. Austria has granted voluntary access for any
period to France that is the same as if peace condition C.5 applied.
Russia and Turkey just concluded a war and have an enforced peace
with each other prior to January, 1814. Peace condition C.8 has been
applied to Austria. There is an enforced peace in effect between France
and Prussia until March, 1813 and between France and Austria until
July, 1813. France and Austria have a royal marriage (peace condition
B.5).
14.5.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with these
strengths
AUSTRIA: Apart from the I Corps under the control of the French
player (see French forces), the Austrian has 47I, 8Gd,5M, 18C, 1Fk, 9
depots, any desired corps (except the I corps) and $5. Both insurrection
corps begin at full strength, but are not on the map. The Tyrol corps (at
full strength) will be used only under the conditions of 10.1.5Only the
SCHWARZENBERG leader is available
FRANCE: France starts with $25. All French depots may be set up
anywhere within the French major power, Prussia and/or in Spain.
A. Along The Russian Border:
(1) The Prussian I Corps with 10 Prussian I, 4 Prussian M and 1 Prussian
C in the Konigsberg area
(2) The Austrian I Corps with 15 Austrian I and 1 Austrian C in the
Lemberg area.
(3) The Venetia corps with 8 Venetian I, the Lombardy corps with 13
Lombard I, the Bavaria corps with 12 Bavarian I and 1C corps with
5Cand the EUGENE leader in the Thorn area.
(4) The Poland corps and the Poland C corps with 16 Polish I and 6
Polish C, the Saxony corps with 7 Saxon I and 1 Saxon C and the
Hanover corps with 8 Hanoverian I and 1 Hanoverian C and the
JEROME leader in an area or areas that are in or within one area of the
Warsaw area but not adjacent to the Russian border
(5) 4 corps, 1Gd corps, 2C corps and 1A corps with 53I, 15M,20Gd,
19C and 12A and the NAPOLEON, DAVOUT, MURAT and NEY
leaders in an area or areas in or within 2 areas of the Thorn area but not
adjacent to the Russian border.
(6) 1 corps with 5I, 11M in the Posen province
(7) 1 corps with 5I, 20M in Brandenburg province
(8) 6M in Konigsberg
(9) 5Polish I in Warsaw.
B. Forces in Spain:
(1) 1 corps with 16I, 9M and 3C and the SOUL T leader in Andalusia
province (in the Seville area and/or any Andalusian areas not containing
Spanish corps).
(2) 1 corps with 4I, 3M and 1C in any area or areas of New Castile
province
(3) 1 corps with 18I, 6M and 2C in Leon province (any area or areas
other than the Cuidad Rodrigo area).
(4) 1 corps with 16I, 11M and 3C in any area or areas of Valencia and/or
Aragon provinces.
(5) 1 corps with 12I, 8M and 1C in any area or areas of Catalonia
province.
(6) 1 corps with 10I, 12M and 2C in any area or areas of Galicia, Leon
(other than the Cuidad Rodrigo area) and/or Old Castile provinces
C. Other Forces:
(1) 6M in Bayonne
(2) 40M and 201 set up as garrisons anywhere within the French major
power plus Prussia (other than in Prussian capitals).
(3) France begins with 25 ships and up to four fleets in or in sea areas
adjacent to any French home nation port or ports
(4) The Denmark corps with 5Danish I is setup in the Hamburg area.
Two Danish I are set up in Copenhagen along with the Denmark fleet
and 1 Danish ship.
(5) The Venetia fleet with 3 Venetian ships is placed in Venice, if used
(see option 11.2)
(6) The French player also sets up the land forces of Hesse (the Hesse
corps with 2 Hessian I) and Naples (10 Neapolitan I, 2 Neapolitan C and
may include one or both of the Naples corps) anywhere in French-
controlled territory
GREAT BRITAIN: Great Britain starts with $125. 5depots may be
placed anywhere within the British major power.
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 26I and 4C and the Portuguese corps with
18 Portuguese I and 1 Portuguese C and the WELLINGTON and
BERESFORD leaders in any area or areas in Portugal,
B. 1I each in Cuidad Rodrigo, Badajoz, Gibraltar, Malta, Corfu,
Alexandria and Cairo.
C. 2I in Palermo.
D. 2Gd, 18I and 12M anywhere in the British home nation
E. 120 ships and 7 fleets.
F, 3 Swedish corps and the Swedish fleet with 13I, 3C and 13 ships and
the BERNADOTTE leader in any area or areas of Sweden (less Finland,
which is Russian-controlled).
PRUSSIA: Apart from the I Corps under the control of the French
player (see French forces), the Prussian has 201, 3Gd, 2C, 2 depots, $10
and 100 manpower. Only the BLUCHER leader is available at the start
of the game
RUSSIA: Russia starts with $15. 6 depots may be placed within the
Russian major power.
A. 30 ships and up to 3 fleets.
B. 5 corps, 1Gd corps, 3C corps and 1A corps with 10Gd, 46I, 10C and
10A, 2Ck and the BARCLAY and WITTGENSTEIN leaders in or
within one area of the Kovno area.
C. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C, 1Ck and the BAGRATION
leader in or within one area of the Brest-Litovsk area.
D. 2 corps and 1C corps with 18I and 4C and the TORMASSOV leader
in the 4-forage area in Polesia province.
E. 2 corps with 16I and 2C in any Moldavia province area.
F. 10I in Sveaborg.
G. 15I shared in any manner between Riga and Vitebsk
H. 8I in Kiev
I. 15M in Moscow and 10M in Smolensk
J. 25I distributed to any of the other cities within the Russian major
power (maximum of 5 per provincial capital or 2 per any other city.
SPAIN: 101, 29M, 6C, 6 ships, any desired corps, 1 fleet and $4. Only
leaders DE LA CUESTA and CASTANOS are available at the start of
the game. Spanish forces may be setup anywhere within Portugal,
Majorca or Estremadura and/or Andalusia (except for the Seville area)
provinces. Up to one depot each may be placed in an area with any
Spanish corps or corps. Spain may setup 30 Gr factors (no more than 5
per province) anywhere within the Spanish home nation after the other
players have completed their setups.
TURKEY: 201, 5C, 2 depots, 12 ships. any desired corps (except the
Nizami-Cedid corps) and fleets and $3. All feudal corps begin at full
strength and may be placed on the map if desired.No feudal corps may
begin on the map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5.All leaders are available at the
start of the game. The Turkish player also sets up Syria (the Syria corps
with 5 Syrian I and 5 Syrian C)
14.5.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
(minus any ceded provinces) plus those minor countries in the status
(Free State or conquered) indicated in the "1812" column of the MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card. Other important items are.
AUSTRIA: Has lost Tyrol, Illyria and West Galicia provinces to French
control.
45
FRANCE:
A. Poland consists of Masovia, Posen, and West Galicia provinces. If
option 11.1 is not being used, consider these to be French-controlled
ceded provinces and convert all Polish corps and army factors listed in
the Forces Setup to French corps and army factors (an additional French
C corps is available and the extra French I can be added to other corps in
the same setup areas or used as garrisons in those areas.
B. The Kingdom of Westphalia, the Kingdom of Bavaria and the
Confederation of the Rhine are in existence with all component minor
countries and ceded provinces If options 11.3-11.5 are not being used,
treat all of these territories as separate French-controlled minor countries
and ceded provinces (status of all minor countries is on the MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card)
C. The Kingdom of Italy is in existence with all component minor
countries and the ceded Illyrian province. This means that the Venetian
ships and fleet are available. If option 11.2 is not being used, treat all of
these territories as separate French-controlled territories and the Venetia
fleet and ships are not used.
D. France controls only Naples of the Kingdom of the Two Sicilies and
controls only the Naples corps counters if option 11.7 is being used.
GREAT BRITAIN:
A. Britain controls Sicily (as a conquered minor) and controls the Naples
fleet counter (which currently has no ships), should Sicily be made a
minor Free State, if option 117 is being used.
B. Britain has controlled Portugal as a minor Free State for over two
years and, if used, option 12.3.2 applies to the Portuguese morale value.
PRUSSIA: Has lost Magdeburg, Posen and Masovia as ceded provinces
to French control
RUSSIA: Controls Bessarabia as a ceded province and Finland as a
conquered minor country .
SPAIN: Controls its home nation.
TURKEY: Has lost Bessarabia as a ceded province to Russian control
14.5.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in the
Army Reinforcement Step of the months and years indicated or on any
later Turn. Prussia YORCK (January, 1813); Russia.ALEXANDER
(July, 1812) and KUTUSOV (September. 1812). The Prussian freikorps
is available during the Levy Step of March, 1813.
14.5.7 SPECIAL RULES:
A. The Turkish Nizami-Cedid corps is not used in this campaign game
B. The French player cannot win this campaign game unless, at some
time in 1812, one or more French-controlled corps occupy or besiege
either Moscow or St. Petersburg and at some time in the game occupy at
least one of those citiesor Russia surrenders unconditionally to France
sometime during the game. Gen 2/72
C. The French player holds captive the Spanish BLAKE leader and 4
Spanish I. The British player holds captive 3 French l
[ 14.6 ] THE 1813-1815 CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign game
simulates the final part of the Napoleonic wars as the French armies,
decimated in Spain and Russia, struggle unsuccessfully to resist the
overwhelming Allied forces. The players begin with the French armies
in Spain and Germany being merely a shattered remnant of their former
size. The Russian, Prussian, British, and Spanish armies are massing
against them and both sides are actively seeking Austrian assistance.
Only Turkey remains uninvolved
14.6.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.6.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (III) positions.
14.6.1.2 TIME: The game begins in April 1813 and ends after the
December, 1815 Turn
14.6.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS:
Austria: 240
France: 290.
Great Britain: 280
Prussia: 210.
Spain: 210.
Russia: 245.
Turkey: 230.
14.6.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following division
of major powers is recommended
6 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia, Spain,
Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia
4 PLAYERS: Russia, France, Great Britain, Austria.
3 PLAYERS: Russia, France. Great Britain
2 PLAYERS: Russia. France For major powers (if uncontrolled). At the
start of the game, Turkey is a neutral UMP with no controlling player,
Spain is an active British UMP, Prussia is an active Russian UMP,
Austria is an active British UMP, Great Britain is an active Russian
UMP UMPs of an UMP become an UMP of the controlling major power
14.6.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES:
14.6.3.1 WARS: France is at war with Great Britain, Prussia, Russia and
Spain Great Britain is also at war with the United States (see
8.2.1.2.2.2.2).
14.6.3.2 ALLIANCES: Great Britain, Prussia and Russia are all allied
with each other. Great Britain is also allied with Spain
14.6.3.3 PEACE CONDITIONS: France has voluntary access for the
two Polish corps only through Austria under conditions that are the same
as if peace condition C5 applied except that France may not garrison any
Austrian cities. This voluntary access agreement ends when both of the
Polish corps leave Austrian territory for French-controlled territory
.Russia and Turkey have an enforced peace with each other prior to
January, 1814. France and Austria have an enforced peace with each
other prior to July, 1813. Peace condition C.8 has been applied to
Austria by France. France and Austria have a royal marriage (peace
condition B.5)
14.6.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with these
strengths.
AUSTRIA: 67I, 8Gd, 32M, 20C, 1Fk, 5 depots, any desired corps and
$20 Both insurrection corps begin at full strength, but are not on the map
The Tyrol corps (at full strength) will be used only under the conditions
of 10.15. Only the SCHWARZENBERG leader is available.
FRANCE: France starts with $14. All French depots may be setup
anywhere within the French major power and/or in Spain.
A. In Germany:
(1) 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I, 5M and 3C and the EUGENE leader
in the Magdeburg area
(2) 1 corps with 7I and 8M and the NEY leader in the northernmost area
of Baden.
(3) 2 corps and 1Gd corps with 8I, 15M, 2Gd and 2C and the
NAPOLEON and SOULT leaders in the Mainz area
(4) 1 corps and 1C corps with 8I, 2M and 6C and the DAVOUT leader
in Hanover adjacent to the Hamburg area
(5) 1 corps with 9M in the Strasbourg area
(6) The Poland corps with 7 Polish I and 2 Polish C in the Olmutz area
(7) 15I besieged in Danzig
(8) 3I besieged in Glogau.
(9) 1I besieged in Stettin.
(10) 1I besieged in Kustrin
(11) 3I in Erfurt.
B. In Spain:
(1) 1 corps with 17I, IM and 3C in any area or areas of Valencia
province.
(2) 1 corps with 5I, 3M and 1C in the Burgos area
(3) 2 corps with 26I, 4M and 4C in the Madrid area.
C. Other Forces:
(1) 1 corps and 2C corps with 10I, 15M and 10C in the Paris and/or
Lyon areas
(2) 8I and 6M divided in any manner between San Sebastian, Barcelona,
Gerona and/or Saragossa.
(3) 4I and 11M in any cities in the French home nation, to a maximum
of 3 factors per city
(4) 2 Naples corps with 12 Neapolitan I and 1 Neapolitan C and the
MURAT leader in the Naples area.
(5) 1 Danish corps with 9 Danish I and 1 Danish C in the Christiana area
(6) The Danish fleet with 5 Danish I and I Danish ship in Copenhagen
(7) France begins with 34 ships and up to 4 fleets
(8) The Venetia fleet with 4 Venetian ships in Venice, if used (see
option 11.2). The Venetia corps with 5 Venetian I is also placed in
Venice.
(9) The Baden corps with 1 Baden I. the Hanover corps with 1
Hanoverian I, the Hesse corps with 1 Hessian I, the Lombardy corps
with 5 Lombard I, and the Wurttemburg corps with I Wurttemburg I
may be placed anywhere in the French major power.
46
GREAT BRITAIN: Great Britain starts with $85. 5 depots may be
placed anywhere within the British major power
A. 2 corps and 1C corps with 22I and 4C and the Portugal corps with 14
Portuguese I and 1 Portuguese C and the WELLINGTON and
BERESFORD leaders in any area or areas of Portugal.
B. 1I each in Cuidad Rodrigo, Badajoz, Gibraltar, Malta, Corfu.
Alexandria and Cairo
C. 2I in Palermo
D. 5I and 8M anywhere in the British home nation
E. 122 ships and 7 fleets
F. 1 Swedish corps and the Swedish fleet with 4 Swedish I and 13
Swedish ships in the Stockholm area.
G. 2 Swedish corps with 12 Swedish I and 3 Swedish C and the
BERNADOTTE leader besieging Stettin
PRUSSIA: Prussia starts with $25 and 68 manpower 3 depots may be
placed anywhere within the Prussian major power or in areas with
Prussian corps in Saxony.
A. 1Gd corps and 1 corps with 1Gd, 6I, 2M and 2C and the BLUCHER
leader in the Dresden area
B. 2 corps with 5I, 1M and lC and the YORCK leader in the Leipzig
area.
C. 1 corps with 3I, 1M and 1C in the Wittenberg area.
D. 5I and 5M and 1Fk in Berlin
RUSSIA: Russia starts with $30. 5 depots may be placed anywhere
within the Russian or Prussian major powers or in areas with Russian
corps in Saxony
A. 36 ships and up to 3 fleets
B. 3 corps and 2C corps with 30I, 8C and 10M and the BENNIGSEN
leader anywhere in the Russian home nation.
C. 1Gd corps, 1 corps, 1C corps and 1A corps with 3Gd, 6I, 5C and 6A
and the ALEXANDER and TORMASSOV leaders in the Dresden area
D. 2 corps and 1C corps with 8I and 3C and the WITTGENSTEIN
leader in the Leipzig area
E. 1 corps and 1C corps with 5I and 3C in the Wittenberg area
F. 1 corps with 7I and 1C and the BARCLAY leader in the Thorn area.
G. 1 corps with 3I in the Mecklenburg area H. 1 corps with 4I besieging
Glogau.
I. 1 corps with 8I besieging Danzig.
J. 1 corps with 4I besieging Stettin
K. 1 corps with 4I besieging Kustrin.
L. 2I in Hamburg.
M. 3Ck in any area(s) containing any Russian or Prussian corps
SPAIN: 14I, 31M, 6C, 6 ships, 2 depots, any 6 corps, 1 fleet and $10.
Only leaders DE LA CUESTA and CASTANOS are available at the
start of the game. Spanish forces may be setup in any area or areas
within Portugal, Majorca, Galicia, Leon, Andalusia and/or Estremadura.
Spain may setup 30 Gr factors (no more than 5 per province) anywhere
within the Spanish home nation after all other players have completed
their setups.
TURKEY: 251, 6C, 2 depots, 14 ships, any desired corps (except the
Nizami-Cedid corps) and fleets and $10. All feudal corps begin at full
strength and may be placed on the map if desired.No feudal corps may
begin on the map. See errata in 14.1.4.1.5.All leaders are available at the
start of the game. The Turkish player also sets up Syria (the Syria corps
with 5 Syrian I and 4 Syrian C)
14.6.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations
(minus any ceded provinces) plus those minor countries in the state
(Free State or conquered) indicated in the 1813 column of the MINOR
COUNTRIES CHART on the Game Card. Other important items are:
AUSTRIA: Has lost Tyrol and Illyria provinces to French control and
West Galicia province to Russian control.
FRANCE:
A. Although Poland has disappeared. France still holds the Polish
loyalty marker. Use option 11.1 for this campaign game to keep the
Polish forces on the map.
B. The Kingdom of Westphalia is in existence with all component minor
countries and ceded province. If option 11.3 is not being used, treat all
of these territories as separate French-controlled minor countries and a
ceded province
C. The Kingdom of Bavaria is in existence, with Tyrol province
attached and is neutral. If option 11.4 is not being used, Bavaria remains
neutral, but Tyrol province is considered to be a French- controlled
ceded province.
D. The Confederation of the Rhine is in existence with all component
territories except for Bavaria and Saxony (neutral) and Mecklenburg
(controlled by Prussia). If option 115 is not being used, treat all of the
remaining components as separate French-controlled minor countries
and a ceded province
E. The Kingdom of Italy is in existence with all component minor
countries and the ceded Illyrian province. This means that the Venetian
ships and fleet are available. If option 11.2 is not being used, treat all of
these territories as separate French-controlled minor countries and a
ceded province
F. France controls only Naples of the Kingdom of the Two Sicilies and
controls only the Naples corps counters, if option 11.7 is being used.
GREAT BRITAIN:
A. Britain controls Sicily (as a conquered minor) and controls the Naples
fleet counter, should Sicily be made a minor Free State, if option 11.7 is
being used.
B. Britain has controlled Portugal as a minor Free State for over two
years and, if used, option 12.3.2 applies to Portuguese morale.
PRUSSIA: Has lost Magdeburg province to French control and Posen
and Masovia provinces to Russian control
RUSSIA: Controls Bessarabia, Masovia, Posen and West Galicia as
ceded provinces
SPAIN: Controls its home nation.
TURKEY Has lost Bessarabia province to Russian control
14.6.6 REINFORCEMENTS: There are no special reinforcements in
this campaign game.
14.6.7 SPECIAL RULES:
A. The Turkish Nizami-Cedid corps is not used in this campaign.
B. Whenever Naples is not French controlled, the MURAT leader is
removed from the board. In an Army Reinforcement Step of a Turn after
Naples reverts to French control, MURAT is again avail- able as a
French leader.
C. In June 1813, the French receive 5Gd placed in the guard corps if it is
eligible.
[ 14.7 ] THE GRAND CAMPAIGN GAME: This campaign game
simulates the entire Napoleonic wars from 1805 onward. It encompasses
the full splendor and sorrow of Bonaparte's rise and fall. The players
relive the greatest and the most disastrous of the campaigns that made
Napoleonic legend a story to inspire courage and fear.
14.7.1 STATUS CARD SETUP:
14.7.1.1 POLITICAL STATUS: Use the (1) positions
14.7.1.2 TIME: The game begins in January, 1805 and ends after the
December, 1815 Turn.
14.7.1.3 STARTING VICTORY POINTS: All major powers begin
with zero victory points
14.7.2 PLAYERS: If there are less than 7 players the following division
of major powers is recommended.
6 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey, Prussia
5 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria, Turkey
4 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia, Austria
3 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France, Russia.
2 PLAYERS: Great Britain, France. Use rules 14.2 and/or 14.3 to gain
control of all initially unselected major powers
14.7.3 EXISTING WARS AND TREATIES: Before any forces are
setup, major powers may announce pre-existing states of war. This
allows major powers in effect, to declare war before the game begins.
No political points are lost for doing so. Pre-existing states of war may
be announced only between major powers. Players may wish to apply
option 11.9.2. Neutral minor countries may not be involved. No
alliances are in effect and no peace conditions apply.
15.0 PLAYER NOTES
The following notes apply primarily to campaign games
47
14.7.4 FORCES SETUP: The major power's forces begin with these
strengths
AUSTRIA: 75I. 7Gd.15C, 7 depots, any desired corps and $33. Both
insurrection corps begin at full strength but may not be setup on the
map. The Tyrol corps will be used only under the conditions of 10.1.5.
All leaders except SCHWARZENBERG are available at the start of the
game
FRANCE: 135I. 5Gd. 17C, any desired corps and fleets, 4 depots, 49
ships and $45. All leaders except EUGENE and JEROME are available
at the start of the game. The French player also sets up Holland (the
Holland corps and the Holland fleet with 4I, 1C and 15 ships) and the
Cisapline Republic (the Lombardy corps with 11I, 1C).See [11.8]
Cisapline Republic.MLB
GREAT BRITAIN: 1Gd.19I, 4C, 2depots. 100 ships, any desired corps
and fleets and $25. NELSON is the only leader available at the start. If
using rule 5.3.1 LEADER MINIMUMS, then also add Generic Leader
221D
PRUSSIA: 80I, 3Gd, 17C, 5 depots, any desired corps, $18 and 9
manpower. Only leaders BRUNSWICK and HOHENLOHE are
available at the start of the game. The Prussian player also sets up
Saxony (the Saxony corps with 8 Saxon I and 2 Saxon C).
RUSSIA: 75I, 5Gd, 10C, 2Ck, 6 depots, 49 ships, any desired corps and
fleets, and $37. All leaders except BARCLAY, TORMASSOV and
WITTGENSTEIN are available at the start of the game. No more than
one corps may commence the game based at Corfu (and no excess
factors in garrison there).
SPAIN: 1Gd, 41I, 6C, 2 depots, 57 ships, any desired corps and fleets
and $16. Only leaders BLAKE and CASTANOS are available at the
start of the game. The Spanish controls Tuscany as a conquered
minor.See [11.8]Cisapline Republic.MLB
TURKEY: 35I, 7C, 2 depots, 22 ships, any desired corps and fleets and
$11. All feudal corps begin at full strength and may be placed on the
map if desired.No feudal corps may begin on the map. See errata in
14.1.4.1.5.All leaders are available at the start of the game, except
MUHAMMAD ALIMLB. The Turkish player also sets up Syria (the
Syria corps with 5 Syrian I and 6 Syrian C).
14.7.5 CONTROL: The major powers control their home nations plus
those minor countries in the status indicated (Free State or conquered) in
the 1805 column of the MINOR COUNTRIES CHART on the Game
Card.
14.7.6 REINFORCEMENTS: The following leaders arrive in the
Army Reinforcement Step of January in the year indicated or on any
later Turn. Austria: SCHWARZENBERG (1810); France: EUGENE
(1806) and JEROME (1808); Great Britain: WELLINGTON (1806),
MOORE (1807) and BERESFORD (1808); Prussia. BLUCHER (1807
MLB) and YORCK (1813); Russia. BARCLAY (1810), TORMASSOV
(1811), and WITTGENSTEIN (1812); Spain: DE LAS CUESTA
(1807); Turkey/Egypt: MUHAMMAD ALI (1805)MLBas soon as
Egypt is conquered by Turkey (any time after Dec 1804).The Austrian
freikorps is available during the Levy Step of March, 1809 and the
Prussian freikorps is available during the Levy Step of March, 1813. The
BERNADOTTE leader changes from being a French to a Swedish
leader in August, 1810. The following leaders are removed (even if
besieged) in the Army Reinforcement Step of the month and year
indicated and cannot be brought on thereafter. France: MASSENA (May
1811); Russia KUTUSOV (January 1813).MLB& DB
14.7.7 SPECIAL RULES: There are no special rules in this campaign
game
[ 15.1] AUSTRIA
Like Prussia, Austria holds a central position on the map Surrounded by
Russia, Turkey, Prussia and France, it requires a true Metternich to
successfully negotiate the rocky path of "real politik"
First, attempt to negotiate a nonaggression pact with Russia and Turkey
Russia should be easier than Turkey because, with so many Turkish
provinces near the Austrian border, the Turkish player may find a war to
his advantage However, Turkey may only want North Africa and may
desire peace in the Balkans to facilitate a Franco- Austrian conflict
A pact with Prussia could be crucial to counter an aggressive French
player Austria will eventually have to face the French army so, if
Austria finds itself falling behind in the territorial scrabble for minor
countries, face that war sooner rather than later. This means that the
more friends Austria has, the better. While the French are strong they are
not invincible. If Austria can ally early with Great Britain and Prussia,
the alliance will have superior strength.
If Austria finds itself at war with Turkey, the insurrection corps can
prove to be invaluable. It is important to place these corps down at the
correct time Let the first few corps past and only when Turkey is
moving its last few, place the insurrection corps on the map, forcing a
battle and cutting supply lines. Turkey's first few corps should not be
able to take part in the battle (unless adjacent) and you will be fighting
on more even terms At the very least, the threat from off-map
insurrection corps should make Turkey cautious when crossing the
Austrian border. In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, Austria's
objective has to be the destruction of France. Only when France is
brought down to size can Austria pursue its own plans for victory.
[ 15.2 ] FRANCE
France is the strongest power in Europe. Better troops, faster movement,
better and more leaders and a buoyant economy make France a very
powerful opponent. However it is not unbeatable, especially if
overstretched and faced by a powerful, well-financed coalition
Do not pressure Austria or Prussia too much, especially in the early
phases of games starting in 1805, as this may create a coalition against
France and, early in the game, France is weaker than a combined
Austria/Prussia coalition. Try to weaken a possible Austria/Prussia
coalition, perhaps by favoring one of them in the division of minor
countries or by encouraging Turkey or Russia to attack one of them.
"Divide and conquer" should be the basis of French diplomacy in all
campaign games.
Control of Italy could cause the greatest amount of friction in games
starting in 1805. With Russia controlling Corfu, every major power
except Prussia has the capacity to claim some part of Italy. Being too
forceful with French demands could prove disastrous. On the other hand,
if the other major powers squabble over Italy, this is definitely to the
French advantage, so encourage this by offering morsels to potential
allies
France has a lot of victory points to gain so don't be frivolous in
declarations of war. If possible, get the other major powers to declare
war on France. With better French morale and leadership, France should
win at least 60% of the battles and thus gain more political points than
are lost. Remember, it is better to tackle a large army with low morale
than a small army with high morale since they are easier to beat and
winning battles means gaining pursuits and victory points (via political
points) and that is what the campaign game is all about. If France does
declare war, try to have the forces available to win that war fast!
In the 1812 campaign game, France faces a tough situation. Moscow is a
long way from Poland and a powerful Austria and Prussia (and probably
Turkey) are just waiting to draw sabers. First, take Moscow or St
Petersburg. Move the two corps from central Prussia into Russia. Even
though they are mostly militia, they are great for absorbing battle and
attrition losses. Guard Warsaw while marching east to Moscow or St
Petersburg. Leave at least one French infantry corps plus the Poles (who
can receive reinforcements) and Davout to defeat Tormassov. If the
Russians have Bagration's force all in one area, strike in the first Turn!
Always leave a couple of corps in areas which can be used to build
depots and use money for supply for as long as possible. If Poland is
lost, French supply lines will extend back to Mecklenburg or Saxony
and these are difficult to defend, even against roving cossacks. As soon
as Moscow or St Petersburg falls, get out of Russia, pronto! Hopefully,
the Russians will be too crippled to greatly hinder the withdrawal
Get out of Spain! Historically, Napoleon refused to give up any of his
empire and so lost the lot. If Prussia and Austria choose to fight a winter
campaign, every factor will be needed to hold Italy and Germany
However, France has a huge force in Spain and if the British or Spanish
follow too closely, crush them!
If things are going well, especially in the Grand Campaign Game,
France may wish to impose a "continental system" on the rest of Europe
by denying trade money to Great Britain, Although this will not bring
the British lion to its knees, as Napoleon hoped, it can slow them down
and deny them subsidy money to finance France's continental opponents.
48
Peace condition B.6 allows this to be imposed on major powers that lose
wars to France and, if France has a decent money surplus, other major
powers may be persuaded not to trade with Britain by offering them cash
subsidies equal to lost trade if they do not trade with Great Britain.
Perhaps the most powerful weapon at France's disposal is the ability to
say when France moves in the Land Phase sequence. This allows France
to plan "double moves" (move last in one Turn, then first in the next
Turn). This can mean attacking an enemy that was eight areas away
before that enemy can react. A favorite tactic of one of our play testers
was to move last in the last month before an Economic Phase and
occupy an enemy capital This forces that major power to rely on British
charity for the finances to continue a war.
When the inevitable coalition forms against France, remember
Napoleon's words "I would rather fight allies than be one of them"
[ 15.3 ] GREAT BRITAIN
Correct play of Great Britain, more so than that of any other major
power, requires the process of maximizing the strengths of the British
position and minimizing , its weaknesses. This is so because those
strengths and weaknesses I are more pronounced than for other powers.
Precisely because enemy access to Great Britain is restricted by the
English Channel and policed by the overwhelmingly powerful British
navy, the British player need never retain any major troop numbers at
home Almost the entire army can be used overseas. However, it must be
said that that army will always be rather small' and so where and when it
will be committed should be chosen with caution. Likely places include
the islands of the Mediterranean, North Africa, Spain, Scandinavia,
Russia (to threaten St. Petersburg and/or weaken the Russian navy), the
Dardanelles and East Prussia where, because of their wealth, the British
forces can use regular supply while other armies may suffer from
foraging for sup- ply Of course, as circumstances develop, the better
places for commitment will present themselves.
Almost never commit British armies in fragments, keep them together so
as to minimize the risk of having them destroyed piecemeal and to gain
the maximum benefit from Wellington's superior leadership abilities.
Proper use of money is central to proper British play. Simply giving it to
whoever begs loudly will not do. Decide who Great Britain's long-term
enemies will be (usually France) and dole out money in small
increments to those major powers which appear to be staunchly opposed
to those enemies. The establishment of a "slush fund" for the purchase of
military and political favors from these and other major powers can also
prove useful.
It is seldom worth denying trade with America. The loss of colonial
trade resulting from a war with the United States is worth more to Great
Britain than the few money points denied to enemies. However, as such
a loss may really hurt financially weak countries at crucial moments, this
should not be ignored. A final warning about trading-it does not do to
have too many enemies, and consequently, too few trading partners at
any one time.
Build up the army as evenly as possible, concentrating on regular
cavalry and infantry. The British army has unequaled quality regular
infantry but lacks size. Most militia is better used for home garrisons
than in the field diluting the high British morale. Always maintain a
naval superiority over the combined navies of any two enemies or
potential enemies
[ 15.4 ] PRUSSIA
Prussia, like Austria, is in a central position and, in a campaign game
starting in 1805, has a large high-quality army. Prussia has access to
many minor neutrals, but a lack of political acumen could find Prussia
embroiled in a losing war. Until BLUCHER arrives in 1806, Prussia has
very poor leadership and unless a good opportunity presents itself,
Prussia should try not to antagonize its neighbors early. Form an alliance
with Austria, Russia and/or Great Britain. This would have the major
benefit of support in a defensive war. Preserve the large army, especially
the cavalry which is expensive to buy.
The toughest question in the opening stages of the game is whether to
create a Polish Free State. If done, Prussia could gain large numbers of
high quality Polish troops However, Austria and/or Russia could attack
and conquer the Prussian Polish provinces that would otherwise be
difficult to obtain. Mecklenburg, Hesse, Saxony, and Duchies are in the
Prussian sphere of influence, with Hanover and Denmark less so but still
attainable. With British help, maybe even Sweden could be taken.
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, Prussia must help with the
French downfall Use the saved up manpower (as regular infantry if
Great Britain will provide the necessary money) on the Turn that Prussia
attacks.
[ 15.5 ] RUSSIA
Russia has great defensive strength, due mainly to its edge-of-the-map
position. This position, coupled with its great size, poor forage values
and cossacks, make it difficult for other major powers to force Russia to
peace terms.
A major problem for Russia is the lack of adjacent neutral minor
countries. Neutral minor countries are the coinage of diplomacy and
provide room for easy expansion. Russia should gain Scandinavia
through conquest or an arrangement with other interested powers and the
Polish Free State question can be used as a lever in diplomacy with
Prussia or Austria. Russia has a large army of good quality, allowing it
to pick all the combat options with confidence, particularly the "Defend"
option, as this increases Russian morale. Russia also has decent leaders,
an artillery corps and a good basic economy.
Russia will often be called upon to intervene in Central Europe and must
negotiate useful gains in these wars. A Turkish war can only be
undertaken with good planning and powerful forces and can be made
easier with help from an ally. Turkey is especially dangerous to Russia
early in campaign games starting in 1805 or anytime that Turkey has the
help of a powerful ally.
Corfu has strategic advantages that belie its seeming insignificance.
Using sea supply from the Baltic, reinforcement corps and factors can
allow rapid expansion into Italy and North Africa.
The last question is where to place the Russian navy. Two fleets in the
Baltic and one in Corfu appears to be the best option at the start of a
campaign game starting in 1805, but may be modified by the results of
Russian diplomacy.
In the1812 campaign game, retreat before Le Grande Armee. Keep a
large force south of the Pripet Marshes to threaten to cut supply behind
the French advance to Moscow. Keep cossacks busy in the French rear
areas to force detachments to guard French supply lines. Fight for
control of St Petersburg and Moscow and try to get support from
Turkey. With superior play, the French can be sent reeling back to
Poland with the specter of defeat haunting their every faltering step.
[ 15.6 ] SPAIN
Spain's advantage lies in her large fleet, therefore an entente with France
and/or Great Britain (both of whom could find Spain a useful ally) could
provide several opportunities to expand into North Africa and Italy. In
the early stages of campaign games starting in 1805, with some
diplomacy, Spain could get Naples, some of North Africa and Portugal.
Further minor countries may need to be decided by force of arms.
Spanish guerrillas can be used as an excellent deterrent to an attack on
the Spanish home nation. They can cut supply lines and even
amalgamate to attack isolated factors Spain must still leave some regular
forces to defend the homeland and to prevent occupation of all
provincial capitals.
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, Spain is, of course, at war with
France and the French may wish peace. Great Britain and Spain are
natural allies in these games and Spain should bargain for a good
settlement, if any is made. France may need peace much more than
Spain.
[ 15,7] TURKEY
Turkey has possibly the most interesting and challenging set of tasks of
all the seven major powers. It bas virtually unlimited amounts of feudal
(basically militia) infantry and cavalry with which it can relentlessly
assault an enemy, but with such low morale, Turkey will not win very
many battles.
When in combat, pick one of the high risk-high yield options such as
outflank, assault, cordon or defend, when fighting an opponent with high
morale (such as the French or British) If "Echelon" or "Probe" is picked,
inferior Turkish morale will probably cost the combat, even though the
opponent's pursuit will not be good (as he will have lost a lot of morale
as well). Choosing the indicated options could lead to spectacular
failures but, if the opponent is outguessed, it could mean a stunning
victory where a (usually) superior Turkish cavalry force (plus cavalry
leader) can mean a relentless pursuit. When in combat, ensure that there
is a feudal cavalry corps to take pursuit losses if the battle is lost. One
combat advantage Turkey does have is that feudal infantry is notcounted
as militia for purposes of taking losses once having lost 2.0 morale.
Turkey can continue taking losses from feudal infantry regardless of
total morale loss.
In the early stages of campaign games starting in 1805, concentrate on
carving out a North African empire and try gaining a foothold in Italy. In
Italy, Turkey can be opposed by France, Austria, Spain, Russia and/or
Great Britain, so don't get too greedy. Austria and Russia will be wary of
a strong Turkish strategic position and, to avoid antagonizing them, do
not set up corps on their borders. An early pro-Austrian stance could be
to your advantage as it allows Austria greater freedom to fight the
French (which could debilitate both of them).
In the 1812 and 1813 campaign games, an initial anti-French stance is
essential to bring her down to size with the degree of commitment to her
49
downfall dependent on the number of victory points that the French
player bid for France
[ 15.8 ] GENERAL HINTS
Like most games involving a diplomatic element, campaign games of
EMPIRES IN ARMS require players to be constantly negotiating among
themselves. Players should realize that even the shorter campaign games
are long enough for many political changes and re-alignments to occur
and today's enemy can be tomorrow's ally. Try to be as truthful as
possible in dealing with other players and faithful in honoring informal
agreements. Players can appreciate a skillful "double-cross" when it is
decisive in deciding the outcome of a game, but gratuitous "stabs in the
back" (especially early in a campaign game) that gain only a few
political points accomplish little except to gain everyone's distrust and a
desire for "revenge" among the other players that can have disastrous
long-term consequences. Imposing a "harsh" peace on a current enemy
(i.e., removing the best leader, corps and fleets, the best and richest
provinces, etc) can leave that enemy so weak that other major powers
can declare war on the weakened major power to gain "easy" political
points (known as "shooting cripples") and the weakened major power
will be useless as a potential needed ally in some later war.
Have goals and a general plan for achieving them. Do not make
alliances lightly! Alliances that do not last can cost political points (and
victory points) when they have to be broken When asking for help in
negotiations have something favorable to offer in return for the desired
help. This could take the form of a loan or subsidy, ceding territory that
the other player wants, offering help in future projects or anything else
that an imaginative mind can conjure. For example. France or Britain
could offer to send a corps and a good leader to which a large number
of Spanish corps (Spain lacks good leaders for large armies) without
leaders could be attached This offer is favorable to Spain as it increases
Spain's chances for winning battles and political points while it is
favorable to the offering major power as it enables France or Britain to
risk few factors in the campaign on that front and leaves most of their
strength free for use elsewhere. Always offer something, but try to offer
no more than is absolutely necessary Players with a reputation for
upholding and following through on agreements will find that their
negotiating position is far stronger than that of more erratic players In
this game, friends can be very important and many of the game's rules
favor coalition activities.
A campaign game is won or lost based on the accumulation of victory
points. Gaining large numbers of victory points depends on gaining
political points and keeping an overall high position on the POLITICAL
STATUS DISPLAY. It is not necessary to win every war and/or battle
to win the game. What is important is not getting into situations where
long stretches of time are spent in the Fiasco and/or Instability Zone
with resultant low gains in victory points. In the long run, it is better to
realize that a situation is hopeless, surrender early enough to get the
most favorable peace terms possible and accept a few Economic Phases
with low victory points rather than to "fight to the end" and be reduced
to a military "basket case" lacking the strength to avoid further
surrenders, to exert diplomatic leverage or to later rapidly regain the lost
political points
Study the number of victory points required for the major powers to win
a game and figure what is called for in terms of victory points per
Victory Points Step. For example, in an 1805-1807 campaign game,
Austria needs 110 victory points to win This is an average of a little over
9 victory points per Victory Points Step. If 10 victory points is bid for
and gains control of Austria, this increases the average needed to 10
victory points per Victory Paints Step. Is a bid this high or even higher
warranted to gain control of Austria ?Once the need is established, what
plan gives the best chance of accumulating the required total of victory
points ?
Study the POLITICAL STATUS DISPLAY. There are definitely times
when securing alliances, making peace, ceding minor countries,
economically manipulating, etc. are most advantageous in minimizing or
maximizing political/victory point losses and gains. For example, if a
major power's political status marker is in the Dominant Zone box with -
2 PSAand 11 victory points, making an alliance (+I, political points)
just before an Economic Phase is not very productive. Thealliance
maker's political status marker would be advanced into the -3PSA and
11 victory pointsbox so that no additional victory points would be
gained from the alliance and the Political Status Adjustment Step will
see the marker adjusted into the same box where it would have been if
no alliance had been mode. In a case like this, waiting for a more
favorable moment to make the alliance makes good sense. Since
political points are lost to declare war, the ideal war is a short and
successful one; preferably declared just after an Economic Phase and
concluded before the next Economic Phase. The political points dropped
to declare a war can cost a considerable number of victory points over
the course of a long war, even if eventually victorious. Of course
winning some big battles can counteract the initial political point drop,
but can always winning be assured?
Tricks of the Trade: As with most games there are some helpful
"tricks" that can come in handy during the course of a game A few to
keep in mind are as follows.
1. Especially during a Grand Campaign Game, there are periods of
peace when a major power may safely cut expenses by getting corps and
depots and their maintenance costs off the map Corps without cavalry
can be put into garrison until needed later and feudal and insurrection
corps can stand down. Remaining corps can be spread out into richer
(higher forage value) areas where (since they are not moving) they can
safely forage without risking forage losses. As war approaches new
depots can be placed where needed, corps massed where needed, new
corps created from garrisons and, if necessary, new regular cavalry
factors built in time for the start of hostilities
2. A depot garrison can participate in a field combat with friendly corps
in its area. The up to 10 extra factors garrisoning a depot can be a useful
increment in force to a defending army without adding another corps
that could reduce a commander's tactical rating.
3. If an army contains militia, do not mass it all in one corps, but spread
it over as many corps as possible. Then, if foraging losses occur, as
many as possible can be militia factors
16.0 GLOSSARY
ALLIES - Major powers that have formally made an alliance (sec 4.5)
are allies Major powers must be allies in order to use combined
movement together (see 4.9-this is also required to transport another
major power's corps-see 6.2.5), to declare war if in the same area as an
ally that is attacked (see 7.3.8.3), to provide (with permission) depot
supply to another major power (see 7.4.2.2), to be used to trace sea
supply for another major power (see 7.4.3.1), to loan money (see 8.3), to
cede territory to each other during a Ceding Step (see 8.8.2) or to grant
voluntary access (if option 11.8 is used). Major powers may not re-ally
until at least 12 months after breaking an earlier alliance (see 4.5.3). A
major power may only run a neutral minor country at war with an ally if
there are no non-allies that can or wish to run it (see 4.6).
BLACK SEA - Sea north of Constantinople surrounded by the Turkish
and Russian coasts.
BREAKING - A side's total morale loss in a combat equals or exceeds
its final morale level at the start of the combat.
CAVALRY - Regular cavalry, feudal cavalry and cossacks and
freikorps.
CEDED PROVINCE - Province given by one major power to a second
as part of a peace settlement or such a province that has since been
reconquered by another major power or powers that are not the initial
owning major power. If reconquered by the initial owning major power
it is no longer considered a ceded province but becomes an unceded
province.
CITY GARRISON CAPACITY - Maximum capacity of army factors
(in corps and/or garrisons) being five times the city supply value (the
number of spires in the city picture).
CITY SIEGE VALUE - Strength of city against siege assault (equals
the number of fleches in the city picture).
CITY SUPPLY VALUE - Number of spires in the city is the supply
value used for supplying besieged corps or garrisons.
COMBAT LOSSES - Are losses due to field combats, limited field
combats, siege combats, trivial combats pursuits and/or surrenders.
CONTROLLED (FRIENDLY) CITY/PORT - A controlled city/port
is any vacant city/port in that major power's territory, or any city/port in
which that major power has factors, whether besieged or not.
CONTROLLED MINOR COUNTRY - A minor country which is
either a minor Free State or conquered minor country, controlled by a
major power.
CONTROLLED PROVINCE - A currently unceded home province or
province currently ceded to that major power unless that province's
capital city is occupied by unbesieged enemy factors. This affects
collection of taxation and manpower and the placement of cossacks,
freikorps and feudal forces.
CONQUERED MINOR COUNTRY - A minor country controlled by
a major power that is not a minor Free State. This is indicated by the
presence of a conquered control flag and allows the collection of basic
50
4. For security, large garrisons are often left in home nation cities,
especially in capitals and border cities If Method One for determining
final morale (see 7.5.2.6.1) is used, a garrison of 11-20 factors that
contains all regular infantry plus I militia factor has the same final
morale as a garrison of the same size that contains all 3.0 morale value
regular infantry. This is also true for garrisons of 21 or more factors with
2 militia factors. This can save a few bucks in the creation of these large
garrisons.
5. If Method One for determining final morale (see 7.5.2.6.1) is used. the
inclusion of a cossack or freikorps or two with a large army should have
no effect on final morale, but do provide cavalry factors for loss if the
army breaks and/or is pursued.
6. If option 12.3.4 is used and a guard or grenadier corps is available,
carefully study the situation after every combat round. Sometimes
committing the guard can guarantee that an enemy will break on the
next combat round where this would not be sure without the guard. In
other cases, if it is certain or nearly certain that the army with the guard
will break on the next combat round, using the guard may cause greater
morale loss to the victor and reduce their pursuit class
tax and manpower by the controlling major power. Conquered minor
countries do not have forces nor may they build any.
CORPS - Large land unit counters. NOTE. Corps on the map must have
at least one army factor.
CORPS INTRINSIC RATINGS - Each nationality has an intrinsic
strategic and tactical rating for its corps. This rating is used when no
leaders are present, for all strategic and tactical purposes. If option
12.3.7.1 is used, all corps are considered to have an unprinted intrinsic
tactical maximum rating of' '1'.
DISTRICT - A major named component of a large minor country.
FIELD FORCES - Land forces excluding guerrillas (unless attacking)
not in a city or port.
FLEET - Large naval unit counter. NOTE: Fleets on the map must have
at least one ship.
FORTRESS - Any city with fleches in its picture.
GARRISONS - Regular infantry, cossack, freikorps, guerrilla or militia
factors which are not pan of a corps, and are placed in a city, port or on a
depot.
HOME NATION - Austria, France, Great Britain, Prussia, Russia,
Spain or Turkey as defined by the major power borders, less any ceded
provinces.
INFANTRY - Regular infantry, militia, guerrillas, feudal infantry and
guard infantry.
MAJOR POWER - Home nation plus controlled minor countries plus
provinces ceded to that home nation.
MINOR FREE STATE - Minor country controlled by a major power
which has been declared a minor Free State (indicated by the Free State
control flag). Allows collection of double tax and manpower which can
only be used for forces of the minor Free State.
MONEY - The game's currency is in the form of "money points,"
denoted by a dollar sign ("$").
NEUTRAL MINOR COUNTRIES - All minor countries not under the
control of any of the major powers.
PEACE CONDITION OR PEACE TERM - Used interchangeably.
These are the items from lists "A," "B," or "C" on the VICTORY
CONDITIONS CHART on the Game Card used when making a
conditional or unconditional peace (see 4.4).
PHASING - The "phasing" player, corps, forces, etc. terminology refers
to the player or forces of that major power currently per-forming its
portion of a Turn, phase or step. All other players and forces are defined
to be "non-phasing" at that time.
PORT ADJACENT TO SEA AREA - A sea area is adjacent to a port
if it is touched at all by that port's blockade box.
PROVINCE - A major named component part of a major power's home
nation.
REGULAR CAVALRY - Cavalry that is not cossacks, freikorps or
feudal cavalry.
REGULAR INFANTRY - Infantry that is not militia, guerrillas, feudal
infantry or guard. Turkish Janissaries are regular infantry.
SEA SUPPLY - Supply chain between two unblockaded ports, at least
one containing one or more friendly fleets and bothcontaining a depot.
SEIGE - Garrisons or corps in a city/port with an enemy corps placed
on top.
SUPPLY SOURCE - Any unbesieged controlled city in a home nation
or in a controlled minor country in which there is also a depot in the
surrounding area.
SURRENDER OF TROOPS -These factors and leaders are kept as
prisoners by the capturing major power and are returned when peace
with that major power is reached as ordinary reinforcements in the next
Reinforcement Phase.
VALID SUPPLY CHAIN - A valid supply chain is a connected series
of depots of one major power, with at most one intervening area
between them, back to a supply source of that major power. No area in a
valid supply chain,including the intervals between depots,may contain
any unbesieged enemy corps, cossack, freikorps, guerrillas or garrison
unless it also contains an unbesieged friendly corps or garrison or
unbesieged allied corps or garrison. A valid supply chain may not be
traced across sea areas unless by sea supply, but may be traced across a
crossing arrow unless the surrounding sea area contains in enemy fleet.
WINTER - December, January, and February Turns.
WINTER ZONE - All land areas on the map excluding those in
Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Tripolitania, Cyrenaica, Egypt, Palestine,
Corfu, Cyprus, Rhodes, Crete, Malta, and Majorca.

17.0 DESIGNER'S NOTES

This game started out many years ago as a divisional level game
covering Europe only. Its development into its current format was an
evolutionary rather than a revolutionary process. The greatest change
was the institution of a corps level game. We wanted players to
represent the commanders-in-chief of their respective countries. The use
of corps (and equivalents) would best accomplish this. The leaders
included in the game are only those that commanded armies during the
Napoleonic years. Thus excellent leaders such as Lannes and Hill are not
included as they were only single corps commanders. We feel the three
most innovative sections of our game are:
[ 17.1 ] LAND COMBAT SYSTEM: This unique system allows each
major power to forge an empire not only by superior movement (and we
recommend the optional regular supply rule be used to force players to
maneuver carefully--see 12.3.1) but also by outthinking your opponent.
Although the land combat system is involved, the fact that players'
futures depend on their chit choice means that it is never dull. Further,
the doing away with an odds system eliminates the glitch of gamers
trying to find that extra factor to gain that somehow mystical 3-1. Every
factor counts unless that factor reduces your morale that 0.1 which
means the difference between breaking or not. The combination of all
these influences makes no two combats alike and all campaigns
memorable.
IN ARMS quantifies all the important elements of Napoleonic politics
and the status of one major power with respect to another may require
responsibilities (as in an alliance) or commitments (as in open warfare).
The political decisions relating to allies and enemies must not be made
lightly. A fickle player will quickly find himself in the bottom half of the
Political Status Display and thus collecting few victory points.
[ 17.3] UNCONTROLLED MAJOR POWERS (UMPS): This is
perhaps the most important rule of the game. We realize that arranging 7
wargamers to play a long game may be difficult; therefore it is important
that UMPs play their historical significance. The NATURAL
ALLIANCE TABLE is a method of addressing the historical influences
of one major power on another. If a player gains control of an UMP that
he should not, he has only a limited potential to exploit that UMP before
losing control. An inactive UMP cannot be used offensively and an
active UMP can only lose a limited number of factors
We hope you enjoy this game and find that EMPIRES IN ARMS
provides the resources to make and break empires in true Napoleonic
tradition.
Harry Rowland
Greg Pinder

[ 17.2 ]THE POLITICAL SYSTEM: Nearly all so-called political

games degenerate into, "How about you and I crush Prussia?" EMPIRES

18.0 RULE CONSOLIDATOR’S NOTES

All changes have been marked with different color text.

 Official errata are marked in green. The General number and
edition, ie. Gen 23/4,was placed after each such addition or
change.
 Rules clarifications are marked in blue. These are our
explanation of rules that can be interpreted many different
ways. These are mostly taken from the Ambiguous Rules pdf
by Tom Smith (TS)and from my own explanations.
 Optional rules hare marked in red. They have been taken from
a variety of sources included here below:
-MLB Rules v2.76 (marked MLB)
-Turkish variants from General 29/5, ie. Gen 29/5
-Further (House) Rules for EIA by by Mustafa Ünlü (marked
MU)
-David Bofinger (marked DB)
-EIA House rules from a Finnish Group (FIN)
-from me, Jason Johns (marked JJ)
-and a couple I forgot to note (unmarked).

51